JP2022159424A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of more reliably enhancing interest by a reserved read-ahead performance.

SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 includes: main control means for holding a winning/losing lottery; variable display means for variably displaying identification information capable of instructing a result of the winning/losing lottery; holding storage means including a plurality of storage areas capable of storing winning/losing-related information relating to the winning/losing lottery; and reservation display means capable of deriving hold display indicating storage of the winning/losing-related information in the storage areas of the holding storage means. The Pachinko machine 10 is configured to be capable of deriving a reserved read-ahead performance capable of suggesting contents of variation display of the identification information corresponding to the hold display to the hold display under display on the reservation display means, and is configured to change the hold display as a derivation target of the reserved read-ahead performance from the hold display corresponding to predetermined winning/losing-related information to another hold display after the reserved read-ahead performance is derived to the hold display corresponding to the predetermined winning/losing-related information.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special game state is to be generated, and a variable display means is displayed. A variable display is provided to teach the result of the lottery (for example, refer to Patent Document 1, etc.).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480

In recent years, when a win/fail lottery is performed while a variable display is being performed, there are many configurations in which the variable display corresponding to the win/fail lottery is suspended. Such a game machine is generally designed to derive a display that allows the user to grasp the number of pending variable displays. Here, it is demanded to improve interest by using display effects and the like.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
control means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the condition establishment detection means detects, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery; A game machine characterized by comprising:

The game machine may be a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, the game board, and the like. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 9 is a flowchart showing first type determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second type determination processing; It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination|determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; 8 is a flowchart showing normal display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows a start winning a prize device control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of various counters used for determination of a decorative design. 10 is a flowchart showing counter update processing; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a flow chart which shows suspension processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding icon setting process. It is explanatory drawing of a reservation look-ahead effect lottery table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a hold setting table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an exchange setting table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a change setting table; It is explanatory drawing of a reservation release lottery table. 9 is a flowchart showing mode rank setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a rank determination table; It is a flow chart which shows a look-ahead effect progress setting process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending icon shift processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a connection display process; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation stop process. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first starting winning device. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first starting winning device. It is a front view showing a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern display device (reserved display area). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing patterns of pending icons; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a suspension effect counter in a suspension information storage area and a suspension icon in a suspension display area in normal data shift processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a hold effect counter in a hold information storage area and a hold icon in a hold display area in data shift processing involving a pre-hold movement effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a pending effect counter in a pending information storage area and a pending icon in a pending display area in a data shift process that accompanies a move effect after being held; It is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the pending effect counter of the pending information storage area and the pending icon of the pending display area in the data shift process involving the pending exchange effect. It is a flow chart which shows a hold icon setting process in a 2nd embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the content of the variable display included in the variable information stored in the pending information storage area and the value of the pending prefetch effect lottery counter that wins in the pending prefetch effect lottery process. . In the second embodiment, the winning in the first appearance lottery process and the second appearance lottery process and the first interval between the pending icon that is the target of the mode change and the prefetching pending icon that precedes the pending icon FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship with a value of an appearing lottery counter. It is a flow chart which shows pending icon shift processing of a 2nd embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing the correspondence relationship between the first interval and the value of the approach lottery counter that wins in the approach lottery process in the second embodiment. In 2nd Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of the suspension effect counter of a suspension information storage area, and the suspension icon of a suspension display area. In 2nd Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of the suspension effect counter of a suspension information storage area, and the suspension icon of a suspension display area. In 2nd Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of the suspension effect counter of a suspension information storage area, and the suspension icon of a suspension display area. In 2nd Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of the suspension effect counter of a suspension information storage area, and the suspension icon of a suspension display area. In 2nd Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of the suspension effect counter of a suspension information storage area, and the suspension icon of a suspension display area. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a scenario rendering in the pending display area of the second embodiment; It is a front view showing a visual recognition mode of the decorative design display device (holding display area) in the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a replacement effect in the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a replacement effect in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a combined effect in the third embodiment; It is explanatory drawing which shows the interlocking production|presentation in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chaos production|presentation in 3rd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. On one side of the outer frame 11, an inner frame as a game board attachment frame is provided. A frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 omits the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) provided on the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as the front frame.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. Note that the front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of via the inner frame 12 so as to be openable.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 is provided as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof. can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

A game ball shooting handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15 and protrudes forward. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting an operation amount of an operation portion of the handle 18 . Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is shot by a shooting device 60 as a shooting means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Also, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. As shown in FIG. When the shooting prohibition button 18a is pressed, shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is gripped. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of the game ball, or temporarily stop shooting the game ball while gripping the handle 18.例文帳に追加

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper plate 19 is a ball receiver that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16, which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. - 特許庁As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Furthermore, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19 . By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, a production button 125 and a cross button 126 are provided as operating means with built-in LEDs. A corresponding effect is performed on the display device 42 or the like, or the content of the effect is changed.

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode in accordance with the change of the game state or the like. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 to light up in the event of a predetermined error. A large number of fine through-holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above each error display lamp 104 corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39 . Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 .

In addition, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39. there is In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 . Furthermore, above the shooting device 60, a ball feeding device guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving a built-in drive means (eg, solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

In the present embodiment, three balls enter the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b, ten balls enter the general prize winning port 31, and ten balls enter the variable prize winning device 32. It is constructed such that 14 game balls are paid out when there is one. In addition, even if a game ball passes through the through gate 34, which only passes the game ball but does not enter the game ball (the game ball is not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. . In addition, the first starting prize winning device 33a, the general prize winning port 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that game balls moving in the game area can always enter or pass through. The 2-start winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowest part of the game area, and game balls that do not win various prize winning ports such as the general winning port 31 exit this out port 36. It passes through and is discharged outside the game area. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails (game nails) for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, as well as various members (accessories) such as windmills. ing.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in substantially the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is arranged in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround a decorative design display device 42 which will be described later.

A ball entrance 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance 151 passes through a warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47 and passes through a decorative pattern. It is guided onto a stage 153 formed below the display device 42 . The game ball guided onto the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153, and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends back and forth formed in the center of the stage 153 and hits the game ball. It may drop into the lead-out groove 154 that guides forward.

Below the variable display device unit 35, a first starting winning device 33a is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 4, 50, and 51, the first start-up winning device 33a of the present embodiment includes a ball entry opening 331 which opens upward and allows game balls moving in the game area to enter at all times, A pair of left and right first winning openings 332 and second winning openings 333 into which a game ball that has entered the opening 331 can enter, and a game ball that has entered the opening 331 can enter the first winning opening 332 or A first guide passage 334 and a second guide passage 335 that guide to a second winning port 333, and a game in which a ball is entered in the ball entry opening 331 provided at a branch point between the first guide passage 334 and the second guide passage 335. A sorting device 336 for alternately guiding the balls to the first guide passage 334 and the second guide passage 335 is provided.

The sorting device 336 has a columnar shape extending back and forth, and a shaft portion 337 provided rotatably with the front and back direction as the central axis direction. and three rotating plates 338 which are connected to each other. 50, the sorting device 336 guides the game ball that has entered the ball entry opening 331 to the first winning opening 332, and as shown in FIG. It is configured to be displaceable between a second position that guides a game ball entering the portion 331 to the second winning hole 333 . Further, the first start-up winning device 33a abuts on a predetermined rotary plate 338 of the sorting device 336 displaced from the second position to the first position to restrict further displacement of the sorting device 336, A turning amount regulating portion 339 is provided which abuts on a rotating plate 338 other than the predetermined rotating plate 338 among the distributing devices 336 displaced from the position to the second position to restrict further displacement of the distributing device 336. ing.

When the sorting device 336 is in the first position, the rotating plates 338 of the sorting device 336 are configured to block both the first guide passage 334 and the second guide passage 335, but the first starting winning device When a game ball enters the ball entry opening 331 of 33a, the game ball is guided by a rotating plate 338 extending leftward from the shaft portion 337, and the game ball placed on the rotating plate 338 Due to the weight, the sorting device 336 is pivotally displaced in the counterclockwise direction toward the second position where pivoting is permitted. As a result, the game ball is guided to the first guide passage 334 and enters the first winning hole 332, while the distribution device 336 is maintained at the second position by its own weight balance.

Also, when the sorting device 336 is in the second position, the plurality of rotating plates 338 of the sorting device 336 are configured to block both the first guide passage 334 and the second guide passage 335, but the first start-up When a game ball enters the ball entry opening 331 of the prize winning device 33a, the game ball is guided to a rotating plate 338 extending rightward from the shaft portion 337, and is placed on the rotating plate 338. Due to the weight of the ball, the sorting device 336 rotates clockwise toward the first position where rotation is permitted. As a result, the game ball is guided to the second guide passage 335 and enters the second winning hole 333, while the distribution device 336 is maintained at the first position by its own weight balance.

By making the game ball enter the first starting prize winning device 33a with the above configuration, the game ball wins the first prize winning port 332 and the second prize winning port 333 alternately. It is to be noted that the game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is constructed so as to enter the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. Further, the specific configuration of the sorting device 336 is not particularly limited, and it must be configured so that the game balls can enter the first winning hole 332 and the second winning hole 333 alternately. For example, the design can be changed as appropriate. A magnet is embedded in the rotation amount regulating portion 339, and a (normal) magnetic material such as metal is embedded in each of the two rotating plates 338 that can come into contact with the rotation amount regulating portion 339. It may be configured such that the posture of the sorting device 336 is maintained with a slight vibration while allowing the sorting device 336 to operate due to the weight of the .

A through gate 34 is arranged in a region (right side region) located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 in the game region. The through gate 34 is configured so that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. The through gate 34 has a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, which will be described later in detail.

A second starting winning device 33b is arranged downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side area. The second start-up winning device 33b has a pair of left and right blade members 371. As shown in FIG. The blade member 371 is configured to be rotatably displaceable between a closed position that extends vertically and an open position that opens outward. In this embodiment, a game nail is arranged directly above the second start-up winning device 33b. There is no room for the ball to pass through. Therefore, when the blade member 371 is in the closed position, the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. On the other hand, by displacing the blade member 371 to the open position, a gap is secured between the game nail and the blade member 371 through which the game ball can pass, and the side of the second starting prize winning device 33b is moved. The game ball is guided by the blade member 371 to the winning opening of the second starting winning device 33b. Therefore, by setting the blade member 371 to the open position, the second starting winning device 33b is set to an open state in which a game ball can enter.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the second starting prize winning device 33b is performed, and a normal symbol display is performed. A variable display for teaching the result of the entrance support lottery is performed on the device 41 . Then, when winning the ball-entering support lottery, the second starting prize-winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the first starting winning device 33a includes a left starting winning switch 224a for detecting a game ball that has entered the first winning port 332, and a game ball that has entered the second winning port 333. A right start winning switch 224b is provided for detection. Further, the second start-up winning device 33b is provided with a second start-up winning switch 224c for detecting a game ball that has entered the second start-up winning device 33b. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, 224c, a lottery (whether or not lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and special display devices 43a, 43b, which will be described later, And, it is configured such that the decorative pattern display device 42 performs a variable display. Then, when the player wins the big win state in the winning lottery, the big win state in which the variable prize winning device 32 is opened is provided.

In this embodiment, the left starting winning switch 224a of the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a constitutes the first condition satisfaction detection means, and the right of the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a The starting winning switch 224b and the second starting winning switch 224c of the second starting winning device 33b constitute second condition fulfillment detection means.

A variable winning device 32 is provided downstream of the second start-up winning device 33b. The variable prize winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is in an open state in which game balls can win prizes in the case of a big win. The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a large winning shutter for opening and closing the large winning opening, a large winning opening solenoid for operating the large winning opening, and a large winning opening. Equipped with a count switch 223 for detecting a game ball that has entered the game ball, the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) can be closed or opened by driving and controlling the solenoid for the big winning opening and opening and closing the big winning shutter. is switching to

The variable winning device 32 according to the present embodiment has a large winning shutter whose lower edge is rotatably supported along the lower edge of the large winning opening. In this state, the big winning shutter extends vertically to close the big winning opening, and the game balls can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the variable winning device 32, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is slightly downwardly inclined toward the rear), and the game ball flows down in front of the big winning opening. is received by the back surface (upper surface) of the special prize shutter and guided to the special prize opening.

In addition, a plurality of general prize winning devices 31 are arranged along the periphery of the game area (the inner rail forming portion 51) at the lower portion of the area located on the left side of the variable display unit 35 (left side area). ing. In this embodiment, the through gate 34 is not arranged in the left region.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in a lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the lottery. Furthermore, the blade member 371 of the second start-up winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, making it easier to enter the game ball into the second start-up winning device 33b. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start prize winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the low probability state and low ball entry state will be referred to as "normal mode", and the high probability state and high ball entry state will be referred to as "variable probability mode".

In addition, as a high ball entry state, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, (2) a single opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second starting prize winning device 33b is greater than in the low ball entry state; (4) A state in which the number of times the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball-entering support lottery is greater than in the low-ball-entering state; It is also possible to raise the level of The high ball entry state in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5), or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". . As a result, the game balls are likely to frequently win prizes in the second starting prize winning device 33b, the number of times the winning lottery is executed increases, and the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode continues until the big win state occurs, whereas the probability variable mode is set in advance to show variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b even if the big win state does not occur. When the operation is performed a specified number of times (100 times in this example), the operation ends and the normal mode is entered.

In addition, in the probability variable mode, the blade member 371 of the second start-up winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently to make it easier to enter the ball, and the through gate 34 is also provided only in the right side region. When the player enters the probability variable mode, the game ball is shot toward the right side area where the second starting prize winning device 33b is provided (so-called "right hitting"). Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the variable prize winning device 32 is provided in the right side area, "right hitting" is performed even during the big win state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is hit to the left side area, the game ball can be made to reach the first start winning device 33a and enter, but the game ball is hit to the right side area. In this case, the game ball basically cannot enter the first start winning device 33a. Furthermore, in the normal mode, since the opening of the second start-up winning device 33b (wing member 371) can hardly be expected, in the normal mode, the game ball is shot toward the left side area (so-called "left hitting" ). In addition, at the timing of hitting to the right or hitting to the left, an announcement indicating the launch position (strength of launch) of the game ball is made on the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like.

In addition, as the types of jackpot states (jackpot types), there are 15-round variable variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RS"), 8-round variable variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RS"), and 4-round variable variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "4RS"). say). Regarding "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS", the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or 8 game balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. As one round, for "15RS", it is repeated 15 times, for "8RS", it is repeated 8 times, and for "4RS", it is repeated 4 times, and then the jackpot state ends.

Also, after the jackpot states of "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS" are finished, a "probability variable mode" (in this example, variable display 100 times) is provided. That is, in the present embodiment, if a big hit is made, the variable probability mode is always given after the big win state ends.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 332 of the first start-up winning device 33a, the percentage is 15%, and the percentage is 8RS, 40%. As a result, it becomes "4RS" at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second winning port 333 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, the rate is 50% "15RS", and the rate is 50% "8RS". Become. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second start-up winning device 33b, the rate is 50% "15RS" and the rate 50% is "8RS".

That is, compared to the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, the winning or losing based on the ball entering the second winning port 333 of the first starting winning device 33a If you win a jackpot in the lottery, or if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the second start prize winning device 33b, you can get more game balls. The possibility of being given a jackpot with a lot of money will increase.

In addition, adjacent to the upper right part of the substantially elliptical game area, variation for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a Based on the first special display device 43a where the display is performed, the game ball entering the second winning port 333 of the first starting winning device 33a, and the game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b There is a second special display device 43b that performs variable display for teaching the result of the lottery that is performed, and a game ball enters the starting winning devices 33a and 33b during the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b. In this case, it is performed based on the first holding display device 46a and the second holding display device 46b indicating that the variable display corresponding to the entering ball has been held and stored, and the game ball passing through the through gate 34. A normal symbol display device 41 in which variable display is performed for teaching the result of the entrance support lottery, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 during variable display on the normal symbol display device 41, the passage A normal holding display device 44 indicating that the variable display corresponding to is held and stored is provided to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first reservation display device 46a, the second reservation display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal reservation display device 44, the main control The display is directly controlled by the device 261 .

The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special lamps). Then, with the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 332 of the first starting winning device 33a as a trigger, the switching display (variation display) of the first special figure lamp is performed on the first special display device 43a. It's becoming

The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special lamps). Then, when the ball enters the second winning port 333 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, or the game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b, the second special lamp is displayed on the second special display device 43b. , switching display (variable display) is performed. In this embodiment, variable display means is configured by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, or the decorative pattern display device 42 described later. When the second special display device 43b is used as variable display means, the function of performing variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the main control device 261 corresponds to the display control means, When the pattern display device 42 is used as variable display means, the function of the sub-control device 262 that causes the display control device 45 to perform the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the command of the main control device 261 is the display control means. Equivalent to.

After the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display stops (combination of special lamps that are lit) and the various results of the winning lottery are associated, and depending on the lighting mode when the variable display stops, winning or losing The results of the lottery, that is, "big hit" or "loss" are definitely displayed. Furthermore, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the jackpot type, ie, "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS", depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped. It is also taught whether In addition, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that respectively teach various types of jackpots and failures, and one of them is selected and displayed in a stop state. be done.

Further, the stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next variable display can be started after the specified time has passed. Furthermore, after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, even if the specified time elapses, if the next variable display is not performed, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b The special display device 43b is configured to switch from a lighting mode indicating the result of the lottery to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which variable display is not performed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the lighting mode indicating the result of the lottery is maintained as it is.

Each of the first reservation display device 46a and the second reservation display device 46b is composed of two pieces (a first reservation lamp and a second reservation lamp). In the present embodiment, up to four variable displays (hereinafter referred to as "first variable display") based on the entry of game balls into the first winning port 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a can be retained and stored. ing. Furthermore, the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 333 of the first starting winning device 33a, and the changing display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning device 33b (hereinafter referred to as "second 2 variable display") can be retained and stored up to four times in total.

As described above, in the first starting prize winning device 33a of the present embodiment, the game balls entered in the first starting prize winning device 33a are alternately guided to the first winning port 332 or the second winning port 333. A device 336 is provided. Therefore, if the game ball can be made to win the first start winning device 33a at a faster pace than the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is completed, the first variable display and the second variable display can be performed relatively efficiently. The variable display can be held and stored four times each, for a total of eight times.

Further, for example, when the first variable display is suspended for one time, the first suspended lamp on the left side (the inner peripheral side of the game area) lights up, and when the first variable display is suspended for two times , When the left and right first holding lamps are lit and the first fluctuation display is held three times, the left first holding lamp blinks, and the right first holding lamp lights up, and the first fluctuation When the display is suspended for four times, the left and right first suspension lamps blink. In addition, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning devices 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended. In the present embodiment, the first suspension display device 46a and the second suspension display device 46b constitute first suspension display means (not performing a suspension prefetch effect, which will be described later).

Further, in this embodiment, the suspended variable display is completed in the order in which it was suspended regardless of whether it is the first variable display or the second variable display. In other words, for example, the second variable display that is suspended after the first variable display that has already been suspended is digested before the first variable display. Therefore, it is not structured such that one of them is preferentially digested.

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol lamps). Then, in the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol lamp on the right side (the outer peripheral side of the game area) blinks (is displayed in a variable manner). there is Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the entrance support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display stops (the combination of the normal map lamps that are lit) and the various results of the ball support lottery are associated, and depending on the lighting mode when the variable display stops , The result of the entry support lottery is displayed deterministically. For example, by lighting both the left and right general pattern lamps, it indicates "winning", and by lighting only the left general pattern lamp, it indicates "off".

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of the normal symbol display device 41 performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 can be retained and stored. For example, when the variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended for one time, the normal suspension lamp on the left side (inner circumference side of the game area) lights up, and when it is suspended for two times, the left and right normal When the suspension lamp lights up and is suspended for 3 times, the normal suspension lamp on the left blinks and the normal suspension lamp on the right lights up, and when it is suspended for 4 times, the normal suspension lamps on the left and right flashes. Incidentally, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the jackpot state, the variation display for that amount is also suspended.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 42 configured by a liquid crystal display device and capable of displaying decorative patterns. The decorative design display device 42 is configured to variably display the decorative design according to the variative display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. The display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, based on the command from the main controller 261, by the sub-controller 262 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b Auxiliary display contents are determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is provided with, for example, three upper, middle and lower pattern display regions (upper pattern display region, middle pattern display region, and lower pattern display region), and a plurality of types of decorations are displayed in each pattern display region. Designs (for example, numerical patterns with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then sequentially for each design display area (eg, upper design display area → lower design display area → middle design display In the order of the area) the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. For example, when the main controller 261 confirms the occurrence of the big win, the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b display corresponding to the big win, and the decorative pattern display device 42 shows the big win. (for example, in the upper pattern display area, the middle pattern display area, and the lower pattern display area, the same decorative patterns are stopped and displayed so as to line up on a predetermined effective line), and the jackpot state is started. Of the upper pattern display area, the middle pattern display area, and the lower pattern display area, basically, the upper pattern display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed first is referred to as the "first pattern display area." , and the lower symbol display area in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is also called a "second symbol display area", and the middle symbol display area in which the last decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. is also referred to as a "third symbol display area".

In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a big win, as a preliminary step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It will be done. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state. Of course, the occurrence of the reach state does not necessarily mean that the jackpot will be won, and there are cases where the win is lost.

In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol (ready-to-win symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same active line. When it is done (when double eyes are displayed stopped), a jackpot state is given. Also, in the case of an odd number of doublets, "15RS" is generated, and in the case of an even number of doublets, one of "15RS", "8RS" and "4RS" is generated.

In this embodiment, a plurality of performance stages (with different motifs such as backgrounds) are prepared in the decorative design display device 42 as a performance for teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying. More specifically, there are a "variable probability stage" indicating staying in the variable probability mode and a "normal stage" indicating staying in the normal mode. That is, when "15RS", "8RS", and "4RS" are won, the stage shifts to the "probability variable stage" after the jackpot state ends. Furthermore, when the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42) is performed 100 times in the "variable probability stage", the stage shifts to the "normal stage".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b performed based on the entry of game balls into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is reserved). that there is) is taught in the decorative pattern display device 42 as well. As will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 52, a pending icon 471 indicating that the variable display is stored pending is displayed in a pending display area 461, which is the lower area of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 42. be done. Furthermore, regarding the pending icon 471 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp which of the first variable display and the second variable display the pending icon 471 corresponds to. In this embodiment, the pending display area 461 of the decorative design display device 42 constitutes pending display means (second pending display means).

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail forming part 51 and an outer rail forming part 52 and guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 . As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . A game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming part 52 ends at the upper right part of the game board 30 and the inner rail forming part 51 ends at the lower right part of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, since the game ball hit by the shooting device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. be killed.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 . In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has the above-mentioned A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return-ball prevention member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. Ejected.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12. The upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, and nearly closes the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 are adjacent to each other, and the inlets and the dispensing path 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and the lower tray connection It will be dispensed to the lower tray 15 through the passage 71 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to. In this embodiment, based on the detection of game balls continuously for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch, an error notification is provided to teach that the lower tray 15 is full by using the display or sound on the decorative pattern display device 42. is controlled. In addition, when the retention of the game ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to protrude rearward. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 can be attached and detached in a stacked state. attached to the

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the rear surface of the frame cover 213. fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). An LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213 . The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have entered various winning slots. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches for detecting game balls that have entered the various prize winning openings corresponding to the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4 , a general prize winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 , and a count switch 223 is provided to the variable prize winning device 32 . Furthermore, the first starting winning device 33a includes a left starting winning switch 224a for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 332, and a right starting winning switch 224a for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second winning opening 333. A start prize winning switch 224b is provided, and the second start prize winning device 33b is provided with a second start prize winning switch 224c. Additionally, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34 .

Also, although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. there is This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the left starting winning switch 224a, the right starting winning switch 224b, and the second starting winning switch 224c are directly connected to the main controller 261 via connector cables without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various incoming ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. is paid out (except when detected by through gate switch 225).

In addition, on the rear surface of the game board 30, although not shown, a solenoid for opening the large winning opening is provided by the variable winning device 32. As shown in FIG. Further, the second start-up winning device 33b is provided with a blade-side motor that drives the blade member 371 to open and close as described above. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors and the main controller 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, variable probability mode, etc.), the front frame set 14 and the inner frame detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later A terminal for outputting information about the opening of 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, tank no ball error, payout error, prize paid out from payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information about the number of balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and is gently inclined toward the downstream side. Concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the prize-winning openings such as the general prize-winning opening 31 are collected via the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 . Incidentally, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are detachable in a state of being superimposed on each other. attached to the

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261 so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor rotates forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in , an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A main controller 261 (main substrate) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 includes a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, and first and second pending displays. Devices 46a, 46b, a normal hold display device 44, etc. are connected. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43a and 43b and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. FIG. On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning switches 224a, 223b, 224c, a through gate switch 225, and various switches such as the handle 18. Various detection switches such as various substrates, a solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32, and various electric parts such as a blade side motor for opening and closing the second start winning device 33b (wing member 371) are connected. . In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, various illumination parts, the lamps 102 and 104, and the like.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. In this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 constitute display control means. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main controller 261 display the fact that the jackpot has been won. In the decorative design display device 42 controlled by , variable display of the decorative design is performed as effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special design in the special display devices 43a and 43b. In addition, a gaming machine ID is stored in the ROM 552 of this embodiment.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibition button 18a ( 1) is not operated, the shooting device 60 is driven, and game balls are shot with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. FIG.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-controller 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the output port 529 is connected to the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative design display device 42. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative design display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as designs displayed on the decorative design display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success/failure random number counter C1 as a success/failure random number generation means used for a success/failure lottery to determine whether or not to generate a big win state, and a type used to determine the type of big win (type lottery). A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win state in the decorative pattern display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the success or failure random number counter C1, and a first And the second special display device 43a, 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) first variation type counter CS1, second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time, etc., and the second start winning device 33b are opened It is decided to use a normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the entry support lottery for whether or not to make it. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for lottery for the reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device . Specifically, according to the determined variation pattern, the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative design display device 42, that is, the performance pattern is determined.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores the values of the success/failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 as a special variation reservation area as a reservation storage means, and the normal pattern random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variable holding area comprises four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored chronologically according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

In addition, the special variable holding area has eight holding areas (holding first to holding eighth areas) and one execution area. In each reservation area of the special variable reservation area, the first start winning device 33a (first winning port 332 and second winning port 333), and the second starting winning device 33b In accordance with the winning history of the game ball, Values of the success/failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in time series. In this embodiment, each of the first variable display performed by the first special display device 43a and the second variable display performed by the second special display device 43b can be suspended up to four times. Each holding area of the special variable holding area and the execution area constitute storage areas of the holding storage means.

To explain each counter in detail, the hit/fail random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 695, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 695) as the closing price, 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price, is reached. It is configured to return to Normally, when the success/failure random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value = 0 to 695) similar to the success/failure random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer is stored in the special change holding area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7, 307", and the probability is high. In the state (probability variable mode), the number of values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the present embodiment, two win/fail determination tables are provided in the ROM 502 as winning value storage means to be referred to when determining whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a big win. , “7, 307” as jackpot values, and a second win-or-fail judgment table that stores “8 to 16, 308 to 316” as jackpot values.

The type determining counter C2 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19). Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. In this example, the first type determination table referred to when a big hit occurs in response to the game ball entering the first winning port 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, and the second type determination table of the first starting winning device 33a. A winning port 333 and a second type determination table that is referred to when a big hit occurs in response to the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning device 33b are provided. Then, when a jackpot is won in a lottery, the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (a type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is given. The Rukoto.

The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503. .

The variable selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238). In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs with respect to the decorative pattern, the final stop pattern shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win pattern by the variation selection counter C3 and stops, and the same ready-to-win state occurs. A lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and rear out" in which the rear final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol and "complete out" in which the reach state does not occur. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. Then, when the lottery is not won, it is determined whether or not to generate a ready-to-win state based on the value of the variation selection counter C3, and furthermore, the ready-to-win type is determined when the ready-to-win state is generated. becomes.

The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. .

Further, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 59), and then the lower limit. It is configured to return to 0, and the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 37, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 37), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough pattern variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. (In this example, the middle pattern), a more detailed pattern variation mode such as the elapsed time until the stop is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

In addition, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. Buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining a variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 .

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 232). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. Low input. The winning random number value in the ball state is only "1", while the number of random number values winning in the high ball state is 232, and the range is "1 to 232". That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 includes a support determination table for low-ball entry support lottery in a low-ball-entry state and a support determination table for entry support lottery in a high-ball-entry state. When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined time, and then the winning is decided. A corresponding lighting mode is displayed, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

In addition, when there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are provided based on the prize ball command (game balls are paid out). ). Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

Also, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success or failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (695, 19 in this embodiment, respectively). , 238, 232) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step S304, the first start prize winning device 33a and the start prize winning process associated with winning to the second start prize winning device 33b are executed, and in step S305, the through gate accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 Execute transit processing. After step S305, the timer interrupt processing is once terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the RAM 503 includes a first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning port 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, The second winning port 333 and the second holding counter Nb that counts the number of holdings of the second variable display based on the entry of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b, the total number of holding variable displays (first A pending total counter Nx is provided for counting the total number of holdings of the variable display and the number of holdings of the second variable display.

In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the special variation reservation area, the success/failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 A reach random number storage area is provided for storing values.

Furthermore, the execution area of the special variation reservation area and each reservation area are provided with a variation storage area for storing information indicating whether the display is the first variation display or the second variation display. . Hereinafter, ``storing information indicating that the variation storage area is the first variation display'' is also referred to as ``setting the first variation flag to ON'', and ``that the variation storage area is the second variation display''. "the information indicating is stored" is also referred to as "the second fluctuation flag is set to ON".

First, in step S501, the second start winning switch 224c and the right It is determined by the detection information of the starting prize detection switch 224b. If the determination in step S501 is affirmative, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second suspension counter Nb is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S511. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second suspension counter Nb and the total suspension counter Nx are incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the hit/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 (the hit/fail random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer Each stored value) is stored in the first area (win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) of the vacant reservation areas of the special variation reservation area.

After step S504, in step S505, a second fluctuation flag is turned on in the fluctuation storage area of the reservation area (hereinafter also referred to as "new reservation area") in which each counter value is stored in step S504. In the following step S506, the success/failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area (stored in the new reservation area) is a value corresponding to the big hit is performed. In addition, the details of the success/failure determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S507, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area. A second type determination process for determination is performed. Details of the second type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S508, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the new reservation area, Perform reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the success/failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 stored in the new reservation area matches one of the values "7" and "307" stored in the first success/failure determination table. do. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are big hits both in the low-probability state and in the high-probability state.

Although FIG. 14 simplifies the processing of step S5101 for the sake of convenience, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is "307". If a negative determination is also made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

If the determination in step S5101 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the first propriety flag in step S5102. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, then in step S5103 the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 stored in the new reservation area is "8 to 16, 308 to 316", which is the value stored in the second success/failure determination table. It is determined whether it is one of Incidentally, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" is a value that becomes a big hit only in the variable probability mode (high probability state). Incidentally, even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the big win match as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is "out" even in the high probability state, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5103 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the second propriety flag in step S5104. In this embodiment, a first win/fail flag and a second win/fail flag are not separately provided in addition to the win/fail random number storage area for storing the value of the win/fail random number counter C1. It is configured to store (overwrite) information as to whether or not it will occur. In other words, for convenience of explanation, the fact that the information that the big win state occurs is stored in the hit/fail random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first hit/fail flag and the second hit/fail flag.

In addition to the success/failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, a success/failure flag may be provided separately so that the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored at this time, and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored as it is. In the variable display setting process that is performed at the start, it may be configured such that success or failure is determined by referring to a corresponding table based on the value of the success/failure random number counter C1.

Next, the second type determination processing in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5301, the new reservation area is referenced, and it is determined whether or not the first or second success/failure flag has been set to ON in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (there is a possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), in step S5302, the second type determination table is referred to, and the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area matches the value "0-9" corresponding to "15RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5204, and then this processing ends.

Next, the reach determination processing in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first validity flag of the new reservation area has been set in the validity determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step S5401 is affirmative, that is, if the jackpot is achieved in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot state always occurs), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if the jackpot state does not occur at least in the low probability state (there is a possibility of being out), in step S5402, the reach determination table is referred to, and the new pending It is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "outside reach". If the determination in step S5402 is affirmative, in step S5403, the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of the front-rear out-of-reach reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, there is no separate front/rear flag. is stored (overwritten). In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, setting the reach random number storage area will be referred to as turning on the before/after flag.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the reach determination table is referred to in step S5404, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation reservation area corresponds to "reach other than front and rear deviation". It determines whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 11". If the determination in step S5404 is affirmative, the flag other than before and after is turned on in step S5405, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the variable display ends without going through the reach state, that is, "completely out", this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 subsequent to step S508, the preceding command is set. The preceding command of the present embodiment includes the result of the success/failure determination process (that the first success/failure flag was set to ON, that the second success/failure flag was set to ON, or that both were not set to ON), Type determination processing result (which is 15RS, 8RS, 4RS), reach determination processing result (presence or absence of reach occurrence of variable display, or reach type), first variable display or second variable display Various game information such as which is included. Then, the set leading command is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

In the following step S510, addition display processing of the second suspension display device 46b (second suspension lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the number of suspensions of the second variable display is performed. In other words, when both the left and right second holding lamps are in the off state, the left second holding lamp is turned on, the left second holding lamp is on and the right second holding lamp is off. When it is, both the left and right second reservation lamps are lit, and when both the left and right second reservation lamps are in the lighting state, the left second reservation lamp is lit while the right side second reservation lamp is lit. is blinked, and when the second reservation lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the second reservation lamp on the right side is in a lighting state, a process for blinking both the left and right second reservation lamps is performed.

After the processing of step S510, or when negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S511, whether or not the game ball has entered the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a is determined by the detection information of the left start winning switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S511, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S512, a first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S512, this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513, and the first suspension counter Na and the total suspension counter Nx are incremented by one.

In the following step S514, each value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the vacant reservation areas (the success/failure random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) of the special variation storage area ). After step S514, in step S515, the first fluctuation flag is turned on in the fluctuation storage area of the reservation area (new reservation area) in which each counter value is stored in step S514.

In the subsequent step S516, a win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 stored in the new reservation area is a value corresponding to a big win. The details of the suitability determination process have already been described above. In other words, in the present embodiment, the winning determination processing based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the winning determination processing based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b are common, and thus the same game If it is the mode, the big hit winning probability in the success or failure lottery is the same.

In the subsequent step S517, when it is determined in step S516 that the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area. A first type determination process is performed. Details of the first type determination process have already been described above.

Here, the first type determination processing in step S517 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, the new reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the first or second success/failure flag has been set to ON in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5201 is affirmative (there is a possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), in step S5202, the first type determination table is referred to, and the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area matches the value "0, 1" corresponding to "15RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5203, and the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the new reservation area is set to "2" corresponding to "8RS". to 9". If the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 4RS flag is turned on in step S5206, and then this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S518 following step S517, when it is determined that the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the big hit in step S516, the variation selection counter C3 stored in the new reservation area Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed based on the value of . Note that in this embodiment, the same processing as in step S508 described above is performed.

After step S518, in step S519, processing for setting the preceding command is performed. In the following step S520, addition display processing of the first suspension display device 46a (first suspension lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the number of suspensions of the first variable display is performed. That is, when both the left and right first reservation lamps are in the off state, the left first reservation lamp is turned on, the left first reservation lamp is in the on state, and the right first reservation lamp is in the off state. If it is, both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, and if both the left and right first reservation lamps are in the lighting state, the left first reservation lamp is lit while the right first reservation lamp is lit. is blinked, and when the first reservation lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the first reservation lamp on the right side is in a lighting state, processing for blinking both the first reservation lamps on the left and right is performed.

After step S520, the process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start-up winning device 33a or the second start-up winning device 33b, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is directly stored in the special change holding area, and then the success/failure determination process is performed. , type determination processing, and reach determination processing are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area (work area) is provided to temporarily store the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 when these counter values are acquired. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the reservation area of the corresponding special change reservation area is stored.

The process of extracting the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S514 constitutes the discrimination value extraction process, and similarly the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 extracted in steps S504 and S514 is stored in the special change holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S516 (steps S5101 and S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first success/failure determination process. The processing of steps S5102 and S5104 for storing (setting the corresponding flag) constitutes result storage processing. Furthermore, the function of extracting the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S514 constitutes information acquisition means,
Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal reservation counter is reached. Increment Nc by one.

In addition, in the following step S604, a random number related to success or failure is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM503.

In the following step S605, addition display processing of the normal reservation display device 44 (ordinary reservation lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the number of reserves of variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. In other words, if both the left and right normal holding lamps are off, the left normal holding lamp is turned on, and if the left normal holding lamp is on and the right normal holding lamp is off. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is blinked while the right normal hold lamp is lit, and the left normal hold lamp is lit. When the lamp is in a flashing state and the right normal holding lamp is in a lighting state, a process for flashing both the left and right normal holding lamps is performed. After step S605, the through gate passage processing is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112.

In the processing of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in the subsequent step S114. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off. In step S110, the used register is recovered from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43a, 43b, etc. updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Execute external output processing such as

For example, when the special display devices 43a and 43b perform variable display, a variable pattern command and a pattern command are transmitted to the sub-controller 262. That is, these commands are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform the variable display of the decorative pattern, which is an effect matching the variable display performed by the special display devices 43a and 43b. is a command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input the variation pattern command, determines the variation mode (variation time, performance mode, etc.) of the decorative design display device 42 based on the command, and determines the variation mode on the decorative design display device. At 42, an instruction is issued to the display control device 45 to perform display (variation display).

The variation pattern command includes information specifying the variation type of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of decorative symbols in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variable display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, sound, and the like.

Here, the variation type of decorative symbols will be described. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the variation of decorative patterns. In addition, in the variable probability mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is "15 seconds" in the normal mode, and "10 seconds" in the probability variable mode and the time reduction mode.

"Super ready-to-win" means that a character or the like is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in addition to the decorative patterns during the variable display of the decorative patterns (after establishment of the ready-to-win state), thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation. It's a pattern. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach.

"Premium reach" is a production mode that can be derived only when the jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative pattern, a character with a pattern different from the super reach is displayed, and this is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. In the present embodiment, two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared, and the variable display time differs for each type of premium reach.

In addition, the variable display time for “completely out” that does not result in any reach state is set to “10 seconds” in normal mode and “6 seconds” in probability variable mode and time reduction mode.

Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop pattern (combination of stop patterns) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine the stop symbol, and includes a combination of "15RS" jackpot symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols, a combination of front and rear missing symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear missing, and a complete loss. It designates five categories of symbol combinations. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

That is, when the symbol command corresponding to the combination of the "15RS" jackpot symbols is received, one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 is used as the stop symbol. When a pattern command corresponding to a combination of jackpot patterns is received, one of the pattern combinations (normal jackpot patterns) consisting of 2, 4, 6 or 8 doubles is stopped. Determined as

The combination of front-rear out-of-order symbols corresponds to "front-rear out-of-rear reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted forward and backward from the ready-to-win symbol by one and stops after the occurrence of ready-to-win. The combination of symbols other than front-rear deviation corresponds to "reach other than front-rear deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the ready-to-win pattern after the occurrence of the ready-to-win. A combination of completely missing symbols corresponds to "completely missing" in which even reach does not occur. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops displaying a combination of front and rear missing symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear missing symbols, and a combination of completely missing symbols, the result is "missing".

Although details will be described later, when the sub-controller 262 receives these deviating symbol commands, it determines a combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as a stop symbol. In the present embodiment, the main controller 261 determines the stop pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 (probability variable jackpot pattern, normal jackpot pattern, front-back failure pattern, front-back failure pattern, complete failure pattern), and outputs a symbol command. However, not limited to this, for example, the sub-control device 262, based on the information on the jackpot type and reach type output from the main control device 261, stops the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 ( A combination of decorative patterns) may be determined.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 .

In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Thereafter, in step S205, special display control processing is executed. In this process, control of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is performed, as well as determination of a big hit, setting of variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42, and the like. The details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the variable winning device 32 is performed. Further, details of the variable winning device control processing will be described later.

In step S207, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S208, a starting winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the second starting prize winning device 33b (wing member 371) is performed. The details of this startup winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. ) has passed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (steps S211 and S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

Further, in step S212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly fluctuates. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Further, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), it means that the power has been shut down, so the processing from step S213 onward is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step S213, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area, and in step S215, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 503a. memorize to

After that, in step S216, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step S217, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step S218, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the process of step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes at steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at different times. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the special display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval period set after the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is "0". If the determination in step S801 is negative, that is, if it is the variable interval period, in step S802, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented, and then this processing ends. That is, for example, if the variable interval period is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to "249 ("250" in the case of a configuration in which step S802 is performed before step S801)" In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative, i.e., if it is not the variable interval period, then in step S803, a win situation storage area, which will be described later in detail, is referred to determine whether the current state is other than the jackpot state. determine.

In the "during the jackpot state", the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43a and 43b until the variable prize winning device 32 is opened, and when the variable prize winning device 32 is It includes a round period in an open state, an interval period in which the variable prize winning device 32 is in a closed state, and an ending period until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started after the final round. .

The win state storage area of the present embodiment stores "0" in a state other than the jackpot state, and in the jackpot state, "1" during the opening period and the interval period, "2" during the round period, and "2" during the round period. It is configured so that "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S803, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the win situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the game is in the big win state.

When the negative determination is made in step S803, that is, when the jackpot state is reached, the process is terminated as it is. It is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43a, 43b is displaying a variable display by looking at the setting state of the flag. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered to be during variable display, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered to be during the stop display corresponding to the state where the variable display is stopped. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, and the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if the jackpot state is not in progress and the fluctuation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S805, and both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are displayed. In the display mode corresponding to the variable standby state in which the variable display is not performed (for example, the first special figure lamp on the right of the lower row, or the mode in which only the second special figure lamp lights up) is derived. Make standby display settings for In other words, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment maintain the stop mode (in a mode indicating the result of the lottery) during the variation interval period after the fluctuation is stopped. However, when the variable interval period ends, the display mode is switched to indicate the variable standby state.

After step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, where the value of the total pending number counter Nx for counting the total pending number of variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a and the second starting prize winning device 33b is from 0. determine whether is greater than If a negative determination is made in step S806, that is, if not even one variable display is suspended, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S806 is affirmative, that is, if even one variable display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the total retention counter Nx in step S807.

In subsequent step S808, a process of shifting the data (variation information) stored in the special variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the 1st reservation area to the 8th reservation area of the special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After step S808, in step S809, it is determined whether or not the first variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S809 is affirmative, that is, if the variation information corresponds to the first variation display based on the ball entering the first winning port 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, in step S810, the first Subtract 1 from the pending counter Na.

In the subsequent step S811, subtraction display processing of the first suspension display device 46a (first suspension lamp) corresponding to the number of suspensions of the first variable display being decreased by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right first reservation lamps are in a blinking state, the right first reservation lamp is turned on while the left first reservation lamp is kept blinking, and the left first reservation lamp is in a blinking state. When the right first reservation lamp is lit, both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, and when both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, the left first reservation lamp is lit. The first reservation lamp on the right side is turned off while the is lit, and when the first reservation lamp on the left side is on and the first reservation lamp on the right side is off, both the first reservation lamps on the left and right are turned off. process to make it work.

After step S811, in step S812, variable display setting processing, which will be described later in detail, is performed, and then this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S809, that is, it corresponds to the second variation display based on the ball entering the second winning port 333 of the first starting prize winning device 33a or the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. In the case of the fluctuation information, in step S813, 1 is subtracted from the second suspension counter Nb. In the subsequent step S814, subtraction display processing of the second suspension display device 46b (second suspension lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of suspensions of the second variable display has decreased by one is performed. In other words, when both the left and right second reserve lamps are in a blinking state, the right second reserve lamp is turned on while the left second reserve lamp is kept blinking, and the left second reserve lamp is in a blinking state. When the second reservation lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right second reservation lamps are turned on, and when both the left and right second reservation lamps are on, the second reservation lamp on the left side is turned on. The second reservation lamp on the right side is turned off while the second reservation lamp on the right side is lit, and when the second reservation lamp on the left side is on and the second reservation lamp on the right side is off, both the left and right second reservation lamps are turned off. process to make it work.

After step S814, in step S812, variable display setting processing, which will be described later in detail, is performed, and then this processing ends.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described later in detail, is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (variable probability mode). The mode storage area stores discrimination information for discriminating the game mode. In this embodiment, the mode storage area stores a value of "11" or "21", where "11" corresponds to the normal mode and "21" corresponds to the variable probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the mode storage area stores "21", thereby determining whether or not the state is in the high-probability state.

If the determination in step S901 is affirmative, that is, in the case of the high probability state (probability variation mode), in step S902, the hit/fail random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referred to, and the first or second It is determined whether or not either of the success flags (see the success/failure determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. When the determination in step S902 is affirmative, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is a low-probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), then in step S903, the success/failure random number storage area is referenced to determine whether the first success/failure flag is on. determine whether or not When the determination in step S903 is affirmative, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, a big win confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the big win state has been confirmed is set to ON. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to confirmation of occurrence of a big win state in the win/fail random number storage area is referred to as turning on a big win confirmation flag.

In the following step S905, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag (see type determination processing in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special change reservation area.

If the determination in step S905 is affirmative, that is, if it is "15RS", 15RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting variation pattern commands and symbol commands) is performed in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the generation of "15RS". Determine the variation pattern (variation display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42, and set the variation pattern command and pattern command based on the determination and various flags. I do. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation display time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S916, which will be described later.

Also, if the determination in step S905 is negative, in step S907, the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referenced to determine whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S907 is affirmative, that is, if it is "8RS", 8RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting variation pattern commands and symbol commands) is performed in step S908. After step S908, the process proceeds to step S916.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S907, 4RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting variation pattern commands and symbol commands) is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S916.

If a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S910 to determine whether or not the second winning/failing flag is set to ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step S910, after the front and rear reach pattern setting processing is performed in step S912 which will be described later, the process proceeds to step S916.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in a high probability state, or if a negative determination is made in step S910, in step S911, the reach random number of the execution area of the special change reservation area By referring to the storage area, it is determined whether or not the front/rear flag (see reach determination processing in FIG. 17) is on. If the determination in step S911 is affirmative, that is, if it is the "front-back reach", the front-back reach pattern setting process is performed in step S912, and then the process proceeds to step S916.

Also, if the determination in step S911 is negative, in step S913, the reach random number storage area in the execution area of the special change reservation area is referenced to determine whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If the determination in step S913 is affirmative, that is, if it is "reach other than anteroposterior outlier", reach pattern setting processing other than anteroposterior is performed in step S914, and then the process proceeds to step S916.

If the determination in step S913 is negative, that is, if the result is "completely out of line", in step S915 the out variation pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S916.

In step S916, a special figure displaying flag indicating whether or not the special display devices 43a and 43b are performing variable display is turned on. This indicates that the conditions for switching display (variable display) have been established in the special display devices 43a and 43b. In the following step S917, a setting process of a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. The special figure display timer is referred to when determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display.

The variable display times of the special display devices 43a and 43b in this embodiment are set to values corresponding to the variable patterns selected by the variable type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the setting of such a special figure display timer, in the external output processing of the next normal processing, when a control signal to the effect of starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b , the special display devices 43a and 43b start switching display (variation display). In addition, the sub-control device 262, which has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command, (basically) starts the variation of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and at the same time, displays the variation on the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the variation pattern command. Simultaneously with the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped and displayed by combining the patterns based on the pattern command. After step S917 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the starting winning process, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is acquired in steps S504 and S514 and stored in the special variable holding area, the win/fail determination process in steps S506 and S513, and the variable display setting. In the process, a win/fail lottery is constituted by the processes of steps S901 to S903 for judging win/fail based on the win/fail flag and the situation at that time. Further, the processing of steps S901 to S903 constitutes the second right/wrong determination processing, and the processing of steps S906, S908, S909, S912, S914, and S915 constitutes the variable display setting processing.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when the affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, when the variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S815 to perform subtraction processing of the special figure display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S816, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes "0", step S816 is affirmatively determined.

When a negative determination is made in step S816, in step S822, switching display setting is performed to continue the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S822, the process ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S816, the special figure displaying flag is turned off in step S817, and the stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S818. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output process in the normal process. That is, it is stopped and displayed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, loss, or the like.

Further, after step S818, in step S819, a stop command is set for the sub-control device 262 to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to stop displaying. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative design display device 42 are reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-controller 262 according to the pattern command and the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information about the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 is need not be added. In addition, although it will be repeated, the main display is the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the display of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for production).

Subsequently, in step S820, along with performing determination information setting processing for performing the initial setting of the winning state and the switching setting of the game mode, in step S821 the variable interval timer corresponds to the variable interval period (for example, 1 second). After setting the value to be used, this processing ends.

Here, the determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 21 . First, in step S1001, the success/failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1001 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the 15RS flag is turned on in the execution area. When the determination in step S1002 is affirmative, in step S1003, "15" is set to a round number counter for determining the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) to be executed during the jackpot state.

In the subsequent step S1004, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. Further, in step S1005, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds, for example, is set for the special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1006, the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of winning balls per round, which is eight. . The value of the winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 as to whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing. 1 is subtracted when it is determined that a ball has been entered.

Then, in step S1007, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 of the start of the winning state. After step S1007, the process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the 8RS flag is turned on in the execution area. If the determination in step S1008 is affirmative, in step S1009, the round number counter is set to "8", and then the process proceeds to step S1004. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1008 is negative, the round number counter is set to "4" in step S1009, and then the process proceeds to step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the variable probability mode is selected. If a negative determination is made in step S1011, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1011 is affirmative, in step S1012, the value of the variation counter is subtracted by 1 in order to measure the continuation period (deadline) of the probability variation mode. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state, the number of times of variation display (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the time limit of the probability variation mode is set for the variation number counter. Then, each time the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) perform one variable display, the value of the variable counter is decremented by 1 in step S1012.

In the subsequent step S1013, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter is "0". On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1013, that is, after the end of the hit state, if the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b for the specified number of times set as the time limit of the probability variable mode has not yet been performed, This process is terminated as it is.

If the determination in step S1013 is affirmative, in step S1014, "11" is set in the mode storage area to indicate the normal mode. That is, when the special display devices 43a and 43b perform variable display for a specified number of times, the probability variable mode is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. After the step S1014, in step S1015, after setting a support end command for notifying the end of the variable probability mode to the sub-control device 262, this process is ended. In addition, the sub-control device 262 that has received the support end command executes processing such as shifting the performance stage of the decorative design display device 42 to the normal stage.

Next, the variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the win situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the big win state. If the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, that is, if the game is not in the jackpot state, the process ends. Incidentally, at the start of the big win state, "1" is set in the win situation storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is in the jackpot state (if one of "1" to "3" is set in the hit situation storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , subtract 1 from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000" is set to the special variable timer in the determination information setting process.

In subsequent step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If the determination in step S1203 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the win situation storage area.

If the determination in step S1204 is affirmative, in step S1205, "2" is set in the win situation storage area. In the following step S1206, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set to the special variable timer.

After step S1206, in step S1207, the process of opening the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1208, a round command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of starting the round. After that, this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not "3" is set in the win situation storage area. Although details will be described later, "3" is set in the winning state storage area when all the rounds in the jackpot state are completed and the ending period is started. If the determination in step S1209 is negative, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1210.

In the subsequent step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process moves to step S1212, and "1" is set in the win situation storage area. After that, in step S1213, a value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set to the special variable timer.

After step S1213, in step S1214, the winning counter is set to "8". Further, in step S1215, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and in step S1216, an interval command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 of the start of the interval. After that, this process is terminated.

Further, if the determination in step S1203 is negative, that is, if the time (opening time or closing time) to maintain the open state or closed state of the variable winning device 32 remains, the process proceeds to step S1217, and the variable It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entering the winning device 32 is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of winnings per round at the start of the jackpot state and the start of the interval. Then, each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the value is subtracted by one.

If a negative determination is made in step S1217, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1217 is affirmative, that is, if the round end opportunity has arrived without waiting for the set period of the round to elapse, the process proceeds to step S1210. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable prize winning device 32 during one round, the round is promptly terminated at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not passed. Become.

If the determination in step S1211 is affirmative, that is, if all rounds in the jackpot state have been completed, the process proceeds to step S1218, and "3" is set in the win situation storage area. After step S1218, in step S1219, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1219, in step S1220, the winning counter is set to "7". In addition, when the processing for setting the ending after step S1218 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1217, the value of the winning counter is "0". Then, if the value of the prize winning counter is set to "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, in the variable prize winning device control processing after 4 msec, affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1217, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, by setting a provisional value other than "0" ("7" in this example) to the winning counter in step S1220, the ending period is completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1220, in step S1221, the process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in the following step S1222, an ending command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of starting the ending. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1209 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and it is time to end the jackpot state, the process proceeds to step S1223 to perform end setting processing. In the end setting process, setting of the mode storage area and setting of the change number counter are performed.

Here, the termination setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, a value "21" corresponding to the variable probability mode is set in the mode storage area. As a result, the variable probability mode is given after the end of the jackpot state.

In the following step S1402, "100" is set for the variation counter. After step S1402, in step S1403, a variable probability start command for informing the start of the variable probability mode to the sub-controller 262 is set. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1223, in step S1224, "0" is set in the winning state storage area to indicate that the state is not a big win. After that, in step S1225, after setting a win end command to inform the sub-control device 262 of the information to the effect that the big win state will end, this process ends. The hit end command includes information such as the number of times of the variation counter set in the end setting process.

Next, the normal display control process of step S207 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal pattern interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the normal pattern interval period set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 is "0". When the negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when it is the normal pattern interval period, in step S2102, the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted, and then this processing is terminated. That is, for example, the general pattern interval period is set to 1 second (1000 msec), and the general pattern interval timer is set to "249 ("250" when step S2102 is performed before step S2101)". In this case, the value of the general pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when it is not the normal pattern interval period, in step S2103, the normal pattern display flag indicating whether or not the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying the fluctuation is displayed. Determine whether it is on. In addition, when the normal pattern display flag is ON, it is considered that the normal pattern display device 41 is in the process of variable display.

If the determination in step S2103 is negative, the process advances to step S2104 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, when no variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended, this processing is terminated as it is. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, the normal symbol display device 41 performs standby display setting for deriving a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which variable display is not performed. may be In other words, the normal design display device 41, after the fluctuation stop, its stop mode is maintained during the normal pattern interval period (in the form showing the result of the entrance ball support lottery), but the normal pattern interval period ends. Then, the display mode may be switched to indicate the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2104 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105. In the subsequent step S2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After that, in step S2107, normal pattern fluctuation setting processing for setting and starting the fluctuation display of the normal pattern display device 41 is executed. Here, normal figure fluctuation setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 25 . First, in step S2301, a normal pattern display flag indicating that the normal pattern display device 41 is in the process of variable display is set to ON. In the subsequent step S2302, the win situation storage area is referenced to determine whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the current state is other than the jackpot state. If the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, that is, if the state is not a jackpot state, in step S2303, it is determined whether or not a value of "21" is stored in the mode storage area. mode).

When the affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, with respect to the normal pattern display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal pattern display device 41, the fluctuation of the normal pattern display device 41 Set "100" to make the display time 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area is "0". In addition, in the high ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 232", the win is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball-entering support lottery for whether or not to open the second starting prize-winning device 33b is won, in step S2306, it is determined that the ball-entering support lottery has been won. Turn on the ball entry support flag that indicates. After step S2306, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process ends.

Also, if the negative determination is made in step S2302, or if the negative determination is made in step S2303, that is, in the case of a jackpot state or a low ball entry state, in step S2307, for the general pattern display timer, "2000" is set to set the variable display time of normal symbols to 8 seconds. Furthermore, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area is "1". In addition, in the low ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1", the win is won.

If the determination in step S2308 is affirmative, that is, if the ball-entering support lottery is won, a ball-entering support flag indicating that the ball-entering support lottery has been won is set to ON in step S2309. After step S2309, or if a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, subtraction display processing of the normal reservation display device 44 (normal reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of suspensions of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is reduced by one. I do. In other words, when both the left and right normal holding lamps are in a blinking state, the right normal holding lamp is lit while the left normal holding lamp is blinking, and the left normal holding lamp is in a blinking state and the right normal holding lamp is in a blinking state. When the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, and when both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the right normal hold lamp is lit while the left normal hold lamp is lit. The reservation lamps are extinguished, and when the left normal reservation lamp is lit and the right normal reservation lamp is extinguished, processing for extinguishing both the left and right normal reservation lamps is performed. After step S2108, this processing ends.

In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2109 to perform the process of subtracting the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal diagram display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, in step S2110, it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal diagram display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. When it is determined affirmatively in step S2110, the normal pattern display flag is turned off in step S2111, and the normal pattern stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal pattern display device 41 is performed in step S2112. That is, when winning (when the entry support flag is set to ON), both the left and right normal pattern lamps are lit, and when it is out, only the left normal pattern lamp is lit.

Then, it progresses to step S2113 and performs normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. Here, normal figure discrimination information setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 26 . First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state is set to ON.

In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the player is in a high ball entry state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to 4 for the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting prize winning device 33b. Set to "1000" for seconds.

Further, in step S2405, an opening number counter for counting the number of times (remaining number of times) to open the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to "3" so as to open the second starting prize winning device 33b three times. After step S2405, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the support period flag is turned on in step S2409. Furthermore, in step S2410, after setting the second starting prize winning device 33b to the open state, this process ends.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, when the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". In the following step S2407, "1" is set to the opening counter to open the second starting prize winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the support period flag is turned on, and in step S2410, after setting the second start winning device 33b to the open state, End this process.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, after setting a value corresponding to the general pattern interval period (for example, 1 second) to the general pattern interval timer, this process is terminated.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2115, the switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 (switching display for alternately lighting the left and right pair of normal pattern lamps). I do. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that the switching display is normally performed to the symbol display device 41 is output. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 msec. After step S2115, the process ends.

Next, the starting winning device control process of step S208 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, the value of the normal variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S2202.

In subsequent step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is the period in which the open/closed state of the second starting prize winning device 33b is maintained, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2203 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If the determination in step S2204 is affirmative, that is, if the second starting prize winning device 33b is currently in the open state and the timing for closing the state has arrived, the process proceeds to step S2205, and the normal variable flag is turned off. . In the subsequent step S2206, the value of the open number counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S2207, the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to be closed.

After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter is "0". If the determination in step S2208 is affirmative, the support period flag is turned off in step S2209, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning ball entry support lottery was performed in the probability variable mode, and based on that, the second start winning device 33b is opened three times, and the remaining number of times. If there is, in step S2210, a value (for example, "100") corresponding to the interval time is set for the normal variable timer. After step S2210, the process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period during which the second start-up winning device 33b is opened three times (the second start-up winning device 33b is in a closed state), the timing for ending the interval period , the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2211, the normal variable timer is set to a value corresponding to the open time ("1000" in this example) in step S2212, and the second timer is set in step S2213. After setting the starting winning device 33b to the open state, this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first the reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. As shown in FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by an interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether a command has been received before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and an external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

At step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step S3116 the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, in step S3110, the power cutout occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the processing from step S3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the processing of step S3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the processing that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command is acquired from the main control device 261, and determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. FIG. In the command determination process (steps S3124, S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main controller 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 whether it is a prize ball command It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 30, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

After that, in step S3205, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch. Execute the setting of the full-dish release state. Further, in step S3206, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-ball-in-tank switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are set. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step S3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step S3209, and motor driving processing is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor is driven and the ball removal process is executed. In subsequent step S3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the information of the leading command output from the main controller 261 in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262. FIG. In addition, as described above, the starting command includes information indicating whether the variation information corresponds to the first variation display or the second variation display, information indicating whether it corresponds to the jackpot, information indicating the jackpot type, Information indicating the type of reach is included. In particular, in the present embodiment, not only the variable probability mode as the second game mode, but also the normal mode as the first game mode is a variation display that will be a big hit (corresponding to the first hit/fail flag on), or the variable probability mode It also includes information that makes it possible to determine whether it is a variable display (corresponding to the second win/fail flag ON) that will only result in a big win. In this embodiment, the pending information storage area constitutes pending storage means together with the special change pending area of the main controller 261 .

The pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262, like the special variable pending area of the main controller 261, comprises 8 pending areas (holding first to pending eighth areas) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command, information on whether or not it is a jackpot contained in the preceding command, jackpot type, reach type, first fluctuation display or second fluctuation display Corresponding to which Information (variation information) relating to variable display such as information on whether or not the user is present is stored in chronological order. As a result, it is possible for the sub-controller 262 to grasp not only the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the reservation area.

The pending information storage process will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not an advance command has been received (whether or not the advance command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, a variation pending counter Nd that counts the pending number of variable information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by one. Furthermore, in step S4103, the information on whether or not the jackpot included in the starting command, the jackpot type, the reach type, the information on which of the first variable display or the second variable display corresponds, etc. are stored in the pending information storage area is stored in the first reserved area (the smallest numbered reserved area among the reserved areas in which the change information is not stored) among the empty reserved areas.

In the following step S4104, it is determined whether or not the variable probability mode. If the determination in step S4104 is negative, that is, if the mode is the normal mode, the process proceeds to step S4105.

In step S4105, pending icon setting processing is performed. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(a), in a reserved display area 461 set at the bottom of the decorative pattern display device 42, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is reserved and stored. A pending icon 471 is displayed as a pending display (second pending display) indicating As shown in FIG. 52(b) and the like, the pending icon 471 includes a suspended icon 471 ( hereinafter, also referred to as a "forecast pending icon 472") and a default pending icon 471 that does not suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 53, the prefetch pending icon 472 is composed of a base object 473 modeled after a "treasure box" and a character object 474 that is basically displayed so as to fit inside the opened "treasure box". ing. A plurality of patterns are prepared for the aspect of the look-ahead pending icon 472 by varying the character object 474, and the aspect pattern of the look-ahead pending icon 472 and the expected degree of big win are associated with each other. More specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested in five stages by the mode of the look-ahead pending icon 472, rank 1; shark", Rank 3; "Turtle in an open treasure chest", Rank 4; "Crab in an open treasure chest", Rank 5 "Dugong in an open treasure chest". is set to be

On the other hand, the mode of the default pending icon 471 is a "closed treasure box" and the character object 474 is not displayed. By the way, the default pending icon 471 does not indicate that the degree of expectation for a big win is low, but rather indicates that the degree of expectation for a big win is not taken into consideration (no suggestion of the content of the variation information).

In this embodiment, displaying the prefetch pending icon 472 (displaying the character object 474 in combination with the base object 473) corresponds to the pending prefetch effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, one pattern is used for each aspect rank of the look-ahead pending icon 472, but it is also possible to set a plurality of patterns for each.

In addition, the holding icon 471 corresponding to the first variable display based on the ball entering the first prize winning opening 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a is a "white treasure box" and the second winning opening of the first starting prize winning device 33a. 333 and the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variable display based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b are "black treasure box". That is, by confirming the state of the pending icon 471 (the color of the treasure box), it is possible to specify which of the first variable display and the second variable display corresponds. In the present embodiment, the change information based on the ball entering the first winning hole 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a corresponds to the first win/fail related information, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information is the first hold display. There is, the variation information based on the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a and the second winning winning device 33b corresponds to the second winning/failing related information, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variation information is the second reserved indication.

Although the default pending icon 471 does not indicate that the degree of expectation for a big win is low, the player's impression is that the prediction with the character object 474 is more likely than the simple "closed treasure chest" pending icon 471. The reserve icon 472 is expected to generate a jackpot state. Further, the look-ahead pending icon 472 is also ranked, and when a low-ranked look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived, the player may conversely think that the probability of not having a big win state is increased. There is concern that it will be broken. Therefore, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, even after the prefetching pending icon 472 is displayed in the pending display area 461, the state of the prefetching pending icon 472 may change. . In addition, the default mode suspend icon 471 is configured to change to a prefetch suspend icon 472 in some cases. As a result, even after the default pending icon 471 and the low-rank prefetch pending icon 472 are displayed, it is expected that the pending icon 471 will be ranked up, and that the corresponding variable display will lead to a big hit. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the pending display area 461 of the present embodiment is an execution corresponding area 462 in which pending icons 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the execution area of the pending information storage area are displayed. (In this example, the left end of the pending display area 461) and the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the pending area of the pending information storage area (the first pending area to the eighth pending area) is displayed. It has a corresponding area 463 (in this example, from the left side, the first reservation corresponding area to the eighth reservation corresponding area). Therefore, in the pending display area 461 , a maximum of one pending icon 471 can be displayed in the execution corresponding area 462 , and a maximum of eight pending icons 471 can be displayed in the pending corresponding area 463 .

Here, the pending icon setting process in step S4105 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6101, the values of various counters related to the pending effect are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the pending area in which the change information is newly stored in step S4103 of the pending information storage area (hereinafter referred to as "new storage pending area"). ).

More specifically, in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262, a pending prefetch effect lottery counter (0 to 99 loop counter) is provided. Furthermore, as an effect using the look-ahead suspension icon 472, the correspondence between the variation information stored in the suspension information storage area and the look-ahead suspension icon 472 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is changed. The RAM 553 is provided with a pending setting counter (a loop counter of 0 to 199) for determining whether or not to perform the "holding prefetch target change effect".

In addition, as one type of "suspension prefetch target change effect", a predetermined prefetch suspension icon 472 is moved so that the change order (digestion order) becomes earlier with respect to the arrangement of the suspension icons 471 displayed in the suspension display area 461. There is a "movement effect before holding", and the RAM 553 is provided with a reservation release lottery counter (a loop counter of 0 to 49) for determining whether or not to execute the "moving effect before holding". Furthermore, as one type of the "holding prefetch target change effect", a predetermined prefetching pending icon 472 is moved so that the change order becomes later with respect to the row of the pending icons 471 displayed in the pending display area 461. ”, and the RAM 553 is provided with a change setting lottery counter (a loop counter of 0 to 19) for determining whether or not to execute the “moving effect after holding”. In addition, as one type of the “suspension prefetch target change effect”, there is a “suspension exchange effect” in which the prefetch reserve icons 472 displayed in the reserve display area 461 are exchanged with each other. An exchange setting lottery counter (a loop counter of 0 to 9) is provided for determining whether or not to execute.

Then, in step S4103, the value of the reservation prefetch effect lottery counter, the value of the reservation setting counter, the value of the reservation release lottery counter, the value of the change setting lottery counter, and the value of the exchange setting lottery counter are acquired and stored. be.

Each suspension area and execution area of the suspension information storage area is provided with a suspension effect counter indicating the status of the suspension icon 471 . The pending effect counter is configured to take values from "0 to 7".

When the value of the pending effect counter is "0", it indicates that the corresponding pending icon 471 does not perform the pending prefetch effect (display of "treasure box with character") and the default pending icon 471 is displayed.

When the value of the pending effect counter is “1”, it indicates that the corresponding pending icon 471 is the prefetch pending icon 472 . Hereinafter, the fact that the pending effect counter is set to "1" is also referred to as "the execution flag is set to ON".

If the value of the pending effect counter is "2", it indicates that there is a possibility that the "pre-holding movement effect" will be executed (the pre-holding movement effect is reserved). Then, when the "moving effect before holding" is executed, it corresponds to the execution area or the holding area in which the holding effect counter is set to "2" among the holding display areas 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42. The position will be specified as the destination of the prefetch pending icon 472 . Hereinafter, the fact that "2" is set in the pending effect counter is also referred to as "the pending flag is set to ON".

When the value of the holding effect counter is "3", it indicates that the "moving effect before holding" is executed. That is, after deriving the prefetching pending icon 472 in a predetermined mode as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area in which "3" is set in the pending effect counter, the prefetching pending icon 472 in the predetermined mode is suspended. This indicates that the display change processing is performed as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area or the execution area for which "2" is set in the effect counter. Hereinafter, the fact that "3" is set in the pending effect counter is also referred to as "the cancellation flag is set to ON".

When the value of the holding effect counter is "4", it indicates that the "moving effect after holding" may be executed. Then, when the "moving effect after holding" is executed, the prefetching pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the execution area or the holding area in which "4" is set in the holding effect counter is changed to the default is changed to the pending icon 471 of . Hereinafter, the fact that the pending effect counter is set to "4" is also referred to as "the pre-change flag is set to ON".

When the value of the holding effect counter is "5", it indicates that the "moving effect after holding" is executed. That is, after deriving the default mode of the pending icon as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area having the pending effect counter set to "5", the pending area having the pending effect counter set to "4". Alternatively, it indicates that the look-ahead pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the execution area is changed to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area whose pending effect counter is set to "5". Hereinafter, the fact that the pending effect counter is set to "5" is also referred to as "the change destination flag is set to ON".

When the value of the pending effect counter is "6", it indicates that the "holding exchange effect" may be executed. Hereinafter, the fact that the pending effect counter is set to "6" is also referred to as "the first exchange flag is set to ON".

When the value of the pending effect counter is "7", it indicates that the "holding exchange effect" is to be executed. That is, a prefetch pending icon 472 displayed as a pending icon 471 corresponding to a pending area with a pending effect counter value of "7", and a pending area with a pending effect counter value of "6" or It indicates to exchange (replace) with the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the execution area. Hereinafter, the fact that the pending effect counter is set to "7" is also referred to as "the second exchange flag is set to ON".

In addition, each pending area of the pending information storage area and the pending effect counter of the execution area constitute derived information storage means, and various information indicated by the value of the pending effect counter corresponds to the derived information. Also, the function of performing the pending icon setting process described below constitutes the pending effect setting process. Further, the "execution flag" described above corresponds to the "holding effect execution flag", the "reservation flag" corresponds to the "holding effect reservation flag", and the "release flag" corresponds to the "reservation release flag".

Now, after step S6101, in step S6102, it is determined whether or not there is an execution area or a reservation area in which the reservation flag is set to ON (with a reservation effect counter=2) in the reservation information storage area. In this embodiment, a reservation reception flag is provided separately from the execution area and the reservation flag (reservation effect counter) of each reservation area, and the reservation reception flag is set to ON when the reservation flag is set to ON. The Rukoto. In step S6102, it is determined whether or not the reservation flag is set to ON by confirming the reservation reception flag. It is also possible to omit the reservation reception flag and refer to the execution area and each reservation area to confirm whether or not the reservation flag is turned on.

When a negative determination is made in step S6102, in step S6103, a suspension prefetch effect lottery process for determining whether or not to perform a suspension prefetch effect using the prefetch suspension icon 472 is performed. As shown in FIG. 39, the pending prefetch effect lottery table referred to during the pending prefetch effect lottery process includes those referred during the variable probability mode and those referred in other game modes. As a pending look-ahead effect lottery table referred to during the probability variable mode, "for 4 times just before the end of the probability variable jackpot ST" when the big hit occurs when the variation display until the probability variable mode ends is within 4 times remaining. And, during the probability variation mode, if the variation display other than the last 4 times is a big hit, "for the other times during the probability variation medium jackpot", and if the variation display is the last 4 times in the probability variation mode and it is out Selected "for when ST ends 4 times just before the end", "for when reaching before and after reaching out during probability variation" in the case of reaching out before and after reaching during probability variation mode, and "for other purposes during probability variation" in other cases during probability variation mode ”.

In addition, as the pending look-ahead effect lottery table referred to in the normal mode and the time reduction mode, there is a "for when the jackpot is confirmed" when the jackpot is achieved in any game mode, and a "conditional "for big hit", "for front-rear off reach", "for reach other than front-rear off", and "completely off" are provided.

Then, according to the change information in the new memory reservation area, the reference reservation look-ahead effect lottery table is selected, and based on the value of the reservation look-ahead effect lottery counter, corresponding to the change information stored in the new memory reservation area. Determines whether or not to execute the pending look-ahead effect. Further, in the step S6103, when it is determined to execute the pending look-ahead effect, it is configured to set "1" to the pending effect counter of the new storage pending area (set the execution flag to ON). ing.

In particular, in this embodiment, whether it is a variation display that will be the last four jackpots in the probability variation mode, whether it is a variation display that will be another jackpot in the probability variation mode, the last four times in the probability variation mode Determination is made in the order of whether or not it is a variable display that will be out of, and whether it is a variable display that causes the probability variation mode to occur before and after the reach, and the pending prefetch effect lottery table according to the determination result is referred to The execution flag is more likely to be set to ON when the pending prefetch effect lottery table selected by affirmative determination in the upper determination among the above determinations is referred to. ing. In other words, the execution flag is likely to be set to ON during the last four variable displays of the probability variable mode (in this example, 80% at the time of the big hit, and 25% at the time of loss). Although details will be described later, even if "1" is set for the pending effect counter at this point, the prefetch pending icon 472 as the pending prefetch effect may not be derived in some cases.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the sub-control device 262 is not only provided with a variation number counter that counts the number of remaining variation displays that can be performed in the variable probability mode, but also varies as a variable display executed in the variable probability mode. A hold counter is provided to count the remaining number of times information can be held pending. In other words, in the present embodiment, since "suspension of variable display" is performed, before the value of the variable number counter becomes "0", the last variable display performed in the probability variable mode is retained and stored, and the normal mode The variable display performed in is stored pending. Therefore, when the variable display is retained and stored, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed in the probability variable mode by referring to the retention number counter.

Furthermore, although it will be described later in detail, in the execution area and each reservation area of the reservation information storage area, the variation display corresponding to the stored variation information is the variation display performed in the probability variation mode, and the probability variation mode is A last 4 flag is provided to indicate that there are four or less remaining variable displays until the end. And, by checking the last 4 flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the corresponding variable display is a variable display performed within four times immediately before the variable probability mode ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation information to be displayed in the variable probability mode as the second game mode corresponds to the second correspondence right or wrong related information, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variation information is the second correspondence The change information that is the hold display and that is to be changed and displayed in the normal mode as the first game mode corresponds to the first correspondence right/fail related information, and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information is the first correspondence hold display. is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the variable probability mode, the pending look-ahead effect is performed with a probability of 60% when the jackpot is achieved. On the other hand, if it comes off in the probability variable mode, there is an exception of 25% probability for the four variable displays immediately before the probability variable mode ends, but except for these four fluctuations There is a possibility that the pending read-ahead performance is performed only when the front-rear deviating reach occurs, and the probability of performing the pending pre-read performance is 5% even in the case of the front-rear deviating reach. In other words, during the probability mode, the possibility of deriving the pending look-ahead effect when it comes off is low, and just by deriving the pending look-ahead effect, the expectations for the occurrence of the jackpot state will increase dramatically. ing. However, exceptionally, about one of the four variable displays immediately before the probability variable mode ends is structured such that the pending look-ahead effect is derived.

In addition, during the normal mode and during the time reduction mode, it is most likely to derive the pending look-ahead effect when referring to "for when the jackpot is confirmed", "for conditional jackpot", "before and after reach" It becomes difficult to derive the pending look-ahead effect in the order of "for time", "for time other than front-back off reach", and "for time of complete loss". In addition, compared to the probability variable mode, it is relatively easy to derive the pending look-ahead effect even when it is out, and when it becomes a front-back off reach, the pending look-ahead effect is performed with a probability of 40%. There is a possibility that the pending look-ahead effect will be derived even when reaching or completely missing other than front and back.

After step S6103, in step S6104, it is determined whether or not the execution flag of the new storage reservation area is set to ON (whether or not the value of the reservation effect counter is "1"). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6104, the variation information in the new storage reservation area is referenced to determine whether or not it corresponds to the variation display of "Complete Loss" which does not result in a big win and does not generate a ready-to-win state. .

When a negative determination is made in step S6105, in step S6106, it is determined whether or not there is an execution area or a pending area (holding effect counter=6) in which the first exchange flag is set to ON. In addition, in the present embodiment, an exchange reception flag is provided separately from the first exchange flag (holding effect counter) of the execution area and each reservation area, and the first exchange reception flag is set to ON. is set to ON. In step S6106, it is determined whether or not the first exchange flag is set to ON by checking the exchange acceptance flag.

When a negative determination is made in step S6106, it is determined in step S6107 whether or not there is an execution area or a pending area (holding effect counter=4) in which the pre-change flag is set to ON. In addition, in this embodiment, a change reception flag is provided separately from the pre-change flag (holding effect counter) of the execution area and each reservation area, and the change reception flag is set when the pre-change flag is set on , is set to ON. In step S6107, it is determined whether or not the pre-change flag is set to ON by checking the change acceptance flag.

When a negative determination is made in step S6107, in step S6108, suspension setting processing for determining the type of suspension prefetch effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 40, the pending setting table referred to during the pending setting process is within four remaining fluctuation displays until the variable probability mode ends, and becomes a big hit (because it is in the variable probability mode, the second 1 hit/fail flag is turned on, and the second hit/fail flag is turned on. For when the other jackpots are confirmed", "For other conditional jackpots", and when the variation display is within 4 times remaining until the end of the variable mode, and when it is out, "Just before the end of ST "for 4 times of failure" and "for other failures" are provided. Then, according to the change information in the new memory reservation area, the reservation setting table to be referred to is selected, and based on the value of the reservation setting counter, the reservation look-ahead effect performed corresponding to the change information stored in the new memory reservation area. Determine the type of

More specifically, in this embodiment, when referring to the reservation setting table for "for jackpot four times immediately before the end of ST", the "reservation flag" is set to ON at a rate of 70% (reservation effect counter → "2 ”), the “first exchange flag” is set on at a rate of 20% (holding effect counter → “6”), and the “execution flag” is set on at a rate of 10% (holding effect counter → “1” ). It should be noted that since "1" has already been set in step S6103 to the pending effect counter in the new storage pending area, overwriting is performed when setting "2" or "6" to the pending effect counter. (if "1" is set, leave as is).

When referring to the reservation setting table for "for 4 times just before the end of ST", the "reservation flag" is set to ON at a rate of 20% (holding effect counter → "2"), and at a rate of 5% "second 1 exchange flag" is set to ON (holding effect counter→"6"), and the "execution flag" is set to ON at a rate of 75% (holding effect counter→"1").

When referring to the reservation setting table for "other jackpot confirmation", the "reservation flag" is set to ON at a rate of 50% (holding effect counter → "2"), and at a rate of 5% "first exchange flag" is set to ON (holding effect counter→"6"), and the "execution flag" is set to ON at a rate of 45% (holding effect counter→"1"). In the present embodiment, the probability that the reservation flag is set to ON in the variation display of the four big wins immediately before the end of the ST is higher.

When referring to the reservation setting table for "for other conditional jackpots", the "reservation flag" is set on at a rate of 35% (holding effect counter → "2"), and at a rate of 15% "first The exchange flag" is turned on (holding effect counter→"6"), and the "execution flag" is turned on at a rate of 50% (holding effect counter→"1").

When referring to the reservation setting table for "for other outages", the "reservation flag" is set to ON at a rate of 25% (holding effect counter → "2"), and at a rate of 25%, the "first exchange flag ” is set on (holding effect counter → “6”), the “execution flag” is set on at a rate of 15% (holding effect counter → “1”), and the “pre-change flag” is turned on at a rate of 35% It is set (holding effect counter→“4”). In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the "pre-change flag" is not set to ON for variation information that may be a big hit, but it may be set to ON. may be configured.

Also, if the determination in step S6106 is affirmative, that is, if there is an execution area or a reservation area in which the first exchange flag is set to ON (reservation effect counter=6), in step S6109, a new storage reservation area (whether to set "7" to the pending effect counter) to determine whether or not to turn on the second exchange flag.

As shown in FIG. 41, the exchange setting table referred to during the exchange setting process includes "for when the jackpot is confirmed" when the jackpot is achieved in any game mode, and "conditional jackpot" when the jackpot is achieved only in the variable probability mode. "Temporary use" and "Other use" are provided. Then, the exchange setting table to be referred to is selected according to the change information of the new storage reservation area, and whether or not to turn on the second exchange flag of the new storage reservation area is determined based on the value of the reservation exchange setting lottery counter. decide.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when referring to the exchange setting table for "for jackpot determination", the "second exchange flag" is set to ON at a rate of 80% (holding effect counter → "7"), The "execution flag" is set to ON at a rate of 20% (holding effect counter→"1").

When referring to the exchange setting table for "conditional jackpot", the "second exchange flag" is set to ON at a rate of 50% (holding effect counter → "7"), and the "execution flag" at a rate of 50% is set to ON (holding effect counter→“1”).

When referring to the exchange setting table for "others", the "second exchange flag" is set to ON at a rate of 20% (holding effect counter → "7"), and the "execution flag" is turned on at a rate of 60%. It is set (holding effect counter→“1”), and the “reservation flag” is set to ON at a rate of 20% (holding effect counter→“2”).

If the second exchange flag is turned on in step S6109, the exchange acceptance flag is turned off. In addition, by providing an exchange acceptance flag, for example, even though there is only one reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 6, a reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 7 is displayed after the reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 6. It is possible to avoid a situation in which multiple occurrences of In addition, there is one exchange acceptance flag. Furthermore, when specifying the holding area or the execution area (with the holding effect counter = 6) to be canceled, the holding effect counter is set in the order of the holding 8th area → the holding 7th area → ... → the execution area. Confirm. That is, when two game balls enter the first starting prize winning device 33a in quick succession, and the first exchange flag is set to ON for both of the corresponding variation information, the latter The setting of the second exchange flag is performed according to the change information of the . By the way, even if the first exchange flag is set to ON, only the look-ahead pending icon 472 of mode rank 2 or lower is displayed in the pending display area 461, and the "holding exchange effect" does not occur. Even if the fluctuation information is digested as it is, no problem (uncomfortable appearance of the reserved display area 461, etc.) will occur.

Also, if the determination in step S6107 is affirmative, that is, if there is an execution area or a reservation area in which the pre-change flag is set to ON (reservation effect counter = 4), in step S6110, in the new storage reservation area A change setting process for determining whether or not to turn on the change destination flag (whether to set "5" to the pending effect counter) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 42, the change setting table referred to in the change setting process includes "for when the jackpot is confirmed" when the jackpot is achieved in any game mode, and "conditional jackpot" when the jackpot is achieved only in the variable probability mode. "Temporary use" and "Other use" are provided. Then, the change setting table to be referred to is selected according to the change information of the new storage reservation area, and it is determined whether or not to turn on the change destination flag of the new storage reservation area based on the value of the change setting lottery counter. .

More specifically, in this embodiment, when referring to the change setting table for "for jackpot confirmation", the "change destination flag" is set to ON at a rate of 80% (holding effect counter → "5"), and 20 The "execution flag" is set to ON at a rate of % (holding effect counter→"1").

When referring to the change setting table for "conditional jackpot", the "change destination flag" is set to ON at a rate of 50% (holding effect counter → "5"), and the "execution flag" is set at a rate of 50%. It is set to ON (holding effect counter→“1”).

When referring to the change setting table for "others", the "change destination flag" is set to ON at a rate of 20% (holding effect counter → "5"), and the "execution flag" is set to ON at a rate of 60%. (suspended effect counter→“1”), and the “reserved flag” is turned on at a rate of 20% (suspended effect counter→“2”).

If the change destination flag is turned on in step S6110, the change acceptance flag is turned off. In addition, by providing a change reception flag, for example, even though there is only one reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 4, after the reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 4, a reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 5 It is possible to avoid a situation in which multiple occurrences of In addition, there is one change acceptance flag. Furthermore, when specifying the holding area or the execution area (with the holding effect counter = 4) to be canceled, the holding effect counter is set in the order of the holding 8th area → the holding 7th area → ... → the execution area. Confirm. That is, when two game balls enter the first start winning device 33a in succession, and the pre-change flag is set to ON for both of the corresponding variation information, the latter The change destination flag is set according to the change information. By the way, even if the pre-change flag is set to ON, in the pending display area 461, only the look-ahead pending icon 472 with a mode rank of 2 or less is displayed, and the "post-hold moving effect" does not occur, and the corresponding Even if the fluctuation information is digested as it is, no problem (uncomfortable appearance of the reserved display area 461, etc.) will occur.

Also, if the determination in step S6102 is affirmative, that is, if there is an execution area or a reservation area in which the reservation flag is set to ON (reservation effect counter=2), in step S6111, the new storage reservation area is released. A reservation release lottery process for determining whether or not to set a flag to ON (whether to set "3" to a reservation effect counter) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 43, the reservation release lottery table referred to during the reservation release lottery process is "for jackpot confirmation" when the jackpot is achieved in any game mode, and "condition For the time of the big hit with", "For 4 times just before the end of the ST" when the variation display is within 4 times remaining until the end of the variable probability mode, and "For others" are provided. Then, the reservation flag is set to ON, and depending on the change information of the reservation area or the execution area (with the reservation effect counter = 2) to be canceled (regardless of the change information of the new storage reservation area), the reference reservation A release lottery table is selected, and based on the value of the reservation release lottery counter, it is determined whether to turn on the release flag of the new storage reservation area.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when referring to the reservation release lottery table for "for jackpot confirmation", the "release flag" is set to ON at a rate of 70% (holding effect counter→"3"). When referring to the reservation release lottery table for "for conditional jackpot", the "release flag" is set to ON at a rate of 40% (holding effect counter→"3"). When referring to the reservation release lottery table for "for 4 times immediately before the end of ST", the "release flag" is set to ON at a rate of 30% (holding effect counter→"3"). When referring to the reservation release lottery table for "others", the "release flag" is set to ON at a rate of 20% (holding effect counter→"3").

Also, if the cancellation flag is set to ON in step S6111, the reservation acceptance flag is turned OFF. In addition, by providing a reservation acceptance flag, for example, even though there is only one reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 2, after the reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 2, a reservation area with a reservation effect counter = 3 It is possible to avoid a situation in which multiple occurrences of In addition, there is one reserved acceptance flag. Furthermore, when specifying the holding area or the execution area (with the holding effect counter = 2) to be canceled, the holding effect counter is set in the order of the holding 8th area → the holding 7th area → ... → the execution area. Confirm. In other words, when two game balls enter the first start winning device 33a in quick succession, and when the reservation flag is set to ON for both of the corresponding variation information, the latter variation A release flag is set according to the information. By the way, even if the reservation flag is set to ON, the default reservation icon 471 is only displayed in the reservation display area 461, and the "pre-hold movement effect" does not occur, and the corresponding change information is digested as it is. Even if it is done, no problem (uncomfortable appearance of the reservation display area 461, etc.) will occur.

After step S6111, in step S6112, it is determined whether or not the cancellation flag is set to ON in the new storage reservation area (reservation effect counter=3). If a negative determination is made in step S6112, the process proceeds to step S6103.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6105 (variation display of "completely out"), if an affirmative determination is made in step S6112, or after steps S6108, S6109, and S6110, that is, the new storage reservation area is reserved. When a value other than "0" is set for the effect counter, the process moves to step S6113 to perform mode rank setting processing for determining the mode of the pending icon 471 corresponding to the change information of the new storage pending area. .

Here, the mode rank setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6201, the value of the rank lottery counter (loop counter of 0 to 149) is acquired, and the counter value is stored in the new storage reservation area.

After step S6201, in step S6202, the mode of the pending icon 471, more specifically, the rank of the mode corresponding to the above-described degree of expectation of a big win is determined. In this embodiment, an execution rank indicating a mode rank of the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 and a mode rank that can be derived in the pending display area 461 correspond to the change information stored in the new storage pending area. is configured to determine an upper rank indicating an upper limit of the The execution area of the reservation information storage area and each reservation area are provided with an upper limit rank storage area for storing an upper limit rank and an execution rank storage area for storing an execution rank.

In the pending display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42, pending icons 471 (prefetch pending icons 472) corresponding to execution areas and execution ranks of the respective pending areas are displayed. Further, the prefetch pending icon 472 may change to a higher mode rank after being displayed in the pending display area 461, and the upper limit is determined by the upper limit rank. In the present embodiment, the execution rank storage areas of each pending area and execution area constitute mode information storage means.

As shown in FIG. 45, the rank determination table referred to when determining the mode of the pending icon 471 includes those referred to during the variable probability mode and those referred to in other game modes. As a pending look-ahead effect lottery table that is referred to during the probability mode, there are "for when the probability is changed" when it becomes a big hit during the probability mode, and "for when the probability is lost" when it is lost during the probability mode. There is

In addition, as the pending look-ahead effect lottery table referred to in the normal mode and the time reduction mode, there are "for when the jackpot is confirmed" when the jackpot is achieved in any game mode, when the jackpot is achieved only in the variable probability mode, and before and after "For conditional jackpot / front and rear out reach" when out reach occurs, and "for reach other than front and rear out" when reach state other than front and rear out occurs, and "complete reach state does not occur" "For outside" is provided.

Then, the rank determination table to be referred to is selected according to the change information of the new storage reservation area, and the upper limit rank and the execution rank are determined based on the value of the rank lottery counter. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when referring to "for when the probability variation medium jackpot" and "for when the jackpot is determined", it is easy to select the upper limit rank and execution rank of the high rank, "for when the probability variation medium", A high rank is hard to be selected or is not selected in the order of ``for conditional jackpot/fore-and-forth failure reach'', ``for reach other than front-and-rear failure'', and ``for complete failure''.

After step S6202, in step S6203, it is determined whether or not the pre-change flag or the first exchange flag is set to ON in the new storage reservation area (reservation effect counter=“4” or “6”). If the determination in step S6203 is affirmative, it is determined in step S6204 whether or not the execution rank stored in the execution rank storage area of the new storage reservation area is "3" or less. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6204, this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6204, that is, if any of "3, 4, 5" is set as the execution rank, then in step S6205 the execution rank storage area of the new storage reservation area Then, after forcibly overwriting and storing "2" as the prescribed rank, this processing is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S6203 is negative, it is determined in step S6206 whether or not the second exchange flag is set to ON in the new storage reservation area (reservation effect counter = "7"). When the determination in step S6206 is affirmative, in step S6207, the execution rank storage area of the new storage reservation area is set to ON with the first exchange flag (suspension effect counter=“6”) execution area. Alternatively, the same value as that stored in the upper limit rank storage area of the reserve area is forcibly overwritten and stored.

Furthermore, in step S6207, for the upper limit rank storage area of the new storage reservation area, the execution rank storage area of the execution area or reservation area where the first exchange flag is set to ON (suspension effect counter = "6") Forcibly overwrite and store the same value as the stored value. Only when the second exchange flag is set to ON, a phenomenon can occur in which the value of the execution rank storage area becomes larger than the value of the upper limit rank storage area. After step S6207, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6206, it is determined in step S6208 whether or not the change destination flag is set to ON in the new storage reservation area (reservation effect counter=“5”). If the determination in step S6208 is affirmative, in step S6209, the pre-change flag is set to ON for the execution rank storage area of the new storage reservation area (holding effect counter = "4") execution area or After forcibly overwriting and storing the same value as the value stored in the execution rank storage area of the reservation area, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6208, it is determined in step S6210 whether or not the cancellation flag is set to ON in the new storage reservation area (reservation effect counter=“3”). If a negative determination is made in step S6210, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6210, in step S6211, the execution area in which the reservation flag is set to ON for the execution rank storage area of the new storage reservation area (reservation effect counter=“2”). Alternatively, after forcibly overwriting and storing the same value as the value stored in the execution rank storage area of the reserve area, this processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 38, after step S6113, or when a negative determination is made in step S6104 (it is determined that the pending prefetch effect is not performed, and the pending effect counter=“0”), in step S6114, decoration A pending icon display process for displaying a pending icon 471 corresponding to the change information of the new storage pending area is executed on the pending display area 461 of the pattern display device 42 .

More specifically, when the value of the suspension effect counter of the new storage storage area is "0", the suspension icon 471 in the default mode is drawn to the position corresponding to the new storage storage area in the storage display area 461. process.

When the execution flag is set in the new memory reservation area (reservation effect counter = 1), the look-ahead reservation icon 472 corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new memory reservation area is displayed in the reservation display area 461. A process for deriving to a position corresponding to the new storage reservation area is performed.

When the reservation flag is set in the new memory reservation area (reservation effect counter = 2), the reservation icon 471 in the default form is drawn to the position corresponding to the new memory reservation area in the reservation display area 461. process.

When the release flag is set in the new storage pending area (holding effect counter=3), the look-ahead pending icon 472 corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new storage pending area is displayed in the pending display area 461. A process for deriving to a position corresponding to the new storage reservation area is performed. Note that, as described above, the look-ahead reservation icon 472 corresponding to the change information of the new storage reservation area for which the release flag is set stores the change information that is digested earlier than the change information of the new storage reservation area. In addition, the execution rank is the same as the execution rank stored in the execution rank storage area of the execution area for which the reservation flag is set or the reservation area.

When the pre-change flag is set in the new memory reservation area (reservation effect counter = 4), the look-ahead reservation icon 472 corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new memory reservation area is displayed in the reservation display area 461. Among them, a process for deriving to a position corresponding to the new storage reservation area is performed. As described above, when the pre-change flag is set, the state rank of the look-ahead pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the new storage pending area is "2" at most.

In order to derive the suspension icon 471 in the default mode to the position corresponding to the new storage storage area in the suspension display area 461 when the change destination flag is set in the new storage storage area (suspension effect counter=5). process.

When the first exchange flag is set in the new memory reservation area (reservation effect counter=6), the look-ahead reservation icon 472 corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new memory reservation area is displayed in the reservation display area 461. Among them, a process for deriving to a position corresponding to the new storage reservation area is performed. As described above, when the first exchange flag is set, the state rank of the look-ahead pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the new storage pending area is "2" at most.

When the second exchange flag is set in the new memory reservation area (reservation effect counter=7), the look-ahead reservation icon 472 corresponding to the execution rank stored in the new memory reservation area is displayed in the reservation display area 461. Among them, a process for deriving to a position corresponding to the new storage reservation area is performed. As described above, the look-ahead reservation icon 472 corresponding to the change information in the new storage reservation area for which the second exchange flag is set stores the change information that is digested earlier than the change information in the new storage reservation area. and the same rank as the upper limit rank stored in the upper limit rank storage area of the execution area or reservation area for which the first exchange flag is set. After step S6114, the process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 35, if the determination in step S4104 is affirmative, that is, if the variable probability mode is set, in step S4106, the remaining number of times that the variation information can be retained and stored as the variable display executed in the variable probability mode is "1" or not. If the determination in step S4106 is affirmative, that is, if the last variable display performed in the variable probability mode is retained and stored, in step S4107, is the variable display performed in the variable probability mode, or in the normal mode A display process (ST line setting process) for distinguishing whether it is a variable display to be performed is performed.

More specifically, the execution area and each pending area of the pending information storage area is provided with a last 1 flag indicating that it is the last one variable display performed in the probability variable mode, and in the ST line setting process , the last 1 flag of the new storage reservation area is set to ON. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(d), the execution corresponding area 462 or the holding corresponding area 463 of the holding display area 461 corresponding to the execution area or the holding area in which the last 1 flag is set to ON, and the holding corresponding to the right thereof A process of displaying an ST borderline 465 as a boundary display extending vertically between the area 463 is performed.

That is, between the hold icon 471 corresponding to the last variable display performed in the probability variable mode and the hold icon 471 corresponding to the first variable display performed in the normal mode, the ST border line 465 is visible. A line is drawn.

In the following step S4108, to the corresponding reservation area (new storage reservation area), set the last 4 flag indicating that the variable display within four times immediately before the probability variable mode ends.

If the determination in step S4106 is negative, it is determined in step S4109 whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter is "2 to 4". Even if the determination in step S4109 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S4108 to set the last 4 flag.

After step S4108, or if a negative determination is made in step S4109, in step S4109, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-holds counter, and then the process proceeds to step S4105.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has passed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3914.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used to set the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of the jackpot, and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CO determines the pattern (jackpot pattern) when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is used. has nine counter values (0 to 8). That is, the jackpot decoration pattern counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the variable probability jackpot is to be stopped is received from the main control device 261, the counter value is set to 0 based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol), for example. If it is "1" (double number), if it is 1, "2" (double number), and so on, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined. This jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-controller 262 receives a symbol command as described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is stored in the RAM 553 jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer. can be

Also, when a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped is received, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, "2" (double), and if it is 2 to 4, it is "4". A combination of jackpot symbols is determined such as (double), "6" (double) for 5 and 6, and "8" (double) for 7 and 8.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combinations of the stop symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery is lost. Since one of the nine decorative patterns is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each row. A stopped pattern in the upper pattern display area is determined by the upper pattern counter CL, a stopped pattern in the middle pattern display area is determined by the medium pattern counter CM, and a stopped pattern in the lower pattern display area is determined by the lower pattern counter CR.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built into the CPU 551 . That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . The pattern counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of the pattern counters CL, CM, CR are the front-rear off reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553, the non-front-rear off reach pattern buffer, and the complete It is stored in any of the outlier pattern buffers.

Here, updating processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper design counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the medium design counter CM. The top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, the determination in step S4001 is affirmative. Also, if the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update processing, the determination in step S4002 is affirmative. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If it is time to update the medium design counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium design counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower design counter CR (NO in both steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower design counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3-bit value of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the update processing of CL, CM, CR, the upper, middle, and lower pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update processing, and the updating timing of each counter value overlaps. no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated each time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined and it is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (YES in S4006), further in step S4007, whether or not it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). determine whether If the determination in step S4007 is affirmative, this processing is terminated without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in RAM553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and rear deviating symbols. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and back off symbols (front and back off reach) (S4008 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553 before and after. It is stored in the out-of-reach pattern buffer, and this processing ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front-rear deviation (Reach other than front-rear deviation) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. are stored in the ready-to-win pattern buffer of the RAM 553 except for front and back deviation, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if the combination is other than the ready-to-win pattern (NO in S4006), the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of losing patterns (completely missing patterns), so in step S4011, the The combination of the lost pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at the time is stored in the complete lost pattern buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3906, a hold process is performed. The suspension process will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4201, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S4201 is affirmative, in step S4202, the value of the fluctuation suspension counter Nd is subtracted by 1.

After step S4202, in step S4203, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first pending area to the eighth pending area of the pending information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

In the following step S4204, a reservation display rank-up lottery process for determining whether or not to raise the mode rank of the prefetching reservation icon 472 displayed in the reservation display area 461 of the decorative design display device 42 is performed. That is, in the execution area and the reservation area of the reservation information storage area, if there is a reservation area in which the execution flag is set to ON (reservation effect counter = 1), the value of the execution rank storage area of the reservation area is the upper limit rank Determine whether it is less than the value in the storage area. When the value of the execution rank storage area of the reservation area is smaller than the value of the upper limit rank storage area, a lottery is conducted, and when winning the lottery, 1 is added to the value of the execution rank storage area. Thus, by redrawing the mode of the pending icon 471 based on the value of the pending effect counter and the value of the execution rank storage area, the mode of the look-ahead pending icon 472 is ranked up by one.

In the subsequent step S4205, prefetch effect progress setting processing for changing the mode of the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, a "suspension prefetch target change effect" for changing the correspondence between the variation information stored in the suspension information storage area and the suspension icon 471 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed. There is a case, and in step S4205, processing relating to the pending prefetch target change effect is performed.

Here, the look-ahead effect progression setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 46 . In addition, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 stores a type counter (takes a value of 0 to 3) that stores a value specifying the type of "suspended prefetch target change effect", and 2 that is the target of the pending prefetch effect. Of the two variable information, the target first counter (the execution area and the first pending area of the pending information storage area) that stores the value specifying the execution area or the pending area in which the variable information that is digested first is stored ~ takes a value of 0 to 7 corresponding to the 7th pending area), and the target second counter that stores the variable information that will be digested later of the two variable information that is the target of the pending look-ahead effect (takes a value of 1 to 8 corresponding to the first to eighth reservation areas of the reservation information storage area) is provided.

First, in step S6301, processing for resetting the pending prefetch effect request storage area is performed. Here, setting the type counter of the pending prefetch effect request storage area to "0" indicates that the pending prefetch target change effect is not performed. Incidentally, there are three (three sets) pending prefetch effect request storage areas in this embodiment.

After step S6301, in step S6302, it is determined whether or not there is a pending area (with pending effect counter=3) in which the release flag is set to ON in the pending information storage area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6302, in step S6303, the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the change information of the predetermined pending area is changed prior to the change information of the predetermined pending area. A pre-suspension movement effect process for performing a "pre-suspension movement effect" as a suspension prefetch target change effect to change display as a suspension icon 471 corresponding to information is performed.

More specifically, in the pre-retention movement effect processing, first, the decorative pattern display device 42 performs memory processing for effect display accompanying the "pre-retention movement effect" (such as a "connecting effect" to be described later). That is, the type counter in the pending look-ahead effect request storage area is set to "1" indicating the "moving effect before holding", and the reserve flag is set to ON for the target first counter (holding effect counter = 2 ) is set to indicate the execution area or the reservation area, and a value indicating the reservation area (with the reservation effect counter=3) in which the release flag is set to ON is set for the target second counter.

Next, "0" is set to the pending effect counter of the pending area (holding effect counter=3) in which the release flag is set to ON. Furthermore, "1" is set for the execution area or the suspension effect counter of the suspension area (with the suspension effect counter=2) in which the suspension flag is set to ON. Thus, by redrawing the state of the pending icon 471 based on the value of the pending effect counter and the value of the execution rank storage area, the pending icon 471 with the value of the pending effect counter changed from "3 to 0" , the mode of the predetermined prefetching pending icon 472 has changed to the default mode, and the pending icon 471 in which the value of the pending effect counter has changed from "2 to 1" changes from the default mode to the mode of the predetermined prefetching pending icon 472. It will change.

In this example, in the processing, the reservation effect counter for which the reservation flag was set to ON is always set to "1". It is also possible to configure so that Furthermore, in this example, in the processing, the holding effect counter for which the release flag is set to ON is always set to "0", but for example, either "0" or "2" is set by lottery. It is also possible to configure

After step S6303, or when a negative determination is made in step S6302, in step S6304, it is determined whether or not there is a pending area in which the change destination flag is set to ON (holding effect counter=5). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6304, in step S6305, the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the variable information of the predetermined pending area is changed to the variable information digested later than the variable information of the predetermined pending area. Post-suspension movement effect processing for performing a "post-suspension movement effect" as a suspension prefetch target change effect to be displayed and changed as a suspension icon 471 corresponding to is performed.

That is, in the post-suspension movement effect processing, first, "2" indicating "suspension post-movement effect" is set to the type counter of the pending prefetch effect request storage area, and the pre-change flag is turned on for the target first counter. Set a value indicating the execution area or pending area that has been set (with pending effect counter = 4), and the change destination flag is set to ON for the target second counter (with pending effect counter = 5) Pending area Set a value that indicates

Next, "0" is set for the pending effect counter of the execution area or the pending effect area (holding effect counter=4) in which the pre-change flag is set to ON. Furthermore, "1" is set to the pending effect counter of the pending area (holding effect counter=5) in which the change destination flag is set to ON. Thus, by redrawing the state of the pending icon 471 based on the value of the pending effect counter and the value of the execution rank storage area, the pending icon 471 with the value of the pending effect counter changed from "4 to 0" , the mode of the predetermined prefetching pending icon 472 has changed to the default mode, and the pending icon 471 in which the value of the pending effect counter has changed from "5 to 1" changes from the default mode to the mode of the predetermined prefetching pending icon 472. It will change.

In this example, in the processing, the pending effect counter for which the pre-change flag was set to ON is always set to "0", but for example, either "0" or "2" is set by lottery. It is also possible to configure Furthermore, in this example, in the process, the change destination flag is always set to "1" in the pending effect counter that is set to ON. It is also possible to configure so that either one is set.

After step S6305, or when a negative determination is made in step S6304, in step S6306, it is determined whether or not there is a pending area in which the second exchange flag is set to ON (holding effect counter=7). . If a negative determination is made in step S6306, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S6306 is affirmative, in step S6307, the prefetching pending icon 472 displayed corresponding to the change information of the predetermined pending area and the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the change information of another pending area Hold exchange effect processing for performing a "hold exchange effect" as a change effect for changing (exchanging) a hold prefetch object is performed.

That is, in the pending exchange effect process, first, "3" indicating "suspended exchange effect" is set to the type counter of the pending look-ahead effect request storage area, and the first exchange flag is set to ON for the target first counter. Set a value indicating the execution area or the pending area (with the pending effect counter = 6), and the second exchange flag is set to ON for the target second counter (with the pending effect counter = 7) The pending area Set a value that indicates

Next, "1" is set for the holding effect counter in the holding area where the second exchange flag is set to ON (holding effect counter = 7), and the second exchange flag is set to be ON. The same value (mode rank) as that stored in the upper limit rank storage area of the same reserve area is stored in the execution rank storage area of the area. Furthermore, "1" is set for the holding effect counter of the execution area or the holding area where the first exchange flag is set to ON (holding effect counter = 6), and the first exchange flag is set to ON. The value (mode rank) stored in the upper limit rank storage area of the same execution area or reservation area is stored in the execution rank storage area of the same execution area or reservation area. Thus, by redrawing the state of the pending icon 471 based on the value of the pending effect counter and the value of the execution rank storage area, the value of the pending effect counter changes from "6 to 1". It changes as if the mode and the mode of the pending icon 471 in which the value of the pending effect counter changes from "7 to 1" are exchanged.

In this example, in the processing, the holding effect counter for which the first change flag is set to ON is always set to "1". It can also be configured to be set. Furthermore, in this example, in the processing, the holding effect counter for which the second change flag is set to ON is always set to "1". It is also possible to configure so that either of

After step S6307, this processing ends. In addition, since there are three holding prefetch effect request storage areas in this embodiment, a plurality of "holding prefetch target change effects" out of "pre-hold movement effect", "post-hold movement effect", and "hold exchange effect" may occur simultaneously. However, the same type of reserved prefetch target change effect is not performed at the same time.

Returning to the description of FIG. 36, after step S4205, in step S4206, pending icon shift processing for shifting the pending icon 471 displayed on the decorative design display device 42 is performed. That is, in the data shift process of step S4203, since the variation information of the suspension information storage area is shifted, the suspension icon of the suspension display area 461 of the suspension area in which the variation information is stored and the decoration pattern display device 42 In order to match the display position of 471, the pending icon 471 is redrawn. Here, the pending icon shift process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S6401, it is determined whether or not the value of the type counter of all the three reserved prefetch effect request storage areas is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S6401, that is, if the "holding prefetch target change effect" is not performed, the process moves to step S6402.

In step S6402, the value of the pending effect counter stored in the execution area and the pending area of the pending information storage area, the value of the execution rank storage area, and the first variable display and the second variable display. Redrawing of the pending icon 471 (suspended redrawing process) is performed based on information such as whether to continue. That is, by redrawing the pending icon 471 based on the information whose storage location was shifted by the data shift processing of the pending information storage area immediately before (in step S4203 of the pending processing), the pending display area 461 changes. Each time one display is digested (executed), the pending icon 471 in the execution corresponding area 462 located at the left end of the pending display area 461 is erased, and the pending icon 471 in the pending corresponding area 463 is moved to the left by one. (the display position moves one frame to the left). In particular, the pending icon 471 located at the far left of the pending corresponding area 463 is shifted to the execution corresponding area 462 .

After step S6402, in step S6403, the ST borderline 465 (see FIG. 52(d)) is also shifted. In other words, when there is an execution area or a pending area with the last 1 flag set to ON, processing is performed to redisplay the ST border line 465 on the right side of the execution corresponding area 462 or the pending corresponding area 463 of the corresponding pending display area 461. . After step S6403, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6401, that is, if some "suspended prefetching target change effect" is performed, in steps S6404 to S6406, a "connecting effect" that makes the "suspended prefetching target change effect" easier to understand. Perform processing to derive That is, in step S6404, the flag during connection production is set to ON, and in step S6405, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the connection production timer. Furthermore, in step S6406, the default hold flag of the execution area and the reservation area indicated by the target first counter and the target second counter of all the pending prefetch effect request storage areas whose type counter value is "1 to 3" on. Note that when the default hold flag is set to ON, the mode of the corresponding hold icon 471 is maintained in the default mode.

After step S6406, in step S6407, it is determined whether or not there is a pending prefetch effect request storage area in which the value of the type counter is "1". If the determination in step S6407 is affirmative, that is, if the "pre-suspension movement effect" which is a kind of "suspension prefetch target change effect" is performed, in step S6408, pre-connection effect setting processing is performed. In addition, by the pre-connection effect setting process, the generation and display of the "pre-hold movement effect" is started, and then, on the condition that the flag during the connection effect is set to ON, the generation and display of the "pre-hold movement effect" The display or the like is continued, and a 2-second moving image or the like is performed as the "movement effect before holding".

In the "pre-reservation movement effect", the character displayed in the pre-reading reservation icon 472 corresponding to the reservation area indicated by the value of the second target counter is displayed in the pre-reading corresponding to the reservation area indicated by the value of the first target counter. It is an effect that it will be displayed by the pending icon 472 . Therefore, instead of instantaneously moving the character, by performing a "connecting effect" that allows the character to see how it is moving, the target of the character corresponds to the reservation area indicated by the value of the second target counter. This makes it easier for the user to recognize that the pending icon 471 has been changed to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area indicated by the value of the first target counter.

More specifically, the mode rank corresponding to the value shown in the execution rank storage area of the pending area indicated by the value of the target second counter of the pending prefetch effect request storage area whose type counter value is "1" The “character” displayed by the look-ahead pending icon 472 is popped out of the “treasure box” and displayed above the pending display area 461 . In particular, the "character" corresponds to the upper position of the part corresponding to the execution area or the reservation area indicated by the value of the target first counter and the reservation area indicated by the value of the target second counter in the reservation display area 461. In the position between the upper position of the part to be displayed, it is displayed in such a manner as to face the upper position side (left side) of the part corresponding to the execution area or the reservation area indicated by the value of the first target counter.

After step S6408, or when a negative determination is made in step S6407, it is determined in step S6409 whether or not there is a pending prefetch effect request storage area in which the value of the type counter is "2". If an affirmative determination is made in step S6409, that is, if the "post-suspension moving effect" which is a kind of "suspension prefetch target change effect" is performed, in step S6410, a subsequent connection effect setting process is performed. It should be noted that, by the post-connection effect setting process, the generation and display of the "moving effect after holding" is started, and then, on the condition that the flag during the connecting effect is set to ON, the generation and display of the "moving effect after holding" The display or the like is continued, and a 2-second moving image or the like is performed as the "moving effect after holding".

In the "post-suspend movement effect", the character displayed by the prefetch suspension icon 472 corresponding to the suspension area indicated by the value of the first target counter is displayed in the prefetch corresponding to the suspension area indicated by the value of the second target counter. It is an effect that it is displayed as a pending icon 472 . Therefore, instead of instantaneously moving the character, a "connection effect" is performed so that the character's movement can be seen, so that the character's target corresponds to the reservation area indicated by the value of the first target counter. This makes it easier for the user to recognize that the pending icon 471 has been changed to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area indicated by the value of the second target counter.

More specifically, it corresponds to the execution area indicated by the value of the target first counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area whose type counter value is "2" or the value indicated by the execution rank storage area of the pending area. The “character” displayed by the look-ahead pending icon 472 of the mode rank jumps out of the “treasure box” and is displayed above the pending display area 461 . In particular, the "character" is the upper position of the part corresponding to the execution area or the reservation area indicated by the value of the first target counter in the reservation display area 461, and the upper position of the reservation area indicated by the value of the second target counter. In the position between the positions, it is displayed in such a manner as to face the upper position side (right side) of the part corresponding to the execution area or the reservation area indicated by the value of the second target counter.

After step S6410, or when a negative determination is made in step S6409, in step S6411, it is determined whether or not there is a pending prefetch effect request storage area in which the value of the type counter is "3". If the determination in step S6411 is affirmative, ie, if the "suspension exchange effect" which is a kind of "suspension prefetch target change effect" is performed, in step S6412, an exchange connection effect setting process is performed.

It should be noted that the generation and display of the "suspended exchange effect" is started by the exchange connection effect setting process, and then the generation and display of the "suspended exchange effect" on the condition that the flag during the connection effect is set to ON. is continued, and a 2-second moving image or the like is performed as a "holding exchange effect". In addition, the three holding prefetch effect request storage areas are associated with different image layers of the decorative pattern display device 42, respectively, and the "pre-hold movement effect", the "post-hold movement effect", and the "hold exchange effect". When a plurality of these are performed at the same time, the character may be displayed so as to overlap (partially) forward and backward.

The "suspended exchange effect" is the character displayed by the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the pending area indicated by the value of the first target counter, and the prefetch pending corresponding to the pending area indicated by the value of the second target counter. The effect is to replace (exchange) the character displayed by the icon 472 . Therefore, instead of instantaneously moving the character, a "connecting effect" is performed so that the character can be seen during movement, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the character has been replaced.

More specifically, it corresponds to the execution area indicated by the value of the target first counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area whose type counter value is "3" or the value indicated by the execution rank storage area of the pending area. The "character" displayed by the look-ahead suspension icon 472 of the mode rank is popped out of the "treasure box" and displayed in the upper position of the suspension display area 461 "facing right", and the suspension indicated by the value of the target second counter is displayed. The "character" displayed by the look-ahead pending icon 472 of the aspect rank corresponding to the value shown in the execution rank storage area of the area is popped out of the "treasure box" and displayed "facing left" above the pending display area 461. Let

Also, after step S6412, in step S6413, the values of the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the execution area or reservation area storing the variation information targeted for the "holding exchange effect" are changed. process. That is, for the execution area or reservation area indicated by the values of the target first counter and the target second counter whose type counter value is "3", the value stored in the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area and the value stored in . For example, if the values stored in the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the second reserved area indicated by the target first counter are "2" and "4", respectively, the target second counter The values stored in the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the fourth reserved area indicated by ) should be "4" and "2", and in step S6410, the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the second reservation area indicated by the target first counter The values stored in the execution rank storage area and the upper limit rank storage area of the fourth reserved area indicated by the target second counter are set to "2", respectively. ”, and “4”.

After step S6413, or if a negative determination is made in step S6411, the process moves to step S6402 to redraw the pending icon 471. FIG. However, regarding the execution area and the reservation area in which the default hold flag is set to ON, the reservation icon 471 in the default mode is displayed regardless of the information stored in the reservation effect counter and the execution rank storage area. After that, in step S6403, processing for shifting the ST borderline 465 is performed, and then this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3907, processing during connection display for performing a "connection effect" performed mainly in the reserved display area 461 is performed. Here, the processing during connection display will be described with reference to FIG. 48 .

First, in step S6501, it is determined whether or not the connecting effect flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S6501, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S6501 is affirmative, in step S6502, the connection effect timer is subtracted by 1.

In the following step S6503, it is determined whether or not the value of the connection effect timer is 0. A value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the connection effect timer in the pending icon shift process. In addition, in the present embodiment, the transition effect for any of the "moving effect before holding", the "moving effect after holding", and the "holding exchange effect" is 2 seconds.

If a negative determination is made in step S6503, then in step S6508 a transition display continuation process for continuing to display the transition effect is performed, and then this process is terminated. In this embodiment, a two-second moving image as a whole is generated as a connection effect in the decorative pattern display device 42 .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S6503 is affirmative, in step S6504, connection effect end processing for ending the connection effect (display, sound, etc.) is performed. In subsequent step S6505, the default hold flag set to ON is turned OFF.

In the following step S6506, the value of the pending effect counter of the execution area and the pending area, the storage information of the execution rank storage area, and the information as to which of the first variable display and the second variable display corresponds to the pending icon 471 redraw process. As a result, the hold icon 471 displayed in the default mode is changed to the look-ahead hold icon 472 because the default hold flag was set to ON although the hold effect counter was set to "1". Become.

After that, in step S6507, after turning off the flag during the connection effect, the process is terminated.

Next, a specific example of the flow of each "holding prefetch target change effect" will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. Incidentally, when the "suspended prefetch target change effect" is not performed, as shown in FIG. Along with the shift, the pending icon 471 in the pending display area 461 is shifted to the pending corresponding area 463 or the execution corresponding area 462 one ahead (adjacent to the left). 54 to 57 are explanatory diagrams showing the correspondence between the information of the pending effect counter stored in the pending information storage area and the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461. FIG. Further, in these figures, for the sake of convenience, the reserved area of the reserved information storage area is explained as up to the fourth reserved area.

First, the character displayed on the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the pending area indicated by the value of the second target counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area is indicated by the value of the first target counter. The flow of the "pre-hold movement effect" for moving to the hold icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the hold area will be described.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55, in the state where the reservation flag is set to ON in the second reservation area of the reservation information storage area (holding effect counter=“2”), the release flag is set to ON in the fourth reservation area. (Holding effect counter→“3”, see step S6111 of the holding icon setting process) If “2” corresponding to “mode rank 2” is stored in the execution rank storage area of the second holding area , "2" is also forcibly set in the execution rank storage area of the fourth pending area (see step S6211 of mode rank setting processing), and in the fourth pending corresponding area of the pending display area 461, "mode rank 2" is set. A corresponding "treasure box with shark" prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed. Incidentally, when the reserve flag is set to ON, the default reserve icon 471 is displayed regardless of the value stored in the execution rank storage area. A default (closed treasure box only) reserve icon 471 is displayed in the second reserve corresponding area corresponding to the second reserve area in which the reserve flag is set to ON.

Then, the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern command, data shift processing of the reservation information storage area is performed, the reservation area in which the reservation flag is set to ON moves from the second reservation area to the first reservation area , the reservation area in which the release flag is set to ON moves from the fourth reservation area to the third reservation area. Also, at this stage, a prefetch effect progression setting process is performed. As a result, the reservation flag of the first reservation area is changed to the execution flag (reservation effect counter→“1”), and the cancellation flag of the reservation third area is turned off (reservation effect counter→“0”). Furthermore, at this stage, a process of storing into the pending look-ahead effect request storage area is performed. As a result, "1" corresponding to execution of the "moving effect before suspension" is set to the type counter of the pending prefetch effect request storage area, and "1" corresponding to the pending first area is set to the target first counter. is set, and "3" corresponding to the reserved third area is set for the target second counter.

In the subsequent pending icon shift process, when it is confirmed that the type counter of the pending prefetch effect request storage area is not set to "0", the flag during the connecting effect is set to ON, and the connecting effect timer is set to 2 seconds. is set, and the default hold flags of the first and third reserved areas indicated by the first and second target counters are turned on (see step S6406).

Furthermore, since "1" is set in the type counter of the pending look-ahead effect request storage area, the character for the mode rank 2 indicated in the execution rank storage area of the pending third area indicated by the target second counter A certain "shark" is displayed above the third pending area in the pending display area 461 (see step S6408).

Subsequently, a process of shifting the pending icon 471 to the left is performed. That is, since the variable information in the pending information storage area has already been shifted, the value of the pending performance counter in the execution area and each pending area, the stored information in the execution rank storage area, the first variable display and the second variable display If the pending icon 471 is redrawn based on the information as to whether it corresponds, the pending icon 471 is shifted to the left (see step S6402). However, regarding the first pending area and the third pending area in which the default hold flag is set to ON, regardless of the information stored in the pending effect counter and the execution rank storage area, the default mode (during the movement of the character object 474) A pending icon 471 is displayed. In other words, the execution flag is set to ON in the first pending area (holding effect counter=“1”), but the look-ahead pending icon 472 is not displayed in the first pending area, and the default pending state is displayed. An icon 471 is displayed.

In particular, regarding the look-ahead pending icon 472 in the form of "a shark is looking at you from an open treasure chest" displayed in the fourth pending corresponding area of the pending display area 461 before the shift processing of the pending icon 471 is performed. , along with the shift processing of the pending icon 471 , changes to the default mode of “closed treasure chest” and moves to the third pending corresponding area of the pending display area 461 . However, as described above, above the "closed treasure chest" is displayed a "shark" that looks like it has escaped from the "treasure chest" and is swimming toward the left.

After that, the “shark” that has escaped from the “treasure box” is displayed to swim to the left above the holding display area 461 for two seconds (it may move in one direction at a constant speed, or it may meander). You can go back and forth, change the speed, stop and go back, or change your facial expression or gesture). Two seconds later, the default hold flag is turned off and the pending icon 471 is redrawn. As a result, the "treasure box" displayed in the first pending corresponding area, which is the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the first pending area indicated by the value of the target first counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area. ”, the “shark” swimming above will dive in, and the “treasure box with shark” will be displayed in the first reserved area. In this embodiment, a display effect in which a character object 474 such as a “shark” moves (swims) between “treasure boxes”, which are base objects 473, constitutes a “connecting effect”.

The basic flow of the "moving effect before holding" is described above, but in particular, as shown in FIG. If it is, I want the look-ahead suspension icon 472 to be derived. It is possible to add a very enthusiastic game property such as wanting to cross the ST borderline 465 to the variable probability mode side. In the present embodiment, the change time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is 2 seconds or longer (for example, 6 seconds or longer) at the shortest, and the look-ahead target change effect is completed before the ready-to-win state occurs. ), and the shift process is not performed while the character object 474 such as "shark" is displayed swimming.

Next, the character displayed on the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the pending area indicated by the value of the first target counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area is indicated by the value of the second target counter. The flow of the "post-suspension movement effect" for moving to the suspension icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the suspension area will be described.

For example, as shown in FIG. 56, in a state where the pre-change flag is set to ON in the first pending area of the pending information storage area (holding effect counter=“4”), the fourth pending flag has a change destination flag. When set to ON (reserved effect counter → "5"), if "2" corresponding to "mode rank 2" is stored in the execution rank storage area of the first reserved area, execution of the fourth reserved area "2" is also forcibly set in the rank storage area (see step S6209 of mode rank setting processing). However, when the change destination flag is set to ON, the default pending icon 471 is set to be displayed regardless of the value stored in the execution rank storage area.

For this reason, in the first pending area corresponding to the first pending area in the pending display area 461, the state in which the prefetch pending icon 472 of the "treasure box with shark" corresponding to the "mode rank 2" is displayed is changed to the pending state. A mode is derived in which a default (closed treasure chest only) pending icon 471 is additionally displayed for the position corresponding to the fourth area.

Then, the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern command, data shift processing of the pending information storage area is performed, so that the pending area where the pre-change flag is set to ON moves from the pending first area to the execution area, The reservation area in which the change destination flag is turned on is moved from the fourth reservation area to the third reservation area. Also, at this stage, the prefetch effect progress setting process is performed, so that the reservation flag of the execution area is turned off (reservation effect counter→“0”), and the change destination flag of the reservation third area is changed to the execution flag. (Holding performance counter→“1”). Furthermore, at this stage, the storage processing to the pending prefetch effect request storage area is performed, so that the type counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area is set to "2" corresponding to the execution of the "post-suspend move effect". The target first counter is set to "0" corresponding to the execution area, and the target second counter is set to "3" corresponding to the pending third area.

In the subsequent pending icon shift process, when it is confirmed that the type counter of the pending prefetch effect request storage area is not set to "0", the flag during the connecting effect is set to ON, and the connecting effect timer is set to 2 seconds. is set, and the default hold flags of the execution area and the reservation third area indicated by the target first counter and target second counter are set to ON.

Furthermore, since "2" is set in the type counter of the pending look-ahead effect request storage area, the character " A process of displaying "Shark" above the execution corresponding area in the pending display area 461 is performed (see step S6410).

Subsequently, a process of shifting the pending icon 471 to the left is performed. That is, since the variable information in the pending information storage area has already been shifted, the value of the pending performance counter in the execution area and each pending area, the stored information in the execution rank storage area, the first variable display and the second variable display If the pending icon 471 is redrawn based on the information as to whether it corresponds, the pending icon 471 is shifted to the left (see step S6402). However, regarding the execution area and the third pending area in which the default hold flag is set to ON, regardless of the information stored in the pending effect counter and the execution rank storage area, the hold icon in the default mode (during the movement of the character object 474) 471 is displayed. That is, in the third pending area, the execution flag is set to ON (holding effect counter=“1”), but the look-ahead pending icon 472 is not displayed, and the default pending icon 471 is displayed.

In particular, regarding the look-ahead pending icon 472 in the form of "a shark is looking at you from an open treasure chest" displayed in the execution corresponding area of the pending display area 461 before the shift processing of the pending icon 471 is performed, Along with the shift processing of the pending icon 471 , it changes to a “closed treasure chest” mode and moves to the execution corresponding area of the pending display area 461 . However, as described above, above the "closed treasure chest" is displayed a "shark" that looks like it has escaped from the "treasure chest" and is swimming toward the right side.

After that, the “shark” that has escaped from the “treasure box” is displayed to swim to the right above the reserved display area 461 over a period of two seconds. Two seconds later, the default hold flag is turned off and the pending icon 471 is redrawn. As a result, the "treasure box" displayed in the third pending corresponding area, which is the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the third pending area indicated by the value of the target second counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area. , and the “shark-attached treasure box” is displayed at the position corresponding to the third reserved area.

Next, the character displayed in the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the pending area indicated by the value of the first target counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area and the value of the second target counter are displayed. The flow of the "holding exchange performance" for exchanging with the character displayed on the holding icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the holding area will be described.

For example, as shown in FIG. 57, in the state where the first exchange flag is set to ON in the second pending area of the pending information storage area (holding effect counter=“6”), the second exchange is placed in the fourth pending area. When the flag is set to ON (reservation effect counter → "7"), "2" corresponding to "mode rank 2" is stored in the execution rank storage area of the second reservation area, and the upper limit rank of the second reservation area is stored. If "4" corresponding to "mode rank 4" is stored in the area, "4" is forcibly set in the execution rank storage area of the reserved fourth area (upside down), and the reserved rank is set to "4". "2" is forcibly set in the upper limit rank storage area of the 4 area (see step S6207 of mode rank setting processing). For this reason, in the second pending corresponding area of the pending display area 461, from the state where the "treasure box with shark" corresponding to the "mode rank 2" is displayed, the fourth pending corresponding area, A mode is derived in which a look-ahead pending icon 472 for a “treasure chest with crab” corresponding to “mode rank 4” is additionally displayed.

Then, when the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern command and the data shift processing of the reservation information storage area is performed, the reservation area in which the first exchange flag is set to ON is changed from the reservation second area to the reservation first area. , and the reserved area in which the second exchange flag is set to ON moves from the fourth reserved area to the third reserved area. Also, at this stage, by performing the prefetch effect progress setting process, the first exchange flag of the first reserved area is changed to the execution flag (reserved effect counter → "1"), and the second exchange of the third reserved area The flag is changed to an execution flag (holding effect counter→“1”). Furthermore, at this stage, the storage processing to the pending prefetch effect request storage area is performed, so that the type counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area is set to "3" corresponding to the execution of the "suspended exchange effect". "1" corresponding to the reserved first area is set to the target first counter, and "3" corresponding to the reserved third area is set to the target second counter.

In the subsequent pending icon shift process, when it is confirmed that the type counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area is not set to "0", the flag during the connecting effect is set to ON, and the connecting effect timer is set to 2 seconds. is set, and the default hold flags of the reserved first area and the reserved third area indicated by the target first counter and target second counter are set to ON.

Furthermore, since "3" is set in the type counter of the pending look-ahead effect request storage area, the character for the mode rank 2 indicated in the execution rank storage area of the pending first area indicated by the target first counter A certain "shark" is displayed above the first suspension corresponding area in the suspension display area 461, and the character for the mode rank 4 indicated in the execution rank storage area of the third suspension area indicated by the second target counter. is displayed above the third pending area in the pending display area 461 (see step S6412).

In addition, the value "2" stored in the execution rank storage area of the first reservation area indicated by the target first counter and the value "4" stored in the upper limit rank storage area are exchanged, and rank storage is performed. The values stored in the area and the upper limit rank storage area are set to "4" and "2", respectively. In addition, the value "4" stored in the execution rank storage area of the third reservation area indicated by the target second counter is replaced with the value "2" stored in the upper limit rank storage area, and the rank storage area and the values stored in the upper limit rank storage area are "2" and "4", respectively.

Subsequently, a process of shifting the pending icon 471 to the left is performed. That is, since the variable information in the pending information storage area has already been shifted, the value of the pending performance counter in the execution area and each pending area, the stored information in the execution rank storage area, the first variable display and the second variable display If the pending icon 471 is redrawn based on the information as to whether it corresponds, the pending icon 471 is shifted to the left (see step S6402). However, regarding the first pending area and the third pending area in which the default hold flag is set to ON, regardless of the information stored in the pending effect counter and the execution rank storage area, the default mode (during the movement of the character object 474) A pending icon 471 is displayed. That is, in the first and third pending areas, the execution flag is set to ON (holding effect counter=“1”), but the look-ahead pending icon 472 is not displayed, and the default pending icon 471 is displayed. be done.

Also, regarding the look-ahead pending icon 472 in the form of "a shark is peeking at you from an open treasure chest" displayed in the second pending corresponding area of the pending display area 461 before the shift processing of the pending icon 471 is performed changes to a “closed treasure chest” mode and moves to the first suspension corresponding area of the suspension display area 461 as the suspension icon 471 shifts. Furthermore, the pre-reading of the mode of "the crab is peeking out of the open treasure chest" displayed at the position corresponding to the fourth reservation corresponding area of the reservation display area 461 before the shift processing of the reservation icon 471 is performed. As for the pending icon 472 , as the pending icon 471 shifts, it changes to a “closed treasure chest” mode and moves to a position corresponding to the third pending area of the pending display area 461 .

However, as described above, above the “closed treasure chest” displayed in the first reservation corresponding area of the reservation display area 461, there is a A "shark" will be displayed, and a "crab" will appear above the "closed treasure chest" displayed in the 3rd reserved area, as if it has escaped from the "treasure chest" and is swimming towards the left. It is

After that, the “shark” and the “crab” that escaped from the “treasure box” are displayed to swim above the holding display area 461 for two seconds. Two seconds later, the default hold flag is turned off and the pending icon 471 is redrawn. As a result, the "treasure box" in the third pending corresponding area, which is the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information stored in the third pending area indicated by the value of the target second counter in the pending prefetch effect request storage area, is displayed upward. The "shark" that was swimming in the water dives in, and a "treasure box with a shark" is displayed in the third pending area, and is stored in the first pending area indicated by the value of the first target counter in the pending look-ahead effect request storage area. The ``crab'' swimming above slips into the ``treasure box'' in the first reservation corresponding area, which is the reservation icon 471 corresponding to the change information being displayed, and the ``treasure box with crab'' is displayed in the first reservation corresponding area. becomes.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, display setting processing is performed in step S3908. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processing such as generation of display commands to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined. For example, when receiving a variation pattern command and a symbol command, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, etc., and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command.

In addition, the display control device 45 performs drawing processing according to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the variable display of the decorative design on the decorative design display device 42. FIG. In addition, once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, the pattern is displayed under the cooperation of the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45. continues to fluctuate. In addition, in the display setting process of the step S3908, the process (hit display process) for controlling the effect during the big hit is also performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the display command is generated, execution-corresponding area display processing for changing the display mode of the pending icon 471 in the execution-corresponding area 462 of the pending display area 461 is also performed. . That is, as shown in FIGS. 52(b) and 52(c), an effect display such as opening the "treasure box" constituting the reserved icon 471 and looking at its contents is performed. prepared. For example, there are cases where marine organisms, shells, treasures, tools for sailing and sea bathing, etc. are stored, and cases where nothing is stored, and each is associated with the degree of expectation for a big win. Among them, if there is a large amount of "bubbles" generated from the opened treasure chest, or if the "bubbles" are large, or if a "school of fish" pops out, the expectation of a big hit will also increase. there is Furthermore, the "bubbles" and "school of fish" may extend to the main display area of the decorative design display device 42 that variably displays the decorative design. There is also a production with high expectations for a big hit, such as collaboration with fluctuation-related information related to the display.

In the present embodiment, the prefetch pending icon 472 is configured to have a higher probability of generating "bubbles" and "fish schools" than the default pending icon 471. FIG. For example, when the look-ahead pending icon 472 reaches the execution corresponding area 462 of the pending display area 461, the character object 474 jumps out of the treasure box and follows the character object 474, such as “bubbles” or “fish school”. It is also possible to Incidentally, "school of fish" has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than "bubbles", and the higher the mode rank of the look-ahead pending icon 472, the more likely it is that "school of fish" will be selected.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the display setting process of step S3908, the display process during the big win (hit display process) is performed. Here, the winning display processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 261 to announce the start of the jackpot state. If the determination in step S4701 is affirmative, in step S4702, the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to "15RS" or "15RN" based on the information included in the opening command. If there is, "15" is set, and if "2RS", "2" is set.

After that, in step S4703, if it is a big hit with balls, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative pattern display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effects during the jackpot state. Choose and do it.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not an interval command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if a jackpot with balls is produced, an effect during the round is set for a maximum of 30 seconds, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S4704 is negative, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not an interval command has been received. If the determination in step S4706 is affirmative, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if the jackpot with balls is produced in step S4708, the effect during the interval of 4 seconds is set, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S4706 is negative, it is determined in step S4709 whether or not an ending command has been received. If the determination in step S4709 is affirmative, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if a jackpot with balls is produced in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then this process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot without balls, during each period such as the opening period (2 seconds), the round period (0.4 seconds), the interval period (1 second), and the ending period (1 second) Instead of setting the production for each period, the production is set so that the production (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not a winning end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately ended, and a normal game state mode in which variable display is performed is set. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after the display setting process of step S3908, in step S3909, a change stop process relating to stop of the change display of the decorative design display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S6601, it is determined whether or not a stop command (see step S819 of the special display control process) has been received. If the determination in step S6601 is affirmative, in step S6602, the process of stopping the variable display on the decorative design display device 42 is performed. In the following step S6603, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation number counter for grasping the remaining period of the probability variation mode.

After step S6603, or if a negative determination is made in step S6601, it is determined in step S6604 whether or not a support termination command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S6604, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S6604, in step S6605, the production stage displayed on the decorative design display device 42 is changed from the "probability variable stage" to the normal stage. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3910, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative pattern display device 42. FIG.

In the sound setting process of step S3911, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative design display device 42. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3911.

In step S3912, the customer waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display set to be displayed after a predetermined time has passed while the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is not being performed; energy saving mode) control setting, etc. process.

In step S3913, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3913 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative design display device 42 displays the decorative design in a variable manner.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3913, which is performed every 2 msec, is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3914 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3915 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3914 that power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3916. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, in the first embodiment, when the first variable display or the second variable display is suspended and stored based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the variable display is suspended. In order to teach the player what has been stored, the display mode of the first suspension display device 46a and the second suspension display device 46b (the lighting pattern of the first suspension lamp and the second suspension lamp; in this example, the first suspension display equivalent) is changed, and a pending icon 471 is displayed in the pending display area 461 of the decorative design display device 42 . In particular, the hold icon 471 may be derived as a look-ahead hold icon 472 that suggests the content of the corresponding variable display, that is, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot state (the degree of expectation of the jackpot).

Furthermore, the prefetching pending icon 472 of the present embodiment is such that even if the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined variable display is not set as the prefetching pending icon 472 at this stage, before the predetermined variable display is executed, By changing the target of the prefetching pending icon 472 derived as the pending icon 461 corresponding to another variable display, the possibility of deriving the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the predetermined variable display remains. is configured as More specifically, the look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived by combining a character object 474 with a base object 473 imitating a "treasure box", and the default pending icon 471 is derived in a "treasure box only" mode. derived. Then, by moving the character object 474 from a predetermined treasure box to another treasure box (by changing the base object 473 to be displayed along with the character object 474), the character object 474 is targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472. The variable display is changed. That is, even at the timing after the pending icon 471 is derived in the default mode, the pending icon 471 may change to the prefetch pending icon 472 before the variable display corresponding to the pending icon 471 is completed. is configured so that This gives hope that the default pending icon 471 may change to a lookahead pending icon 472 until the default pending icon 471 is consumed.

Therefore, due to the presence of the look-ahead pending icon 472 and the default pending icon 471, the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a big win state with respect to the default pending icon 471 is relatively lowered as a player's emotion. In addition, they have a negative image of the variable display corresponding to the pending icon 471 (because it won't hit anyway, I want it to end quickly). etc.) can be avoided. In particular, in the state where the prefetch pending icon 472 and the default pending icon 471 are displayed in the pending display area 461, such effects are further exhibited. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the negative aspects of making it possible to derive the prefetching suspension icon 472, and by performing an effect using the prefetching suspension icon 472, it is possible to improve interest more reliably.

Furthermore, rather than winning the jackpot in the first variation display based on the ball entering the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning apparatus 33a, the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning apparatus 33a and the second In the case of winning the jackpot in the second variation display based on the ball entering the starting prize winning device 33b, it is easier for the player to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (“4RS” is selected in the jackpot in the second variation display). not selected, and the selection ratio of "15RS" is increasing). For this reason, the player thinks that he/she wants to win the big win state in the second variation display if possible. However, for example, in a state where both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended (in the normal mode of this example, they are basically alternately suspended), the suspended display of the first variable display On the other hand, when the prefetch pending icon 472 that greatly increases the expectation of the jackpot state is derived, it is disappointing that the prefetch pending icon 472 should have been derived for the pending display of the second variation display. It is feared that Furthermore, depending on the player, the degree of expectation for the big win displayed in the first variation display from which the look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived is increased, while the degree of expectation for the big win in the second variation display from which the look-ahead pending icon 472 is not derived is relatively lowered. It is feared that people will give the impression that they have done so. In this case, the negative image of the prefetching suspension icon 472 becomes stronger, and as a result, there is a possibility that interest may be lost.

In this regard, as described above, even after the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the predetermined variable display, the variable display targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed from the predetermined variable display to other , even if the prefetching pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the first variable display, the target of the prefetching pending icon 472 is changed from the first variable display to the second variable display. You can have expectations of what you can do. Therefore, the above concern can be dispelled.

Furthermore, for example, even if the prefetching suspension icon 472 is derived corresponding to the second variable display, there is a possibility that the target of the prefetching suspension icon 472 is changed to the first variable display, so the game performance is tense. can make you feel. For example, when the desired pending icon 471 (for example, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variable display) is set as the prefetch pending icon 472, the user wants the corresponding variable display to be digested without changing the derivation target. In the same way, you can enthusiastically confirm and enjoy the behavior of the pending display. In addition, if a predetermined condition is cleared, it is possible to add a game feature such as exemption from such unfavorable changes for the player, thereby increasing the points for adding excitement to the game. If the derivation target of the look-ahead pending icon 472 does not change during the predetermined number of times of variable display, it is configured so that it does not change thereafter, or a predetermined effect is derived as a result of a predetermined lottery. It may also be configured such that, when the icon 472 is set to be derived, the predetermined look-ahead suspension icon 472 is prohibited from being changed.

In addition, although a plurality of patterns are prepared for the mode of the prefetching pending icon 472, when the variable display of the target of the prefetching pending icon 472 is changed, the prefetching pending icon 472 remains in the form of the prefetching pending icon 472 before the change. 472 is configured to be changed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, by moving the character object 474 displayed in combination with a predetermined base object 473 (treasure box) to another base object 473 (treasure box), the prefetch pending icon 472 This indicates that the change display of the target of has been changed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the target of the prefetching pending icon 472 is changed, the state of the prefetching pending icon 472 before the change and the state of the prefetching pending icon 472 after the change are the same. The fact that the look-ahead pending icon 472 corresponding to the variable display has been changed to correspond to another variable display rather than to the predetermined variable display is thus suggested by the look-ahead pending icon 472. It is possible to make it easier to understand that the content to be displayed is not about the predetermined variable display, but about the different variable display.

Moreover, even if the variable display of the target of the prefetching suspension icon 472 is changed, it can be recognized that the aspect of the prefetching suspension icon 472 and, by extension, the suggestive content are followed. That is, when the target of the look-ahead pending icon 472 that increases the expectation of a big win is changed from the first variable display to the second variable display, the expectation of the first variable display is lowered. Therefore, if the suggestive content (big hit expectation) of the look-ahead pending icon 472 derived for the first variable display is not ensured, there is a concern that the player will have a sense of unease and distrust.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the variable display targeted by the prefetching pending icon 472 is changed, the prefetching pending icon 472 (character object 474) in the same mode is derived. However, when viewed as a whole, the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461, the effects (such as the degree of expectation for a big hit) resulting from the derivation of the prefetch pending icon 472 are different. It can be assumed that there is no Therefore, for example, not only is the variable display targeted by the prefetching pending icon 472 changed, but also the aspect of the prefetching pending icon 472 is changed. Where has the value of the suggestive contents of the prefetching pending icon 472 changed, and the effect of the prefetching pending icon 472 on the variable display that was targeted before the change (such as the degree of expectation for the big win) has gone? It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player has a sense of distrust or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, the mode of the prefetching pending icon 472 can be changed after the variable display targeted for the prefetching pending icon 472 is changed. In other words, once the appearance of the prefetching suspension icon 472 before the change is followed, the understanding of the fact that the appearance of the prefetching suspension icon 472 has been changed is facilitated and distrust is suppressed. By giving the possibility that the aspect of 472 changes, it is possible to expect the further step-up of the prefetch pending icon 472 even after the variable display targeted for the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed.

Also, when the variation information included in the preceding command sent from the main controller 261 to the sub-controller 262 is stored in a predetermined pending area of the pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262, the variable information In other words, settings regarding the pending icon 471 corresponding to the newly suspended variable display are also made. In this embodiment, at this point, the flow from when the pending icon 471 is displayed in the pending corresponding area 463 of the pending display area 461 to when it is shifted to the execution corresponding area 462 and is digested is determined to some extent.

More specifically, each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area is provided with a pending effect counter that indicates the status of the pending icon 471 . Then, when the variation information included in the preceding command is stored in a predetermined reservation area, and when "1" is set for the reservation effect counter of the reservation area, as shown in FIG. A prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the corresponding pending corresponding area 463 of the pending display area 461, and after being shifted to the execution corresponding area 462, it is digested. Although the mode of the prefetching pending icon 472 may change (the mode rank is stepped up) on the way, the prefetching pending icon 472 should not change to the default pending icon 471 midway through. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 55, when "2" is set for the pending effect counter, there is a possibility of deriving the look-ahead pending icon 472, but the pending icon 471 corresponding to the newly suspended variable display cannot be added. It is not derived at the timing of display. However, the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 is configured to be determined based on the variation information. After that, when "3" is set for the holding effect counter of the holding area in which the change information is newly stored, the holding effect counter is displayed as the holding icon 471 corresponding to the change information stored in the holding area. A look-ahead pending icon 472 having the same mode as that stored in the execution rank storage area of the pending area set to "2" is derived, and "3" is set to the pending effect counter in the next shift process. A look-ahead pending icon 472 (character object 474) derived corresponding to the pending pending area moves to become a pending icon 471 corresponding to the pending area to which "2" is set in the pending effect counter. (The default pending icon 471 of the preceding pending corresponding area 463 and the prefetch pending icon 472 of the succeeding pending corresponding area 463 are replaced).

As described above, when the prefetching pending icon 472 does not exist in the pending display area 461 and the pending icon 471 is newly derived for the pending display area 461, the pending icon 471 is not the prefetching pending icon 472. Even if not, at a later timing, it is possible to derive an effect (pre-retention movement effect) in which the suspension icon 471 becomes the prefetch suspension icon 472 . As a result, the player's expectation that there may still be a chance to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 can be sustained until the variable display corresponding to the default pending icon 471 is executed, and the pending icon 471 By making it possible to derive the look-ahead pending icon 472 that suggests the content of the corresponding variable display, it is possible to further achieve the effect of improving interest.

Further, as described above, even if it is possible to change the variable display targeted by the prefetching suspension icon 472, the content of the variable display to be changed is not the suggested content (mode rank) of the prefetching suspension icon 472. It has to match. In other words, for example, instead of the default pending icon 471 corresponding to the change information already stored in the predetermined pending area of the pending information storage area, the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived later (in the base object 473 displaying only the treasure chest) If the character object 474 is to be displayed additionally), the variation information is referenced (again) to determine whether the content is worthy of deriving the prefetching suspension icon 472, and a negative determination is made. In that case, derivation of the prefetch pending icon 472 is canceled, or change information stored in other pending areas of the pending information storage area is also found worthy of deriving the prefetch pending icon 472. There is a concern that the process when the variable display is suspended (variable information is stored) will become enormous, such as repeating the process of confirming the contents until the time.

In this regard, by checking the "reservation flag" that can be set when the variation information is stored, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the variation information that can lead to the prefetch suspension icon 472 is stored. . Therefore, since it is not necessary to continue searching for variation information worthy of blindly deriving the prefetching suspension icon 472, in the configuration in which it is decided to perform the prefetching suspension icon 472 later, the process when it is determined becomes complicated, and depending on the situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a processing failure or the like is caused.

Further, whether or not to turn on the release flag is determined by lottery (reservation release lottery process). The lottery is performed if there is a reservation area with the reservation flag turned on when the change information is stored in the reservation information storage area, and the probability is higher than the reservation flag etc. is set to ON. is set to on. Therefore, even if the change information is newly stored in the reservation information storage area after the reservation flag is set, the reservation icon 471 corresponding to the change information for which the reservation flag is set is always displayed regardless of the content of the change information. , the derivation of the prefetch pending icon 472 can be avoided. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which, although the reserve flag is set to ON, the probability that the release flag is set to ON after that is low, and the "pre-hold movement effect" is hardly derived. As a result, it is possible to avoid too many, too few, or too unambiguous derivation opportunities for the "movement effect before holding". As a result, it is possible to improve performance and game performance.

Also, for example, before and after switching from the probability variable mode with the upper limit until the variable display is performed 100 times to the normal mode, both the variable display performed in the variable probability mode and the variable display performed in the normal mode are suspended. In the pending display area 461, the pending icon 471 that is stored in the variable probability mode and the pending icon 471 that is completed in the normal mode may be mixed. In this embodiment, in the pending display area 461, so that the boundary between the pending icon 471 digested in the variable probability mode and the pending icon 471 digested in the normal mode is easy to understand, so that the ST borderline 465 is displayed (see FIG. 52(d)).

However, the pending icon 471 scheduled to be executed in the variable probability mode and the scheduled pending icon 471 to be executed in the normal mode do not change the mode. For this reason, for example, when the mode of the pending icon 471 is changed to teach the difference in the game to be executed, the mode pattern of the pending icon 471 becomes complicated (including the mode of the prefetching pending icon 472) , it becomes difficult to understand the corresponding relationship with various effects, etc.). Furthermore, a jackpot state occurs in a state in which both the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable display scheduled to be performed in the variable probability mode and the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable display scheduled to be performed in the normal game mode are displayed. In this case, after the end of the jackpot state, the correspondence relationship between the game mode and the mode of the reserved icon 471 related to the game mode changes. You can avoid situations like this. Therefore, the game can be smoothly progressed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, although the prediction pending icon 472 is derived in the pending display area 461, the expectation of the jackpot increases, but the probability of the jackpot is different (10 times) between the normal mode and the variable mode, so the prediction pending icon 472 is derived in the variable probability mode, the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that derived in the normal mode (as a result, the value of the look-ahead pending icon 472 derived in the variable probability mode is higher). Therefore, in a state in which both the pending icon 471 digested in the probability variable mode and the pending icon 471 digested in the normal mode are displayed, the pending icon 471 digested in the normal mode is the prefetch pending icon 472 There is a concern that the player may feel that "it would have been better if the target of the look-ahead suspension icon 472 was a little earlier".

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the reservation flag is set to ON (reservation effect counter = 2) variation information corresponds to the last four variation display of the probability variation mode, and the variation display is digested, if the cancellation flag (holding effect counter = 3) is set to ON in the fluctuation information of the fluctuation display performed in the normal mode, the look-ahead holding icon 472 is displayed in the probability variable mode from the place corresponding to the normal mode will move to the corresponding location. Therefore, when the probability variable mode is about to end, even after the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived as the pending icon 471 digested in the normal mode instead of the pending icon 471 digested in the probability variable mode, the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 There is a possibility that it will be changed to a variable display that is digested in the variable mode. As a result, when the probability variable mode is about to end, even if the prefetch pending icon 472 is not derived as the pending icon 471 digested in the probability variable mode, the default pending icon 471 digested in the probability variable mode is still prefetch pending It is possible to have a hope that the icon 472 will be changed to the icon 472, and the problem that the prefetching pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the normal mode will not only be resolved, but also the prefetching pending icon Derivation of 472 corresponding to the normal mode can be favorably perceived as a step up until the pending icon 471 digested in the variable probability mode is changed to the prefetch pending icon 472 . For this reason, it is possible to simply attach the significance that "the derivation of the prefetch pending icon 472" is "preferable for the player". As a result, the negative aspects of deriving the prefetching suspension icon 472 can be eliminated, and by configuring the prefetching suspension icon 472 to be derivable, the interest can be improved more reliably.

In addition, in a state where both the pending icon 471 digested in the variable probability mode and the pending icon 471 digested in the normal mode are displayed, the pending icon 471 digested in the variable probability mode is derived a prefetch pending icon 472 In order to avoid the situation that the prefetching pending icon 472 is derived from the pending icon 471 digested in the normal mode, the pending icon 471 digested in the probability variable mode and the pending icon 471 digested in the normal mode In the state where both the pending icon 471 and the pending icon 471 are displayed, there is no need to perform control (prohibition processing) for not deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 for the pending icon 471 that is digested in the normal mode. Therefore, it contributes to the improvement of game performance and performance, such as intentionally crushing the performance opportunity of deriving the prefetching suspension icon 472 with respect to the suspension icon 471 digested in the normal mode, and increasing the amount of processing for that purpose. Do not avoid vicious circles.

Furthermore, only by turning on the reservation flag corresponding to the variation information of the variable display performed in the fixed variable mode, the reservation icon 471 corresponding to the variation information is not changed to the prefetch reservation icon 472, and the reservation By suspending the variation information for which the release flag is set to ON before the variation information for which the flag is set to ON is digested, the suspension icon 471 corresponding to the variation information for which the reservation flag is set to ON is prefetched and suspended. It will be changed to icon 472 . Therefore, in spite of the fact that the variable probability mode will end soon, when the prefetching pending icon 472 is not derived as the pending icon 471 to be digested in the variable probability mode, the desire to play the game to further suspend the variable display is enhanced. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 56, when "4" is set for the suspension effect counter corresponding to the predetermined variation information stored in the suspension information storage area (pre-change flag is set to ON), the variation information Although the look-ahead suspension icon 472 is displayed in response to , after that, "5" was set for the suspension effect counter in response to the change information newly stored in the suspension information storage area (the change destination flag is turned on). set), at the timing of the next shift, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information of the pending effect counter "4" is changed from the prefetch pending icon 472 to the default pending icon 471.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the change information of the pending effect counter "4" is initially derived in the default mode, but at the timing of the shift (via the transition effect), the pending effect counter "5" is changed to the form of the prefetch hold icon 472 displayed as the hold icon 471 corresponding to the change information (the prefetch hold icon 472 of the preceding hold corresponding area 463 and the default hold icon 471 of the subsequent hold corresponding area 463 is replaced).

As described above, even if the newly derived pending icon 471 for the pending display area 461 is not the prefetch pending icon 472, the default pending icon 471 is already present in the pending display area 461 at a later timing. It is possible to derive an effect (post-suspend move effect) such that it is exchanged with the prefetch suspension icon 472 that is being held. As a result, it is possible to create more situations where the target of the prefetching suspension icon 472 may be changed (adding a game element such as not knowing where the prefetching suspension icon 472 will go), and tension in the progress of the game. It is possible to provide a sense of well-being and suppress fatigue. As a result, by making it possible to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 as an effect of suggesting the content of the variable display corresponding to the pending icon 471, it is possible to further achieve the effect of improving interest. In addition, since the plurality of pending icons 471 are interlocked, for example, compared to the case where each of the plurality of pending icons 471 changes the mode of the pending icon 471 independently, it is possible to improve the performance. .

In addition, in the “post-hold movement effect”, among the hold icons 471 displayed in the hold display area 461, the prefetch hold icon 472 derived earlier is changed to the default hold icon derived later. 471 is replaced with the effect, if the rank of the aspect of the previously derived prefetching suspension icon 472 (the prefetching suspension icon 472 derived by setting the pre-change flag to ON) is too high, the rank The to-be-changed flag cannot be set until the matching change information is stored pending.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state rank of the prefetching suspension icon 472 of the pre-change flag is at most “2” (there are “1” to “5” as state ranks, and the larger the number, the more the tank is high), it is possible to suppress such concerns, and to avoid a situation in which opportunities for presentation are extremely reduced. Furthermore, since the derived mode rank is not high and the conditions for setting the pre-change flag are limited to some extent, the change destination flag is not set to ON, and the pre-change flag corresponds to the variation information for which the pre-change flag is set to ON. Even if the variable display is terminated (the variable display is performed while the prefetching suspension icon 472 is displayed in the execution corresponding area 462), the game can be progressed without giving a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to the variation display (variation information) that may cause a big win state, the pre-change flag is not set to ON ("4" is set to the pending effect counter). is configured so that there is no That is, for example, although the prefetch pending icon 472 derived corresponding to a predetermined variable display is changed so as to correspond to a later pending variable display, the prefetch pending icon 472 is originally The credibility of the lookahead pending icon 472 is such that a big win state occurs in the derived predetermined variation display (furthermore, a big win state does not occur in the variable display corresponding to the lookahead pending icon 472 after change). There is a possibility that it will drop significantly. In this regard, when setting the pre-change flag, it is necessary to confirm that the variation information before the target of the look-ahead pending icon 472 is changed does not win the winning lottery ("lost"). Therefore, the above concerns can be dispelled.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if it is a variable display that becomes "out", in response to the variable display (variable information) that is the last four times of the probability variable mode, the pre-change flag is not set to ON ( It is configured so that "4" is not set in the pending effect counter. In other words, for the player, as much as possible, despite the fact that the look-ahead pending icon 472 should be displayed in response to the variable probability mode, the look-ahead pending icon 472 escapes from the range of the variable probability mode to the outside of the range (normal mode). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a significant decrease in interest due to the derivation of a bitter effect such as being overwhelmed.

As shown in FIG. 57, when "6" is set for the suspension effect counter corresponding to the predetermined variation information stored in the suspension information storage area (the first replacement flag is set to ON), After that, when "7" is set for the suspension effect counter (the second replacement flag is turned on) corresponding to the variation information newly stored in the suspension information storage area, at the timing of the next shift , an effect (suspension exchange effect) is performed in which the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the variation information of the pending effect counter "6" and the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the variation information of the pending effect counter "7" are exchanged. ing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects related to the pending icon 471 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the prefetch pending icon 472 increases in the pending display area 461 is based on the fact that the variable display is suspended (the sub-control device 262 receives the advance command). It is only the timing to make it. Therefore, by limiting the timing at which the prefetching suspension icon 472 is newly derived, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the prefetching suspension icon 472 has been derived. Therefore, for example, when only the default pending icon 471 is displayed, the predetermined pending icon 471 suddenly changes to the prefetch pending icon 472 even though it is not the time to increase the pending icon 471. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect using the hold icon 471 is confusing and difficult to understand (it is difficult for the player to get involved), compared to the configuration that causes the above. Further, if the number of pending icons 471 does not increase, the number of prefetching pending icons 472 also does not increase, so it is possible to further increase the willingness to increase the number of pending icons 471 (start winning).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when performing a prefetch target change effect (pre-hold movement effect, post-hold move effect, hold exchange effect) for changing the variable display targeted by the prefetch hold icon 472, the prefetch It is configured to derive a “connecting effect” that visualizes the process (in the middle) of changing the variable display targeted by the pending icon 472 . In other words, the look-ahead pending icon 472 is a combination of a character object 474 and a "treasure box" base object 473, and a display (animation) is performed in which the character object 474 moves to another "treasure box". , it is relatively easy to recognize that the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 has been changed.

Therefore, for example, the character object 474 of the prefetch pending icon 472 that has been derived corresponding to the predetermined variable display suddenly disappears, and the lost character object 474 is suddenly derived for another pending icon 471. In this case, there is a concern that the previous prefetching suspension icon 472 and the subsequent prefetching suspension icon 472 may be regarded as independent (not related at all). In particular, even if there is a slight time lag between the deletion of the character object 474 of the prefetch pending icon 472 and the derivation of the character object 474 to the pending icon 471 that later becomes the prefetch pending icon 472, When the timing of erasing the character object 474 of the prefetching pending icon 472 is later than the timing of deriving the character object 474 to the pending icon 471 that later becomes the prefetching pending icon 472 (there is a period of overlapping ), such concerns are made more pronounced.

On the other hand, by performing a connection effect, the line of sight of the player can be guided from the change source hold icon 471, in which the target of the look-ahead hold icon 472 is changed, to the change destination hold icon 471. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the target of the prefetching suspension icon 472 is changed. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not notice that the target of the prefetch suspension icon 472 has been changed.

In addition, in the pending display area 461 in which the pending icon 471 is displayed, not only the pending corresponding area 463 from which the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information for which the corresponding variation display has not yet been performed is derived, but also the corresponding variation An execution correspondence area 462 is provided from which a pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information whose display is being executed is derived. Therefore, in the pending display area 461, for example, when the corresponding pending icon 471 is changed to the prefetch pending icon 472 (the character object 474 moves) immediately before the corresponding variable display is executed, the player It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to confirm that (substantially unable to confirm). In addition, at the time of the variable display (during the variable display), it is possible to confirm whether or not the prefetching suspension icon 472 has been derived corresponding to the variable display, and the mode (suggestion content) of the prefetching suspension icon 472. By combining the content of the prefetch pending icon 472 and the effect of the variable display, it is possible to make various guesses and enjoy the variable display even more.

In addition, apart from the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42, no effect or the like is performed. A pending display 46a and a second pending display 46b are provided. For this reason, even if various effects are performed in the pending display area 461 and a scene occurs in which the correspondence between the pending icon 471 and the pending variable display becomes somewhat difficult to understand, the first pending display device 46a, In addition, it is possible to reliably grasp whether or not the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is suspended by the second suspension display device 46b. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of performance and the performance of the pending icon 471 in the pending display area 461 .

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment will be described below. In the second embodiment, in a state where the prefetching pending icon 472 with the character object 474 is already displayed in the pending display area 461, it is decided to derive the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the newly suspended variable display. It is configured to determine whether or not to derive the prefetching suspension icon 472 according to the distance from the prefetching suspension icon 472 previously displayed when the icon 472 is displayed. That is, even if it is decided to derive the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the newly suspended variable display, the prefetching pending icon 472 is immediately replaced (the pending icon corresponding to the newly suspended variable display As for 471, there is a case where the derivation is not performed (waiting) for the time being. The characteristic portions will be mainly described below.

Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted, and the same member names and member numbers will be used. In the second embodiment, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b constitute variable display means, and the decorative pattern display device 42 constitutes effect display means.

Here, the pending icon setting process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, steps S4104 and steps S4106 to S4109 of the pending information storage process (FIG. 35) are omitted.

First, in step S7101, the values of various counters related to the pending effect (holding icon 471), which will be described later in detail, are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the holding area (new storage holding area) in which the change information is newly stored in the holding information storage area. ). Among the information such as the values of various counters related to the pending effect (holding icon 471) and various flags to be described later, those stored in the pending information storage area together with the corresponding variation information are stored in the pending information storage area. Shifted with the variation information in the process. Hereinafter, the information regarding the pending effect stored in the pending information storage area will be described as information included in the variation information, that is, the variation information.

In the subsequent step S7102, it is determined whether or not the variation information reserved in the new storage reservation area corresponds to a "jackpot". If a negative determination is made in step S7102, it is determined in step S7103 whether or not the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag is set to ON.

The proxy request flag is set to ON when it has been determined (the right has been granted) to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 in response to predetermined variation information, but the derivation is not yet performed. Furthermore, if the predetermined variation information corresponds to a "jackpot", a "win proxy request flag" is set to ON, and if the predetermined variation information corresponds to a "loss", a "loss proxy request flag" is set. ” is set to ON. Also, the proxy request flag is provided separately from the pending information storage area. In the present embodiment, the proxy request flag constitutes standby state storage means, and processing for setting the proxy request flag to ON corresponds to standby state storage processing.

If a negative determination is made in step S7103, it is determined in step S7104 whether or not the proxy flag is set to ON in any of the pending areas of the pending information storage area.

The proxy flag is provided in each reserved area of the reserved information storage area, and when the shift processing of the data in the reserved information storage area is performed, the set state of the proxy flag is similarly shifted. Then, it was decided (the right was granted) to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the predetermined variation information, but not as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined variation information, but another variation If the information (variation information retained after the predetermined variation information) is tentatively derived as the retention icon 471, the proxy flag of the retention area in which the different variation information is stored is turned on. is set. As a result, it is possible to determine that the hold icon 471 corresponding to the different variation information is deriving the prefetch hold icon 472 corresponding to the predetermined variation information by proxy.

In addition, in step S7104, in order to avoid the need to check the proxy flags of all the reservation areas in which the variation information is stored, a proxy check flag that is set to ON when the proxy flag is set to ON is provided. good too.

If a negative determination is made in step S7104, in step S7105, a reservation prefetch effect lottery process for determining whether or not to grant the right to derive the prefetch reservation icon 472 is performed. More specifically, in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262, a pending prefetch effect lottery counter (in this example, 0 to 18 A loop counter) and a pending prefetch effect lottery table that stores the value of the pending prefetch effect lottery counter that gives (won) the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 is provided.

The value of the pending look-ahead effect lottery counter is acquired in step S7101 and stored in the new storage pending area. As a reserve look-ahead effect lottery table, the change information stored in the new storage reservation area is ``for when dealing with a big hit'', ``for when dealing with a reach outside the front and back'', and ``for a reach other than the front and back. There are three types of "for when". As shown in FIG. 59, in this embodiment, if the variation information stored in the new storage reservation area corresponds to a reach other than front and rear deviation, the probability of reaching the reach is less than half (9/19). is given the right to derive the prefetching hold icon 472, and when it corresponds to the jackpot and the front-back reach, the pre-reading hold icon 472 has a considerably higher probability (16/19) than the reach other than the front-back end. The right to out-license is granted.

After step S7105, in step S7106, it is determined whether or not the player has won the pending prefetch effect lottery process (whether or not the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 has been granted).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7106, it is determined in step S7107 whether or not the character flag is set to ON in any of the pending areas of the pending information storage area.

A character flag is provided in each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area, and when the data in the pending information storage area is shifted, the set state of the character flag is similarly shifted. . Then, when the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the predetermined variable information, the character flag of the pending area in which the predetermined variable information is stored is turned on. Thereby, it is possible to determine that the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the predetermined variation information.

In step S7107, the character check flag that is set to ON when the character flag is set to ON is stored in the reservation information so that it is not necessary to check the character flags of all the reservation areas in which the variation information is stored. It may be provided separately from the area.

If a negative determination is made in step S7107, that is, the prefetch pending icon 472 is not derived in the pending display area 461 (and as described above, the proxy request flag is not turned on, and the pending information If there is no reserved area with the proxy flag turned on in the storage area either), the character flag of the new storage reserved area is set to ON in step S7108.

In step S7109, character pattern setting processing for setting the type of the prefetch pending icon 472 (the pattern of the character object 474) is performed. That is, based on the value of the character determination counter acquired in step S7101 and stored in the new storage reservation area, a character determination table (for example, for winning, before and after) stores the correspondence between the value and the character pattern. (prepared for out-reach and others) to determine the character pattern and store its contents in the new storage reservation area. The character pattern information is also shifted together with other variable information by the data shift processing of the reserved information storage area.

In step S7110, with respect to the preceding position counter indicating where the variation information including the information in which the character flag is set to ON exists in the execution area or the suspension area of the suspension information storage area, the suspended variation display is displayed. Sets the value of the variable pending counter Nd indicating the number. In addition, the preceding position counter is configured to take a value of "-1 to 8", "0" indicates that it is in the execution area, "1 to 8" indicates that it is in each reservation area, "-1" indicates not present.

Further, in step S7111, the variation information including the information with the character flag set to ON (execution area or reservation area in which is stored) and the predetermined variation information that is retained thereafter (retention area in which is stored) "1" is set in a first interval counter as a first interval storage means for grasping the interval (first interval) between . The first interval counter is configured to take a value of "0 to 7", "1 to 7" indicating that there is a corresponding interval, and "0" indicating that the character flag is set to ON. Indicates that the variable information containing the information is no longer present.

After that, in the pending icon display process of step S7136, based on the fact that the character flag of the new storage pending area is set to ON, step S7109 After performing the process of displaying the prefetching suspension icon 472 of the pattern determined in , this process ends.

If the determination in step S7107 is affirmative, that is, if the prefetching pending icon 472 has already been derived in the pending display area 461, then in step S7112 it is determined whether or not to exercise the right to derive the prefetching pending icon 472. The first appearance lottery process of is performed. In other words, if the prefetching pending icon 472 is not derived in the pending display area 461, or is not scheduled to be derived, the right to derive the prefetching pending icon 472 is unconditionally exercised as in step S7108. On the other hand, if there are likely to be a plurality of prefetching pending icons 472 derived in the pending display area 461, the right to derive the prefetching pending icon 472 is granted if the winning is not made in the first appearing lottery process. It is structured so that it cannot be exercised.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the value of the first interval counter, i.e., the hold area or execution The probability of exercising the right to derive the look-ahead pending icon 472 is different depending on the distance between the area and the new storage pending area.

More specifically, in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262, an appearance lottery counter (in this example, a loop counter of 0 to 9) and the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 are exercised (winning). An appearing lottery table is provided for storing the value of the appearing lottery counter. The value of the appearing lottery counter is acquired in step S7101 and stored in the new storage reservation area. As the appearance lottery table, "for when the value of the first interval counter is 2", "for when it is 3", "for when it is 4", "for when it is 5", and "for 6 or more" are provided. ing. As shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, when the value of the first interval counter is "2", the right is exercised with a probability of 1/10, and when the value of the first interval counter is "3", the right is exercised with a probability of 2/10 when the value of the first interval counter is "4", and the right is exercised with a probability of 5/10 when the value of the first interval counter is "5". , the right is exercised with a probability of 6/10, and when the value of the first interval counter is "6 or more", the right is exercised with a probability of 9/10. Further, if the value of the first interval counter is "1", the right to derive the lookahead pending icon 472 is not exercised. That is, the shorter the interval from the preceding prefetching pending icon 472, the more difficult it is to derive the following prefetching pending icon 472. FIG. In addition, when the value of the first interval counter is '0', that is, when the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 has already been digested, the right is exercised with a probability of 100%. there is

After step S7112, in step S7113, it is determined whether or not the player has won the first appearance lottery process (whether or not the right to derive the prefetching pending icon 472 is exercised). If the determination in step S7113 is affirmative, that is, if the change information is stored in the new storage reservation area, and at that stage it is decided to exercise the right to derive the prefetching reservation icon 472, the above step The flow advances to S7108 to turn on the character flag of the new storage reservation area.

Subsequently, in step S7109, the pattern of the prefetch pending icon 472 is determined and stored. In this embodiment, the character flag is set to ON in the new storage reservation area regardless of whether the prefetching reservation icon 472 is already displayed in the reservation display area 461 or not displayed. In some cases, a common character determination table is referred to, but the selection rate of the character to be selected may be determined by referring to a different table. Based on the information of the prefetching suspension icon 472 , for example, the character pattern may be determined so as not to overlap with the prefetching suspension icon 472 .

Furthermore, in step S7110, the value of the change holding counter Nd is set in the preceding position counter. Here, since the value set corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 already displayed in advance is set in the preceding position counter, it is overwritten. In addition, in step S7111, "1" is set (overwritten) to the first interval counter.

After that, in the pending icon display process of step S7136, based on the fact that the character flag of the new storage pending area is set to ON, step S7109 After performing the process of displaying the prefetching suspension icon 472 of the pattern determined in , this process ends. That is, when the determination in step S7113 is affirmative, the character flags of a plurality of areas are set to ON in the suspension information storage area, and the prefetch suspension icon 472 is displayed in a plurality of areas of the suspension display area 461. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S7113, then in step S7114 the return flag of the new storage reserved area is set to ON.

The feedback flag is provided in each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area, and when the shift processing of the data in the pending information storage area is performed, the set state of the feedback flag is similarly shifted. . Then, when the change information is newly stored in the reservation area (new storage reservation area), it was decided (the right was granted) to derive the look-ahead reservation icon 472 corresponding to the change information. As for the pending icon 471 corresponding to the change information, when it is decided not to exercise the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 for the time being, the return flag of the new storage pending area is set to ON. .

In the subsequent step S7115, the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag is set to ON. In other words, when the change information is stored in the new storage reservation area, although the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 has been obtained, the prefetch pending icon can be derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable information. Since it was not possible to (exercise the right), a winning proxy request flag or The deviating proxy request flag is turned on.

In subsequent step S7116, character pattern setting processing for setting the type of the prefetch pending icon 472 (the pattern of the character object 474) is performed. In other words, even if the look-ahead pending icon 472 is not derived immediately, the value of the character determining counter stored in the new storage pending area is stored in correspondence with the character pattern. A determination table (for example, prepared for hit, front-back miss reach, and other miss) is referred to determine a character pattern, and its contents are stored in a new storage reservation area. In addition, the character determination table referred to in step S7116 is different from the one referred to in step S7109, and the character object 474 does not overlap the preceding prefetch pending icon 472, or It becomes hard to be covered. In addition, for example, referring to the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472, it may be constructed so that the character never suffers, or it may be constructed so that a character with a higher degree of expectation for a big win is more likely to be selected. .

Furthermore, in step S7117, the change information including the information with the feedback flag set to ON (execution area or holding area storing the information) and the holding area storing the predetermined change information (holding area) ) is set to "1" in a second interval counter as a second interval storage means for grasping the interval (second interval). It should be noted that the second interval counter is configured to take a value of "0 to 7", where "1 to 7" indicates that there is a corresponding interval, and "0" causes the prefetch pending icon 472 to be derived. Variation information to which rights are assigned (reservation corresponding area 463 or execution corresponding area 462 of reservation display area 461 corresponding to reservation area or execution area in which is stored) and prefetching reservation icon 472 derived based on the right (holding correspondence area 463 or execution correspondence area 462 of reservation display area 461) match.

In the subsequent step S7118, the value of the variable suspension counter Nd is set for the feedback position counter indicating which of the suspension area and the execution area of the suspension information storage area the feedback flag is set to ON. The feedback position counter is configured to take a value of "-1 to 8", where "0" indicates that it is in the execution area, "1 to 8" indicates that it is in each reservation area, "-1" indicates not present.

After step S7118, in the pending icon display process of step S7136, based on the fact that the return flag of the new storage pending area is set to ON, the pending corresponding area 463 of the pending display area 461 corresponding to the new storage pending area , the processing for displaying the default pending icon 471 is performed, and then this processing ends.

In this embodiment, each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area takes a value of "0 to 3", and the value is used as a derivation status storage means to indicate the derivation status of the prefetching suspension icon 472. A production counter is provided. That is, in the present embodiment, the character flag, the proxy flag, and the return flag are not provided individually, but by setting the value of the pending effect counter to "1", indicating that the character flag is on, Setting the value of the pending effect counter to "2" indicates that the return flag is on, and setting the value of the pending effect counter to "3" indicates that the proxy flag is on. Further, setting the value of the pending effect counter to "0" indicates that all of these flags are turned off.

In addition, if the determination in step S7103 is affirmative, that is, in a state in which the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 is not exercised, it waits for the appearance of variation information that instead derives the prefetch pending icon 472 based on the right. If the winning proxy request flag or the missing proxy request flag indicating that the state is set to ON, in step S7119, it is determined whether or not to exercise the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 by proxy. A second appearance lottery process to determine is performed.

The second appearance lottery process in step S7119 is basically the same as the first appearance lottery process in step S12. Based on the value of the lottery counter, the change information is stored in the pending information storage area earlier than the change information in the pending corresponding area 463 of the pending display area 461 corresponding to the new storage pending area, and the prefetch pending icon 472 is present. ( This is a process of determining whether or not to derive by proxy as if the prefetching suspension icon 472 was suspended just now.

After step S7119, in step S7120, it is determined whether or not the player has won the second appearance lottery process. If the determination in step S7120 is affirmative, in step S7121 the proxy flag of the new storage reservation area is set to ON.

In the following step S7122, the position of the prefetching pending icon 472 (proxy pending icon) derived by proxy (the pending area of the pending information storage area in which the variation information acting as a derivation of the prefetching pending icon 472 is stored is grasped) set the value of the variation pending counter Nd to the trailing position counter indicating possible information). The trailing position counter is configured to take a value of "0 to 8", "0" indicating being in the execution area and "1 to 8" indicating being in each reserve area.

In the subsequent step S7123, the winning proxy request flag or the missing proxy request flag that is set to ON in the reservation area in which the return flag is set to ON is turned off.

In the subsequent step S7124, the information (character pattern information, already determined in step S7116) of the look-ahead pending icon 472 stored in the pending area where the return flag is set to ON is moved to the new storage pending area. character pattern information transfer processing (copy the character pattern information to the new storage reservation area and erase the character pattern information in the original reservation area).

After that, in step S7125, a scenario lottery process (specific effect lottery process) for determining whether or not to perform a scenario effect as a specific effect that causes the character object 474 of the prefetch pending icon 472 to behave more complicatedly is performed. More specifically, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 stores a scenario lottery counter for determining whether or not to perform a scenario effect, and a value of the scenario lottery counter for performing the scenario effect (winning). A scenario lottery table is provided. For example, if the change information stored in the holding area where the return flag is set to ON corresponds to a jackpot, the probability of winning is 60%, and if it corresponds to the front and back reach, the probability is 30%. , and if it corresponds to reach other than front and back, it may be configured not to win.

However, the scenario effect of this embodiment is a display mode in which the character object 474 of the preceding prefetching suspension icon 472 and the character object 474 of the subsequent deputy prefetching suspension icon 472 are interlocked. For this reason, in the scenario lottery, first, it is confirmed that the first interval counter is not "0" (the preceding position counter is not "-1"), and then the scenario lottery is conducted (the preceding character must exist). scenario lottery is not performed).

After step S7125, in step S7126, it is determined whether or not the scenario lottery has been won. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7126, in step S7127 a scenario pattern is determined, and scenario pattern setting processing as specific effect lottery processing for storing the content thereof is performed. More specifically, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 stores a scenario pattern determination counter for determining scenario patterns, and a scenario pattern determination table that stores the correspondence between the values of the scenario pattern determination counter and the scenario patterns. is provided.

In the scenario production of this embodiment, a plurality of character objects 474 including the preceding character object 474 and the latter character object 474 cooperate to produce the production, and the return flag is set to ON and stored in the reserved area. It is intended to increase the expectation of a big hit of the pending icon 471 (prefetch pending icon 472) corresponding to the variation information. For example, as shown in FIGS. 68(b) to 68(f), in this embodiment, 5 patterns are set as scenario effects of the behavior of the character object 474. FIG. Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 68B is a pattern in which one of the preceding character object 474 and the succeeding character object 474 gives a present to the other (in the figure, the preceding character object 474 to the succeeding character object). be. Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 68(c) is a pattern in which the former character object 474 and the latter character object 474 fight and the winner remains. Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 68(d) is a pattern in which one of the preceding character object 474 and the latter character object 474 places the other on the shoulder. Pattern 4 shown in FIG. 68(e) is a pattern in which the number of character objects 474 is increased by one, and the former character object 474 and the latter character object 474 join hands. Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 68(f) is a pattern in which the number of character objects 474 is increased by one, and the first character object 474 and the second character object 474 place the character object 474 that has appeared on their shoulders.

Further, although the details will be described later, the trigger for starting the scenario is when the second interval counter reaches "0" and when the preceding position counter reaches "0". Accordingly, for the introductory portion of the scenario, the pattern of FIG. There is a pattern shown in FIG. 68(a-1).

Furthermore, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 is provided with first to fifth scenario flags indicating scenario patterns to be executed. Then, in step S7128 following step S7127, the scenario pattern determination table is referred to and the scenario flag corresponding to the scenario pattern determined based on the value of the scenario pattern determination counter is turned on as described above.

In addition, when the fourth scenario flag and the fifth scenario flag are set to ON, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to perform special display settings. For example, when the fourth scenario flag is set to ON, a plurality of continuous variable displays on the decorative pattern display device 42 are intentionally derived to produce effects that are related to each other (so-called "continuous notice" is performed). good too. That is, for each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area, a continuous announcement flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous announcement is derived is provided, and in the case shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the display mode of the continuous announcement is derived when the continuous announcement flags of the second to fourth reservation areas are set to ON and the corresponding variable display is derived. When the suspension look-ahead effect is performed, it is possible to grasp that the continuous advance notice will occur and how far from where to where it will be derived corresponding to the variable display. In addition, each time the variable display of the continuous notice is completed, the corresponding prefetch pending icon 472 (as well as the accompanying character object 474) is erased.

Further, for example, when the fifth scenario flag is set to ON, a display effect (combined variable display effect) in which a plurality of continuous variable displays in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42 are combined into one. is done. For example, for each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area, a combination variation flag is provided which is turned on when the fifth scenario flag is set to ON and it is determined that the combination variation display effect is to be derived. More specifically, in the case shown in FIG. 68 (f), the combined fluctuation flag of the second to fourth reservation areas is set to ON, and in the reservation display area 461, as straddling the three reservation corresponding areas 463 A prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed.

Also, in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42, a series of combined variable display effects are performed using three corresponding variable display times (for example, 4 seconds + 4 seconds + 10 seconds for a total of 18 seconds). In the combined variable display effect, decorative patterns are displayed in a small size or are erased, and basically, effects other than decorative patterns (moving images, etc.) are not stopped during the display. However, there may be a case where it seems to stop at an adjustment scene for extending or shortening the moving image of the combined variable display effect according to the total variable time.

Furthermore, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed as usual. In other words, if a player who understands the correspondence relationship between the stop mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and whether or not the jackpot will be won or the like visually recognizes the special display devices 43a and 43b, it corresponds to the combined variable display effect. It is possible to grasp which one of the plurality of variable displays has been used for the big win.

In addition, as a mode of the look-ahead pending icon 472 across a plurality of pending corresponding areas 463, when the fifth scenario flag is set to ON, even if the variation information for which the combined variation flag is set to ON is digested, The basic mode does not change, and in FIG. 68( f ), for example, the body shapes of the three people remain unchanged and continue to be displayed in the execution correspondence area 462 . However, the look-ahead suspending icon 472 may cause some action, or the color, shape, etc. of details may be changed to enhance the presentation. Incidentally, when the pending prefetch effect is performed, the execution correspondence area 462 is expanded to correspond to the large prefetch pending icon 472 shifted to the execution correspondence area 462 . In addition, when the look-ahead pending icon 472 across a plurality of pending-compatible areas 463 is shifted to the execution-compatible area 462, the mode changes (for example, in the pending-compatible area 463, robots (jackpot expectations are 90%, 70% , 50% of the robot) is derived, and in the execution correspondence area 462 an animation of its completion is derived).

Regarding "continuous notice", not only when the fourth scenario flag is set to ON, but also when storing hold information in the hold information storage area, continuous notice for determining whether to perform continuous notice A notice propriety determination table that acquires the value of the counter and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice, and is taken into consideration when deciding whether to perform continuous notice according to the fluctuation information, and It may be configured to appropriately perform by referring to a notice table that is taken into consideration when determining the mode of continuous notice. Further, in the present embodiment, the suspension look-ahead effect performed in the suspension display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42 when the fourth scenario flag and the fifth scenario flag are set to ON corresponds to the integrated suspension look-ahead effect.

After step S7128, or if a negative determination is made in step S7126, in the pending icon display process of step S7136, the new storage pending area is supported based on the fact that the proxy flag for the new storage pending area is set to ON. After executing the process of displaying the prefetching pending icon 472 as the pending prefetching effect corresponding to the pattern set in step S7124 in the pending corresponding area 463 of the pending display area 461, this process is terminated.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7120, that is, if it is determined not to exercise the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the newly stored variation information, in step S7129 the first 1 is added to the value of the interval counter, and 1 is added to the value of the second interval counter in step S7130. In other words, since the proxy derivation of the prefetch pending icon 472 was not performed even in this pending, the first interval between the holding area where the character flag is set to ON, and the holding area where the return flag is set to ON The value of each interval counter is incremented by 1 corresponding to the extension of the second interval between and by one hold.

After step S7130, in the pending icon display process of step S7136, the default pending icon 471 is displayed in the pending corresponding area 463 of the pending display area 461 corresponding to the new storage pending area. finish.

If the determination in step S7104 is affirmative, that is, if the proxy prefetch pending icon 472 has been derived, the process proceeds to pending icon display processing in step S7136 to display the pending display area corresponding to the new storage pending area. After performing processing for displaying the default pending icon 471 in the pending corresponding area 463 of 461, this processing ends. In other words, in the present embodiment, while the substitute prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed, the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the newly stored variation information is not granted. there is

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S7106, that is, it is not won in the reservation look-ahead effect lottery for whether or not to grant the right to derive the look-ahead reservation icon 472 corresponding to the newly stored change information. If so, after adding 1 to the value of the first interval counter in step S7131, in the pending icon display process of step S7136, the default After performing the process of displaying the pending icon 471, this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S7102 is affirmative, that is, if the variation information corresponding to the new jackpot is stored pending, it is determined in step S7132 whether or not the proxy request flag for loss is set to ON. If the determination in step S7132 is affirmative, then in step S7133 the deviation proxy request flag is turned off. In the following step S7134, the feedback flag set to ON in any of the reserved areas (the first to eighth reserved areas with numbers corresponding to the values of the return position counters) of the reserved information storage area is turned off. After step S7134, the process proceeds to step S7105, and the pending prefetch effect lottery is performed.

That is, basically, in the state where the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag is set to ON, the affirmative determination is made in the above step S7103. The possible pending prefetch effect lottery in step S7105 is not performed. However, when the variation information corresponding to the new jackpot is stored and the deviation substitute request flag is set to ON, the pending look-ahead effect is given priority with respect to the newly stored variation display. In order to do so, steps S7133 and S7134 are performed to provide the possibility of deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the newly stored change information. In this embodiment, the proxy request flag and the proxy flag are not set to ON at the same time.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7132, it is determined in step S7135 whether or not the winning substitute request flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S7135 is affirmative, that is, if the variation display corresponding to the big win has already been retained and stored, and furthermore, the look-ahead retention icon 472 is scheduled to be derived, the newly retained variation display will be displayed. Even if it corresponds to a big hit, the process proceeds to step S7119 without performing the reserved look-ahead effect lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S7135, that is, if both the winning proxy request flag and the losing proxy request flag are off, the process proceeds to step S7104. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the newly stored change information corresponds to the jackpot, in step S7104, if it is determined that there is a reservation area in which the proxy flag is already set to ON, Although it is configured to move to step S7136 without performing a pending prefetch effect lottery, for example, it is configured so that a pending prefetch effect lottery is performed (for example, a plurality of pending effect counters are provided in each pending area). You may

Next, pending icon shift processing of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that in the second embodiment, steps S4204 and S4205 of the suspension process (FIG. 36) are omitted.

First, in step S7201, whether or not the value of the preceding position counter is "0", that is, in the previous shift processing, the change information corresponding to the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 was shifted to the execution area of the pending information storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not the change information has been erased in the shift processing this time.

If the determination in step S7201 is affirmative, that is, if the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 has already been digested and does not exist, the first interval counter is set to "0" in step S7202.

After step S7202, or if a negative determination is made in step S7201, in step S7203, 1 is subtracted from the value of the preceding position counter, the value of the following position counter, and the value of the feedback position counter.

In subsequent step S7204, it is determined whether or not the return flag of the execution area is set to ON (for example, after the return flag is turned off in step S7134 of the pending icon setting process, the value of the return position counter is set to "-1"). (If the configuration is such that the setting process is performed at 100.degree. C., it can be replaced by determining whether or not the value of the feedback position counter is "0.").

If a negative determination is made in step S7204, that is, if the feedback flag of the execution area is off, in step S7205, (if the following position counter has a value of 1 or more, the reservation area indicated by that value is checked). and) determines whether or not there is a pending area in which the proxy flag is set to ON in the pending information storage area.

If the determination in step S7205 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7206 whether or not the value of the preceding position counter is "0".

If the determination in step S7206 is affirmative, that is, if the change information corresponding to the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 is shifted to the execution area of the pending information storage area in this shift process, in step S7207, the scenario It is determined whether or not the flag (one of the first to fifth scenario flags) is set to ON.

If the determination in step S7207 is affirmative, in step S7208 a scenario start flag indicating that the scenario is being rendered is turned on.

In the following step S7209, scenario effect setting processing is performed. In the scenario effect setting process, the leading character object 474 of the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 based on the character pattern information stored in the execution area or pending area indicated by the leading position counter and the pending area indicated by the trailing position counter A trailing character object 474 of a trailing prefetch suspension icon 472 based on the stored character pattern information is displayed in the suspension corresponding area 463 of the suspension display area 461 corresponding to the suspension area indicated by the return position counter. Scenario display settings are made to take the form corresponding to the type.

Further, in the scenario rendering setting process, after setting the scenario display, the character pattern flag of the execution area or the reservation area indicated by the preceding position counter is turned off, the proxy flag of the reservation area indicated by the following position counter is turned off, and the return is performed. The return flag of the reserve area indicated by the position counter is turned off, the character flag of the reserve area indicated by the return position counter is turned on, and the character pattern information stored in the reserve area indicated by the following position counter is returned to the return position. Processing associated with the scenario production such as moving to the reservation area indicated by the counter is performed.

After step S7209, the scenario flag is turned off in step S7210, and the process proceeds to step S7211.

In step S7211, redrawing of the pending icon 471 (holding redrawing process) is performed. However, if the scenario start flag is set to ON, instead of displaying the prefetch pending icon 472 as it is based on the character pattern information stored in the pending area indicated by the return position counter, scenario effect setting processing is performed. The scenario effect set in 2 is preferentially displayed (the display of the prefetch pending icon 472 is made to stand by).

If a negative determination is made in step S7206 or if a negative determination is made in step S7207, then in step S7212, the look-ahead pending icon 472 (substitute character object 474 ) is made to approach the holding corresponding area 463 side corresponding to the holding area in which the return flag is set to ON.

More specifically, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 stores an approach lottery counter (in this example, a loop counter of 0 to 39) for determining whether or not the proxy character object 474 should be brought closer to its original display position. , and an approaching lottery table for storing the value of an approaching lottery counter that causes the player to approach (win). The value of the approaching lottery counter is obtained in step S7101 and stored in the new storage reservation area at that time. As an approach lottery table, the "hit/scenario There are two types of tables, one for occasional use and the other for non-existent use, each of which has a plurality of tables.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), when the first to fifth scenario flags are set to ON, or when the feedback flag (indicated by the feedback position counter) is set to ON, the When the fluctuation information corresponds to "big hit" and the first interval is "2 frames", the value of the approach lottery counter corresponding to winning is "0 to 7", and the probability is 20%. to be elected. Also, if the first interval is "3 frames", there is a 20% chance of winning, if the first interval is "4 frames", there is a 20% chance of winning, and the first interval is "5 frames". If the first interval is ``6 frames or more'', the probability of winning is 50%. If it does not exist), you will be elected with a probability of 80%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the variation information stored in the holding area in which the return flag (indicated by the return position counter) is set to ON is "off" from which the scenario effect is not derived. In the corresponding case, if the first interval is "two frames", no prize is won. Also, if the first interval is "3 frames", there is a 5% chance of winning, if the first interval is "4 frames", there is a 5% chance of winning, and the first interval is "5 frames". If the first interval is ``6 frames or more'', the probability of winning is 20%, and if the first interval is ``0 frames'' If it does not exist), you will be elected with a probability of 50%.

As described above, the shorter the interval between the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 and the substitute prefetching pending icon 472, the more difficult it is to win the close-up lottery, and the more difficult it is to close the interval. In addition, when the value of the first interval counter is "0", that is, when the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 has already been consumed, there is a relatively high probability that the player will be selected in the close-up lottery. ing. Furthermore, when a scenario effect is performed or when dealing with a big win, it is relatively easy to win a lottery in close proximity compared to when dealing with other losses.

After step S7212, in step S7213, it is determined whether or not the close lottery is won. If a negative determination is made in step S7213, the process moves to step S7211 to perform pending redrawing processing, and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7213, that is, if it is determined to move the proxy character object 474 (prefetching suspension icon 472) one block to the left in the suspension display area 461, then in step S7214, the following line is displayed. The setting state of the proxy flag stored in the holding area indicated by the position counter is shifted to the next (lower number) holding area (the proxy flag of the relevant holding area is turned off, and the proxy flag on).

In subsequent step S7215, along with the shift of the proxy flag, the character pattern information stored in the holding area with the proxy flag turned on is also shifted to the next holding area.

Further, in step S7216, a reservation area with a character flag turned on or an execution area (preceding prefetching reservation icon 472, character object 474) and a reservation area with a proxy flag being turned on (following prefetching reservation icon 472, The interval between the proxy character object 474) and the interval between the holding area where the return flag is turned on and the holding area where the proxy flag is turned on are shortened. The values of the interval counters are each decremented by one.

Furthermore, in step S7217, the value of the trailing position counter is decremented by 1 as the proxy flag is shifted.

In step S7218, it is determined whether or not the value of the second interval counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S7218, the process moves to step S7211 to perform pending redrawing processing, and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7218, that is, the proxy flag set on is shifted to the reservation area where the return flag is set to ON (both the return flag and the proxy flag are set to ON in a predetermined reservation area) , a prefetch pending icon 472 to which a right derived based on predetermined variation information is granted is displayed in a pending corresponding area 463 corresponding to the pending area in which the predetermined variable information is stored in the pending display area 461. If so, in step S7219, the return flag of the reserved area indicated by the return position counter is turned off.

Furthermore, in step S7220, the proxy flag of the reserved area indicated by the proxy position counter is turned off.

In addition, in step S7221, the character flag of the holding area indicated by the return position counter is turned on.

After step S7221, in step S7222, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to fifth scenario flags is set to ON. If the determination in step S7222 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S7208 to perform processing for starting the scenario presentation. In other words, in the present embodiment, as the timing at which the scenario effect is started, the variation information including the information in which the character flag corresponding to the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 is set to ON is shifted to the execution area (preceding character object 474 is shifted to the execution corresponding area), and there is a case that the variation information including the information with the feedback flag set to ON is shifted to the execution area.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7222 is negative, in step S7223 a character movement flag is set to ON, which indicates that the character movement display for moving the proxy character object 474 is to be performed. Further, in step S7224, character movement setting processing is performed. That is, the character object 474 (proxy character object 474) corresponding to the character pattern information stored in the reserved area indicated by the trailing position counter is displayed in the reserved area indicated by the trailing position counter in the reserved display area 461. One pending area (At this time, the pending information in the pending information storage area has already been shifted, but the display of the pending icon 471 in the pending display area 461 is not yet shifted, so the one A substitute prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed at the position corresponding to the subsequent pending area.) to the pending area indicated by the subsequent position counter.

After that, the process moves to step S7211 to perform the pending redrawing process, and then the process ends. However, when the character movement flag is turned on, the character movement display is performed, and then the prefetch pending icon 472 in the pending information storage area is redrawn (the pending icon 471 is shifted one by one to the left frame). , redrawing of the pending icon 471 other than deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 to a prescribed position, such as reducing the number of pending icons 471 by one, is performed).

Also, if the determination in step S7204 is affirmative, that is, if the variation information including the feedback flag that is set to ON is shifted to the execution area, in step S7225, the winning proxy request flag or the missing proxy request flag is set to on. As a situation where affirmative determination is made in step S7204, although the right to derive the predetermined prefetch pending icon 472 has been granted based on the predetermined variation information, even if the predetermined variation display is shifted to the execution area. , the predetermined prefetch pending icon 472 has not yet been derived to the position corresponding to the predetermined variation information in the pending display area.

If the determination in step S7225 is affirmative, in step S7226, the winning proxy request flag or the losing proxy request flag that is set to ON is turned off. After that, the process moves to step S7211 to perform the pending redrawing process, and then the process ends. In other words, when the change information including the information with the return flag turned on is shifted to the execution area, the right to derive the look-ahead pending icon 472 has not yet been exercised (by deriving the proxy character object 474 not exist), the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 is not exercised.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7225, that is, if any proxy flag in the reserved area is set to ON, in step S7227 the proxy flag in the reserved display area 461 is turned ON. Consistency display indicating that a "consistent display" is performed to move the look-ahead pending icon 472 (proxy character object 474) derived at the position corresponding to the variation information to the position corresponding to the variation information with the return flag turned on. Set the flag on.

In step S7228, a coherent display setting process is performed. That is, the character object 474 (proxy character object 474) corresponding to the character pattern information stored in the reserved area indicated by the trailing position counter is moved from the reserved area indicated by the trailing position counter in the reserved display area 461. , to display that the robot moves to the holding area (in this case, the execution area) indicated by the return position counter.

After that, in step S7229, the proxy flag of the reservation area indicated by the trailing position counter is turned off, in step S7230, the return flag of the reservation area (execution area in this case) indicated by the return position counter is turned off, and in step S7231, Turn on the character flag.

After that, the process moves to step S7211 to perform the pending redrawing process, and then the process ends. However, if the consistent display flag is turned on, the consistent display is performed, and then the prefetching pending icon 472 in the pending information storage area is redrawn (the pending icon 471 is shifted one by one to the left frame, Redrawing of the pending icon 471 other than deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 to a prescribed position, such as reducing the number of pending icons 471 by one, is performed).

In this embodiment, the feedback flag, the feedback flag, and the proxy flag are not provided individually, but take a value of "0 to 3", "1" indicates that the character flag is on, "2" indicates that the feedback flag is on, "3" indicates that the proxy flag is on, and "0" indicates that these flags are all turned off. For this reason, in the hold icon shift process, in steps S7219, S7220, and S7230, for the same hold area or execution area, processing for turning off the return flag and the proxy flag is performed separately from the processing for turning on the character flag for the sake of convenience. However, if the character flag is turned on, this process is unnecessary.

Next, transition of the pending display area 461 accompanying data shift processing of the pending information storage area will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 67. FIG. 63 to 67 show the correspondence relationship between each execution area of the reservation information storage area and the suspension effect counter of the suspension area, and the suspension icon 471 of each execution corresponding area 462 of the suspension display area 461 and the suspension corresponding area 463. showing.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the execution area of the holding information storage area, the value of the holding effect counter of the first, second and fourth holding areas is "0", and the value of the holding effect counter of the third holding area The value is "1 (character flag on)". Then, in accordance with the fact that the change information was newly reserved and stored in the fifth reserved area, a reserved look-ahead effect lottery (see step S7105) was performed, and the winner was won in the first appearance lottery process. Without doing, waiting for the derivation of the look-ahead pending icon 472 (waiting for the variation information derived by proxy), "2" is set to the pending effect counter in the fifth pending area (return flag is turned on). be. In addition, if the variation information newly stored in the fifth reservation area corresponds to a big win, a winning substitution request flag provided separately from the reservation information storage area is set to ON.

In addition, the value of the preceding position counter indicating the positions of the pending area and the execution area storing the variation information for which the prefetch pending icon 472 is already displayed is "3", and the feedback flag is set to ON. The return position counter indicating the positions of the pending area and the execution area has "5", which is the same as the number of pending pending information (the number of the pending area set as the new storage pending area and the feedback flag is set to ON). set.

In addition, a pending area or an execution area in which variation information corresponding to the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 is stored, and a variation information corresponding to the subsequent prefetching pending icon 472 are stored (the proxy flag is set to ON). ), the first interval counter indicating the interval from the pending area starts counting when the variation information corresponding to the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 is stored (the character flag is turned on). Regarding FIG. 63(a), "2" is set before storing the change information in the fifth reserved area and at the stage of performing the reserved icon setting process for storing, and the step of finishing the reserved icon setting process. is incremented by "1" to become "3".

Furthermore, a second interval counter indicating the interval between the holding area where the return flag is set to ON (holding effect counter = 2) and the holding area where the proxy flag is set to ON (holding effect counter = 3) As for , the count starts when the feedback flag is turned on. As for FIG. 63(a), "1" is set at the stage of finishing the pending icon setting process for storing the variation information in the fifth pending area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b), a default pending icon 471 is displayed in the execution corresponding area 462, the first, second, fourth and fifth pending corresponding areas 463 of the pending display area 461, and the third pending A prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the corresponding area 463 . In the present embodiment, when the feedback flag is set to ON, finally, in the reservation display area 461, the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived as much as possible at the position corresponding to the variation information for which the feedback flag is set to ON. However, as long as the return flag is set to ON, the prefetch pending icon 472 is not displayed at the corresponding position.

Next, in FIG. 64, from the state of FIG. 63, one piece of variation information is digested (data shift processing is performed once), and two pieces of variation information are newly retained and stored. , indicating the state of winning in the second appearance lottery process (step S7119). That is, "3" is set to the reservation effect counter of the sixth reservation area (the proxy flag is turned on), and the winning proxy request flag is turned off accordingly.

In addition, the derivation of the proxy prefetching suspension icon 472 confirms the first interval and the second interval, and the process of counting up the first interval counter and the second interval counter is no longer performed. Incidentally, the value of the leading position counter is "2", the value of the feedback position counter is "4", and the value of the trailing position counter is "6". The value of the first interval counter indicating the first interval is "4", and the value of the second interval counter indicating the second interval is "2".

In this embodiment, when the first interval is "4", the probability of winning the appearance lottery is 50%. 20%, 10% when the first interval is "2", and 0% when the first interval is "1".

FIG. 65 shows a state in which two pieces of variation information have been digested from the state in FIG. 64 (data shift processing has been performed twice). In this state, if any of the first to fifth scenario flags is set to ON by shifting the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 to the execution corresponding area 462 (affirmative determination in step S7206), The corresponding scenario production is started. However, the example mode shown in FIG. 65 shows a case where the scenario flag is not set to ON.

Note that, as a scenario rendering that is started when the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 is shifted to the execution corresponding area 462, for example, as shown in FIG. Triggered by, the scenario production is started, and the leading character object 474 and the trailing character object 474 (substitute character object 474) are near the holding area 463 corresponding to the holding area where the return flag is set to ON. 68(b) to (f) are developed.

Furthermore, in the state of FIG. 65, the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 has been shifted to the execution corresponding area 462, and the scenario flag has not been set to ON (negative determination is made in step S7207). An approach lottery (step S7212) is performed to determine whether or not to close the second interval. The example shown in FIG. 65 is a close-up lottery (as shown in FIG. 62(a), the return flag-on variation information corresponds to a big win, and if the first interval is 4 frames, the probability of winning is 20%). It shows the case where the winner is not elected. That is, after the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 (preceding character object 474) is derived and the subsequent prefetching pending icon 472 (proxy character object 474) is derived, the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 and the following While the interval from the prefetching pending icon 472 is maintained at 4 frames (the number of frames in the pending display area 461 from which the default pending icon 471 between them is derived is 3), the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 is The pending icon 471 has been shifted up to the execution corresponding area 462 .

FIG. 66 shows a state in which one variable information (corresponding to the preceding prefetch pending icon 472) has been digested (data shift processing has been performed once) from the state in FIG. In this state, since the preceding prefetch pending icon 472 has already been digested, the probability of winning the approach lottery (step S7212) of the approach lottery process performed along with the data shift process increases dramatically (this example Then, the probability is 80% (see FIG. 62(a)), so in FIG. It shows a mode of movement.

FIG. 67 shows a state in which one piece of variation information (corresponding to the preceding prefetch pending icon 472) has been digested (data shift processing has been performed once) from the state in FIG. In this state, the pending effect counter in the execution area is set to "2" (return flag is turned on). In other words, the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 is obtained in the pending prefetch effect lottery process performed when the predetermined variation information is stored in the pending information storage area, and the character pattern is obtained based on the predetermined variation information. However, in the pending display area 461, the prefetch pending icon 472 is not yet derived to the execution corresponding area 462 corresponding to the execution area in which the predetermined variation information is stored, and another (later) position (Yes determination in step S7204, negative determination in step S7225), the prefetch pending icon 472 is forcibly moved to the execution corresponding area 462 ( See step S7227).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 67, the variation information stored in the pending information storage area (execution area here) and the pending icon 471 (prefetch pending icon 472) will match, and the correspondence between the contents of the variable display and the aspect of the prefetching pending icon 472 will collapse (for example, even though the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the jackpot is derived In spite of this, a situation such as a big win not occurring in the corresponding variable display, etc., is avoided.

As described in detail above, according to the second embodiment, when the predetermined variable information is stored in the predetermined reservation area (new storage reservation area) of the reservation information storage area, the prefetch suspension is performed as the suspension prefetch effect. When the right to derive the icon 472 is acquired, the right is exercised immediately on the pending icon 471 indicating that the predetermined variable information has been stored pending, as well as the subsequent variable information. is configured to be exercised for the pending icon 471 corresponding to . In particular, whether or not to exercise the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 depends on whether the hold area stores the variation information corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed in the hold display area 461 at that time. is determined based on the interval of

More specifically, even if the right is acquired (step S7106; YES), it is confirmed whether or not there is a prefetch pending icon 472 (previous prefetch pending icon 472) already displayed in the pending display area 461. , is displayed (step S7107; YES), the right is not immediately exercised (waits) unless the first appearing lottery process (step S7112) is performed and the winning is not won. Moreover, in the first appearing lottery process and the second appearing lottery process for determining whether or not to exercise the right for the subsequent variation information, the interval (first interval) with the preceding look-ahead pending icon 472 is The closer it is, the more difficult it is for the right to be exercised (the more difficult it is to win in the appearance lottery process), and the farther apart, the easier it is for the right to be exercised (see FIG. 60).

As described above, when the right to derive a new prefetching pending icon 472 is obtained in a state in which the prefetching pending icon 472 has already been derived, the interval from the prefetching pending icon 472 (executed as a variable display) Depending on the order difference), it is determined whether to newly derive the variable information corresponding to the newly stored variable information, or postpone the derivation (standby with the right to derive). is configured to That is, when a plurality of prefetching pending icons 472 are derived in the pending display area 461, the spacing between the prefetching pending icons 472 can be adjusted so that the respective prefetching pending icons 472 can be arranged relative to each other as much as possible. .

Therefore, in the pending display area 461, not only one, but a plurality of pending icons 471 can be derived as the prefetch pending icon 472 (a character object 474 can be derived for the multiple pending icons 471). At the same time, due to the fact that the intervals between the plurality of prefetch pending icons 472 are too close in the pending display area 461, the contents and results of the corresponding variable display are transparent and uninteresting. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the performance effect and the significance of existence of the prefetching suspension icon 472 are lowered. As a result, the negative aspect of deriving the prefetching suspension icon 472 can be suppressed, and the pending prefetching effect using the prefetching suspension icon 472 can be more reliably combined with the improvement of interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, basically, although the right is obtained, it is not exercised and is on standby (waiting for the change information to be exercised by proxy to be stored). state) or a proxy flag indicating that the right is exercised by proxy and the proxy's prefetching suspension icon 472 is derived, the new It is configured so that the character flag and proxy request flag are not set to ON corresponding to the variation information in the storage reservation area, but even if the variation table information corresponding to the big win is stored in the new storage area with reservation. When there is a situation in which the loss proxy request flag is set to ON, the loss proxy request flag is turned off, and the pending look-ahead effect lottery process is performed. In addition, even if the proxy request flag is set to ON, the state of the prefetching suspension icon 472 is determined at that time. A character determination table different from the character determination table referred to when the character flag is immediately turned on for the memory reserved area is referred to.

Therefore, with respect to the arrangement of a plurality of pending displays from which the pending prefetch effect is derived in the pending display means, a pattern that reduces the effect of the pending prefetch effect and a pattern that causes a decrease in the player's interest is reduced. It is possible to perform various balance adjustments and the like when the pending look-ahead effect is derived in a plurality of pending displays on the display means. As a result, it is possible to improve interest more reliably by the reserved look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, instead of exercising the right to derive the prefetch pending icon 472 obtained when the predetermined variable information is stored pending, to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined variable information, When the hold icon 471 corresponding to the hold-stored variation information is exercised, the correspondence relationship between the prefetch hold icon 472 and the predetermined change information is shifted. That is, the look-ahead pending icon 472 for suggesting the content of the variable display is configured such that the derived probability changes or the pattern changes depending on the content of the variable information or the like. Therefore, if the correspondence relationship between the change information and the prefetching suspension icon 472 is off, the suggestion by the prefetching suspension icon 472 may be off target, and the prefetching suspension icon 472 may lose its meaning.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, even if the correspondence relationship between the variation information and the prefetching suspension icon 472 is shifted, it is configured to finally match, so it is suggested in the form of the prefetching suspension icon 472 It is possible to prevent a situation in which the content of the variable information corresponding to the look-ahead suspension icon 472 does not match the content of the variable display of the variable information.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived is only when the pending icon 471 is newly displayed in the pending display area 461 . Also, even if the proxy request flag is set to ON, once the variation information for which the feedback flag is set to ON is executed, the right to derive the prefetching suspension icon 472 corresponding to that amount is not exercised. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of prefetching pending icons 472 suddenly increases, and situations in which even if the number of prefetching pending icons 472 increases without notice, the value of the prefetching pending icons 472 decreases. can be suppressed.

Further, for example, in the pending information storage area, in a state in which the first variable information is stored and the first prefetch pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the first variable information, a new The second variable information is stored, and although the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon 472 is granted for the second variable information, the second prefetch pending icon is derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variable information. If not, and the first prefetch pending icon 472 is erased from the pending display area before the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon is exercised, then the first prefetch pending icon 472 is stored pending in the pending information storage area. As for the third variation information, the second prefetch suspension icon 472 is always derived as a proxy for the suspension icon 471 corresponding to the third variation information. Therefore, while preventing the first prefetching suspension icon 472 and the second prefetching suspension icon 472 from being too close to each other, the right to derive the second prefetching suspension icon 472 can be prevented from being wasted as much as possible. In addition, when the first prefetch pending icon 472 is erased from the pending display area in a state where the user has the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon 472, the second prefetch pending icon 472 stored in the pending information storage area after that is erased from the pending display area. Regarding the 3 change information, the second look-ahead pending icon 472 may not always be derived by proxy, but may be configured to increase the winning probability of the second appearing lottery process.

Furthermore, for example, in the pending information storage area, in a state in which the first variable information is stored and the first prefetch pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the first variable information, a new Although the second variation information is stored and the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon 472 is granted for the second variable information, the second prefetch pending icon is derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variable information. When the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon 472 is exercised for the pending icon 471 corresponding to the third variable information stored pending in the pending information storage area after the second variable information And when the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information is shifted to the execution corresponding area 462, the target of the second prefetch pending icon 472 derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the third variable information is It is changed to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information. As a result, the second prefetch pending icon 472 and the second variable information (the pending icon 471 corresponding to) can be reliably matched.

In the pending information storage area, the second variable information is newly stored in the pending information storage area in a state where the first variable information is stored and the first look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the first variable information. is stored, and although the right to derive the second prefetch pending icon 472 is granted for the second variable information, the second prefetch pending icon is not derived as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variable information, and the second When the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third variation information retained and stored in the retention information storage area after the second variation information, the second look-ahead is performed as the retention icon 471 corresponding to the third variation information. A configuration in which the right to derive the pending icon 472 is exercised, the order in which the variable display of the first variable information is executed, and the variable information corresponding to the pending icon 471 targeted by the second prefetch pending icon 472 A first interval counter that stores a difference (first interval) from the order in which variable display is performed, an order in which variable display of second variable information is performed, and an order in which variable display of third variable information is performed A second interval counter is provided for storing the difference between .

By providing the first interval counter, in the first and second appearance lottery processes for determining whether or not to exercise the right to derive the second prefetching pending icon 472, the interval between the first prefetching pending icon 472 can be quickly set. It is possible to grasp the By providing the second interval counter, whether the second prefetch pending icon 472 as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the third variation information matches the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information through an approach lottery process or the like. It is possible to more quickly grasp the judgment such as whether or not.

In addition, a hold icon 471 corresponding to the second variation information (variation information with the return flag turned on) and a hold icon 471 corresponding to the third variation information (variation information with the proxy flag turned on) If there are two or more gaps, the second look-ahead hold icon does not jump at once, but moves to the gap (adjacent) hold icon 471 once, and then moves further to reach the final target. It will be derived to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variable display. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily change the target of the prefetch suspension icon 472 . Furthermore, in a situation where the player cannot gain an advantage just by moving by one position, it is possible to provide an enthusiastic presentation such as "move more". Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the pending look-ahead effect more magnificently and in a more comprehensible manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to further diversify the pending prefetch effect, when the proxy flag is set to ON, the preceding first prefetch pending icon 472 and the subsequent second prefetch pending icon 472 A lottery is held as to whether or not to derive a scenario effect using the aspect of (proxy look-ahead pending icon 472), and if a lottery is won, one of five patterns of scenario effect is derived. configured to obtain In particular, when the pattern shown in FIG. 68(f) is selected as the scenario rendering pattern, the mode of the preceding first prefetching pending icon 472 and the mode of the subsequent second prefetching pending icon 472 are combined. A mode is derived in the display range including the pending corresponding area 463 corresponding to the second variation information whose return flag is turned on.

Normally, the look-ahead pending icon 472 only suggests the content of one corresponding variable display (e.g. winning expectation) depending on each aspect, but there are a plurality of pending corresponding areas 463 as shown in FIG. 68(f). By performing an effect that derives the look-ahead pending icon 472 that straddles, the content of the multiple variable displays (expectation for winning, etc.) is suggested (before the result is obtained in the corresponding variable displays) in the multiple pending look-ahead effects. can do. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the reserved look-ahead effect and improve the effect.

Further, by combining (integrating) the mode of the first prefetching pending icon 472 and the mode of the second prefetching pending icon 472, the order of the first prefetching pending icon 472 and the second prefetching pending icon 472 can be changed. It is possible to make the player feel that the state expected by the player (such as a jackpot state) should be generated in response to (any of) the target pending display regardless of the interval or the like. Therefore, by deriving the pending look-ahead effect, it is possible to ensure the association that the player's sense of expectation is improved.

Furthermore, when the prefetching suspension icon 472 is derived by combining the aspect of the first prefetching suspension icon 472 and the aspect of the second prefetching suspension icon 472, a plurality of variations corresponding to the prefetching suspension icon 472 As for the display, a display effect (combined variable display effect) in which a plurality of continuous variable displays on the decorative pattern display device 42 are combined into one is performed. For example, when the combined look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived across the three pending corresponding areas 463, when the corresponding variable display is derived, the variable time obtained by adding the time of the three variable displays Variable display is performed. As a result, it becomes difficult to grasp which variation information has been won by merely visually recognizing the decorative pattern display device 42 . Therefore, the action and effect that the game can be progressed without being constrained by the order, interval, etc. of the pending look-ahead effect can be achieved more reliably.

Further, the pending display devices 46a and 46b definitively display the variable display pending numbers of the special display devices 43a and 43b. For this reason, various holding prefetch effects are performed in the holding display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42 so that the correspondence between the display indicating the holding (holding icon 471) and the holding variable display is somewhat difficult to understand. Even if such a scene occurs, it is possible to reliably grasp whether or not the variable display is suspended by the suspension display devices 46a and 46b. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the reserved prefetch effect, the effect, and the like.

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment will be described below. In the third embodiment, an effect of changing the state of the pending icon 471 is performed according to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like by the player. The characteristic portions will be mainly described below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted, and the same member names and member numbers will be used.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the reserved display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42, "stones" colored with "red", "blue", "green", "yellow", "black" and "white" are displayed. is displayed, and basically, when "red stone", "blue stone", "green stone", "yellow stone", and "black stone" are shifted to the execution correspondence area 462, such A production in which the soul resides in the "stone" occurs, and a predetermined suggestion is made. In addition, there are five production stages in the decorative pattern display device 42: "red", "blue", "green", "yellow", and "black". It is set to change.

Also, in the pending display area 461, when three or more "stones" of the same color (excluding white) are lined up, or four or more "stones" are lined up in a prescribed color combination, such a pending icon A look-ahead change effect that 471 may change to a look-ahead pending icon 472 occurs. In the process of normal retention and storage of variable representations, there may be cases in which specific "stones" are arranged as described above, but such occasions are rare. For this reason, in the present embodiment, an effect for increasing the opportunity is also performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the player operates the effect button 125, there is a replacement effect in which the positions of the pending icons 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 are switched. For example, when shift processing is performed and a new variable display is started, a display prompting the operation of the production button 125 is derived in the main display area 468 of the decorative pattern display device 42, and the production button 125 can be operated. The hold icon 471 determined by lottery is replaced with the hold icon 471 on the right side, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 71(a). In FIG. 71(a), "stones" of the same color are displayed in the sixth reservation corresponding area and the seventh reservation corresponding area. Display of hold line 490 extending to connect stones to each other) is performed.

A period is set in which the replacement effect can be performed (in the reset valid state, which is a state). 471 can be exchanged multiple times. FIG. 71(b) shows a state when the effect button 125 is further operated during the replacement effect period from the state of FIG. 71(a). With regard to the pending icon 471 in which the "stones" of the same color are arranged side by side, the pending icon 471 is excluded from the objects to be replaced, and the horizontally arranged state is maintained. In addition, if there are "stones" of the same color as the "stones" of the same color arranged side by side in other reserved areas, the "stones" are actively moved.

However, it is not a configuration in which if the effect button 125 is operated during a period in which the replacement effect is possible, the replacement effect will always occur. setting mode lottery process) is performed. For example, depending on the content of the variable information stored in the pending information storage area, the probability of "moving in the direction of approaching" is different (for example, if variable information corresponding to a big win is included, winning , If you are completely out of the game, you will almost never win).

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(c), in the 5th to 7th reservation corresponding areas, when three "stones" of the same color are arranged side by side, in the main display area 468 of the decorative pattern display device 42, A display prompting the operation of the effect button 125 (not shown in FIG. 71(c), but the same display as in FIG. 70) is derived. When the effect button 125 is operated within this display period, as shown in FIG. 71(d), a display is derived in which three stones of the same color arranged side by side explode.

After that, the pending icon 471 is visible again, but information other than the color may be added to the pending icon 471 . In this embodiment, the pending icon 471 that may be displayed as a state after the explosion includes a prefetch pending icon 472 indicating that a super reach will occur, a prefetch pending icon 472 that indicates that a big win will occur, and a specific There are a look-ahead pending icon 472 indicating that an advance notice effect will occur, a pending icon 471 indicating that there is a change in the effect stage, and a default pending icon 471 in the form of a "white stone".

FIG. 71(e) shows a state in which a look-ahead pending icon 472 indicating that super reach occurs in the sixth pending corresponding area as a result of the explosion is displayed. However, the variable display where super reach occurs does not correspond to the variable information corresponding to the look-ahead pending icon 472 displayed in the sixth pending corresponding area, but the pending icon 471 displayed in the third pending corresponding area , the aspect of the look-ahead pending icon 472 (the content of the variable display suggested by) and the variable information (the content of the variable display performed based on) match. not

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 71(f), 71(g), and 71(h), when the next shift process is performed, the correspondence relationship between the prefetching suspension icon 472 and the variation information is changed. There may be performances. In other words, an effect of exchanging the look-ahead pending icon 472 indicating super reach and the pending icon 471 derived to the position corresponding to the variation information of the variable display where super reach occurs is performed. This eliminates the inconsistency in the correspondence. Note that the replacement performance may be completed once or may be completed multiple times. Furthermore, while the correspondence relationship remains inconsistent, the variable display other than the variable display targeted for the replacement effect may be eliminated, and when the replacement effect is performed multiple times, only one change It may be displayed a plurality of times, or it may be performed over a plurality of times of variable display. In addition, when the variable display targeted for the replacement effect is about to be completed (when the corresponding pending icon 471 is shifted to the execution corresponding area 462), the inconsistency in the correspondence is resolved at that time. , the replacement performance must be performed.

In addition, in order to perform the replacement effect of the pending icon 471 as described above, the execution area of the pending information storage area of the sub-control device 262 and each pending area are provided with a pending effect counter and a connection counter. . The pending effect counter indicates the type of the pending icon 471. "0" is "white stone", "1" is "red stone", "2" is "green stone", "3" is "yellow stone", " 4" corresponds to "blue stone" and "5" corresponds to "black stone". Furthermore, the pending effect counter also indicates the type of the pending icon 471 having information other than the color, such as the case of the prefetch pending icon 472 . That is, in the pending effect counter, "11" is set corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 indicating that the super reach will occur, and "12" is set corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 indicating that the big win will occur. "13", "13", " 14” is set. In addition, "17" is set corresponding to the pending icon 471 indicating that there is a change in the performance stage.

When the replacement effect is performed, at the end of the process of executing the replacement effect, the reservation effect counters of the execution area and each reservation area are sequentially set to the same value as the previous value, or as described later. , and check whether the value has a specific relationship with the previous value. In addition, when adopting a configuration in which a latent probability mode with a high probability state and a low ball entry state is provided, and the production stage is changed along with the change of the game mode between the latent probability mode and the normal mode. It can also be said that the pending icon 471 indicating that there is a change in the performance stage is also the prefetch pending icon 472 .

The connection counter shows the connection with stones of the same color. For example, if two stones of the same color are lined up side by side and it is on the left side, the number is 11; If there are three stones in a line and it is on the left side, it is "21". If it is in the middle of three stones of the same color and it is in the middle, it is "22". "23" if it is on the right side of it, "00" if it is not lined up with a stone of the same color and there are not multiple stones of the same color lined up in a distant position, If there are multiple stones of the same color that are not aligned side by side with stones of the same color but are separated to the right side, "01" will be displayed. If a plurality of stones of the same color are arranged side by side at the position, "02" is set for each.

It should be noted that the pending effect counter and the connection counter are set when new pending information is stored, when a pending effect such as changing the arrangement or type of the pending icon 471 is performed, when stones of the same color are arranged side by side, ( When the side-by-side arrangement of stones of the same color is resolved (due to fluctuation digestion or the above explosion), it is reset based on correlation checks and the like.

In addition to the reservation information storage area, a red counter and a blue counter are provided to indicate how many "red stones", "blue stones", "green stones", "yellow stones", and "black stones" are displayed in the reservation display area 461. , a green counter, a yellow counter, and a black counter are provided. The replacement effect is not executed unless one of the values of these color counters is "3" or more. Incidentally, if any of the values of the color counter is "2" or more, the replacement effect may be performed.

In addition, even if the replacement effect can be derived, if the effect button 125 is not operated, the replacement effect is not derived. Furthermore, during the period in which the replacement effect can be derived, the replacement effect is derived from the operation of the effect button 125 until the replacement effect in the reservation display area 461 is completed (resetting of the reservation icon 471 is completed). It is set to an impossible state (resetting invalid state). This avoids a situation in which resetting of the mode of the pending icon 471 is never completed. Therefore, it is possible to establish an effect such as resetting the mode of the pending icon 471 and to simplify the control.

In addition, when there is no operation of the effect button 125, the period in which the replacement effect can be derived may end earlier than when there is an operation. Furthermore, when the performance button 125 is operated twice during the period in which the replacement performance is possible and the replacement performance is performed twice, the guidance display prompting the operation of the performance button 125 in the decorative pattern display device 42 is erased. May be configured (in the period in which the replacement effect is possible, if the operation of the effect button 125 is not performed for a specified time, it may be configured to derive a guide display prompting the operation of the effect button 125) .

In addition, as a pending effect different from the replacement effect, a combination effect in which the pending icons 471 are combined may be performed. As shown in FIG. 72(a), when four or more stones that are pending icons 471 are arranged in a specific row (for example, in any of the pending information storage areas, the value of the pending effect counter is "1", " 2”, “3”, and “4”), display indicating the range of the target pending icon 471 in the pending display area 461, and prompting the operation of the production button 125 above the range. and are derived.

By operating the effect button 125, a display is performed in which the target pending icon 471 moves in a small size, and a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to perform an effect to unite the target pending icon 471. As shown in FIGS. 72(b) and 72(c), a combination effect is performed. As a result, although the number of pending icons 471 is reduced, the combined pending icons 471 are displayed in a large size across a plurality of pending corresponding areas 463 where the target pending icons 471 were displayed.

It should be noted that the lottery to determine whether or not to combine the target hold icon 471 is easier to win when the variation information corresponding to the big win is stored in the hold information storage area. It is getting harder to win in the order of missing other than before and after, and completely missing. Further, when the variation information (corresponding to a big win, etc.) used as the basis for determining the winning probability of the lottery is not included in the variation information corresponding to the hold icon 471 targeted for the combination effect, the correspondence relationship Move the combined pending icon 471 so that . Furthermore, if there is no operation of the production button 125 as a trigger for the union production, the union production is not derived.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 72(d), when the combined pending icon 471 is shifted to (the position including) the execution corresponding area 462, the execution corresponding area 462 expands horizontally, and the holding corresponding area It looks like 463 is reduced. In addition, until the variation display of the (four times) deviation targeted by the combined pending icon 471 is completed, or until the variation display corresponding to the jackpot included in the target variation display is completed, the target Even if the variable display is sequentially digested, the combined pending icon 471 will be displayed in the execution correspondence area 462 in the same manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the pending icons 471 combined for four times of variable display exist in (the position including) the execution corresponding area 462, the pending corresponding area 463 can display five pending icons 471. Only the area is displayed, and even if the corresponding variation information is retained and stored, the display of the suspended icons 471 beyond that is suppressed until the combined suspended icons 471 are erased. ing.

As described above, a large pending icon 471 formed by combining a plurality of pending icons 471 is displayed across a plurality of pending corresponding areas 463, and the combined pending icon 471 indicates that a plurality of variable displays are held and stored. ing. Also, even if the combined pending icon 471 is shifted to the execution corresponding area 462, it actually suggests not only the execution area of the pending information storage area but also the contents of the variable information stored in the pending area. In particular, in the present embodiment, in response to the combined reserved icon 471, the decorative symbol display device 42 derives an integrated variable display in which a plurality of variable displays are put together. In this way, the combined hold icon 471 suggests that an integrated variable display is derived, and as a result, suggests that the expectation of a big win is high. Accordingly, the merged pending icon 471 is also the lookahead pending icon 472 .

In addition, it may be configured to derive a display that teaches that the variable display above the display frame of the suspension corresponding area 463 is suspended, or variation information other than the variation information corresponding to the combined suspension icon 471 may be configured to display all the pending icons 471 corresponding to (such as displaying the pending icon 471 to be digested later in a smaller size). By the way, the stand-alone pending icon 471 displayed in the execution corresponding area 462 is added with facial expressions, actions, and the like, and the facial expressions and the like suggest the variable display of the decoration pattern currently being performed, and the behavior in the pending display area 461. However, it is not a suggestion of a variable display that has not yet been performed, and therefore is not the prefetch pending icon 472 .

In addition, as a suspension effect different from the replacement effect and the combination effect, an interlocking effect is performed in which the display including the suspension icon 471 in the suspension display area 461 interlocks with the display in the main display area 468 to make the variable display disappear. Sometimes. As an interlocking effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the execution corresponding area 462 is erased from the pending display area 461, and the pending icon 471 displayed in the pending corresponding area 463 spreads evenly over the entire pending display area 461. are arranged as follows. Directly above the suspension display area 461, there appears an effect suspension display area 492 in which a pseudo suspension icon 491 dedicated to interlocking effects is displayed. In the effect pending display area 492, the same number of pseudo pending icons 491 in the horizontal direction as the number of pending icons 471 in the horizontal direction is formed so that a vertical row including each pending icon 471 in the pending display area 461 is formed. Displayed in rows. The pseudo pending icon 491 is the same as the colored (normal) pending icon 471 (having no information other than pending, such as suggestion of change content), "white stone", "red stone", "green stone", and "yellow stone". , "blue stone", or "black stone".

In the main display area 468 above the effect pending display area 492, monsters are displayed together with decorative patterns, and in the interlocking effect, if a specific monster is subjugated, a big hit state will occur. In order to attack the monster, it is necessary to align three pending icons 471 and three pseudo pending icons 491 vertically or diagonally in the pending display area 461 and effect pending display area 492 . On the other hand, in the effect pending display area 492, a cursor 493 targeting each pseudo pending icon 491 is displayed, and when the effect button 125 is operated, the form of the pseudo pending icon 471 in the cursor 493 changes randomly. do. However, when the form of the pseudo hold icon 471 in the cursor 493 is the same as the form of the hold icon 471 located directly below, it does not change any more.

Also, the cursor 493 can be moved using the cross button 126 . Furthermore, when the effect button 125 is operated in a state in which the form of the pseudo hold icon 471 in the cursor 493 is the same as the form of the hold icon 471 located directly below, the cursor 493 moves to another pseudo hold icon 491. It will be moved (randomly, or randomly among the pseudo-hold icons 471 that do not match the mode). Therefore, even if the effect button 125 is repeatedly hit without using the cursor 493, the pseudo-suspend icon 491 can be changed in form, and the suspend icon 471 and the pseudo-suspend icon 491 can be arranged vertically three times ( Sometimes they align obliquely unintentionally).

In addition, the frame portion of the decorative pattern display device 42 of the present embodiment is provided with a pair of left and right proximity detection sensors 495 corresponding to the upper and lower sides, and a pair of upper and lower proximity sensors 495 corresponding to the left and right side portions. A proximity sensor 495 is provided. When the hand held in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 is moved from right to left, the cursor 493 moves to the right, and when it is moved from left to right, the cursor 493 moves to the left. When moved downward, the cursor 493 moves upward, and when moved upward from the bottom, the cursor 493 moves downward. At the beginning of the interlocking effect, a display explaining various operation methods is derived.

Further, when three pending icons 471 and three pseudo pending icons 491 are arranged vertically or diagonally, the aspect of the pending icon 471 among them is that the soul dwells in the "stone" and changes into a fairy. Furthermore, a series of productions such as changing to an attack tool and attacking a monster occurs.

Also, in the interlocking effect, the number of pending icons 471 and the number of actually suspended variable displays match at the start of the interlocking effect, but do not necessarily match after that. Furthermore, when all the variable displays of the special display devices 43a and 43b withheld at the beginning of the interlocking production are extinguished, or when the variable displays of the special display devices 43a and 43b withheld at the beginning of the interlocking production are When the variation display of the included jackpot is digested, the interlocking performance is also completed accordingly (escape or subjugation).

It should be noted that the interlocking effect, when the variation information is stored in all the pending areas of the pending information storage area (all the pending corresponding areas 463, colored pending icon 471 other than white is displayed) , It is likely to occur when the variation information corresponding to the big hit or the variation display corresponding to the front and rear out reach is included. In addition, if there is no operation of the effect button 125 during the interlocking effect, the pseudo hold icon 491 does not change, and the display mode of the battle may not be derived at all. may be configured to randomly change the mode.

In addition, as a suspension effect different from the replacement effect, the combination effect, and the interlocking effect, a chaotic effect may be performed in which the mode of all the suspension icons 471 in the suspension display area 461 may change. As the chaos effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, a display in which “colored stones” are piled up in the same manner as the pending icon 471 is derived in the pending display area 461 in response to the operation of the effect button 125 by the player. After that, according to the player's operation of the effect button 125, an effect such as erasing unnecessary "colored stones" is performed. Then, when unnecessary "colored stones" are erased and the reserved icon 471 corresponding to the reserved variable display is revealed, three or more stones of the same color are lined up or arranged in a specific combination. It may happen.

In addition, in the chaotic effect, when the variable information with a long variable time is shifted to the execution area (I do not want the pending variable display to decrease much during the chaotic effect), This is likely to occur when the corresponding variation information and the variation display corresponding to the front-rear deviating reach are stored. If the effect button 125 is not operated, the chaotic effect will not start, and if the effect button 125 is not operated during the chaotic effect, all the pending icons 471 will become "white stone" when the effect period has elapsed. be done.

As described in detail above, according to the third embodiment, in the decorative design display device 42, basically, the form of each pending icon 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 and the pending information storage area (special The variation information (variation display) stored in each suspension area of the variable suspension area) and the variation information (variation display) stored in the execution area are in a one-to-one matching state, but the above various suspension effects are performed. , a non-matching state is derived in which each pending icon 471 and each variation information in the pending information storage area do not correspond. Therefore, for example, in comparison with the case where only the holding effect is performed so as not to disturb the matching state, the holding effect using the holding icon 471 can be performed more diversely, freely, and more dynamically.

Furthermore, in the case of trying to perform an effect within a range that does not break the matching state, on the contrary, the effect may feel forced, the conditions for executing the effect are strict, and the opportunities for the effect are reduced. There is a concern that the feeling of being in control is lost (there is no randomness), or that not only the variable display targeted by the look-ahead pending icon 472 but also the contents of the variable display before and after it become transparent.

On the other hand, like the replacement effect of this embodiment, by interposing a non-matching state as necessary, each effect until the final mode is made easy to understand (with less jumps in the effect) It is possible to make things look simpler, and it is possible to reduce the amount of control to be done at one time (divide the control up to the final aspect). Specifically, for example, when a button effect is performed that involves operating the exit button 125 to randomly switch the positions of the adjacent pending icons 471, and three similar pending icons 471 are lined up, It is determined whether or not the variation information corresponding to the jackpot is stored somewhere in the retention information storage area, and if the determination is affirmative, one of the three retention icons 471 arranged in a row is displayed. When the display position of the prefetching pending icon 472 and the variation information corresponding to the big win do not match, the prefetching pending icon 472 is changed so as to match the big hit later. For example, the position of the icon 472 is moved. In this case, no contradiction occurs in the end, and the mode change flow is relatively smooth in the middle.

Furthermore, even if the look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived and the content of the variable display is suggested, it may still be in a non-matching state. Relevance can also be lost. Therefore, it is possible to improve game performance and performance, suppress monotonous feeling, simplify control, and the like.

In addition, in the combination effect, a plurality of pending icons 471 are grouped into one, and the number of pending icons 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 is displayed to be less than the number of change information held and stored. . Furthermore, in the interlocking effect, the display mode of the pending icon 471 is linked to the display mode of the main display area 468, so even if the pending icon 471 is visually recognized, the number of variable information that is pending and stored cannot be grasped. It is possible. In addition, in the chaos effect, the suspended icon 471 (display in the same manner as the suspended variation information) is displayed. In this way, by making it possible to derive a pending performance that freely changes the number of pending icons 471 without being bound by the number of variable information stored pending, the performance effect of the pending performance using the pending icons 471 can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation for the corresponding variable display, and perform an effective presentation.

In addition, when the combined effect is derived, the variable display of the decorative symbols performed corresponding to the plurality of reserved icons 471 combined into one is also combined. Therefore, the form in which a plurality of pending icons 471 are grouped (unified) in the pending display area 461 and the variable display of the decorative design in the main display area 468 of the decorative design display device 42 can be reliably matched, It is possible to improve the degree of expectation of the variable display.

Also, in recent years, there are cases where the variable display time (variable time) is set relatively long, but in addition to being inefficient in terms of progressing the game, for example, the start winning device 33a, In a configuration in which a player is disadvantaged when a ball is entered into 33b, there is concern that such a situation may easily occur if the variation time is long. In this regard, in the present embodiment, rather than using one variable display, the variation time of a plurality of variable displays is used to perform a relatively long presentation, so the above problem can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the first pending display device 46a and the second pending display device 46b for displaying the pending number of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b are provided, the decorative pattern display device 42 Even if the number of pending icons 471 in the pending display area 461 does not match the number of pending variable displays of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and thus the number of variable information stored in the pending information storage area, the first pending display By checking the device 46a and the second pending display device 46b, it is possible to reliably grasp the number of pending variable displays.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player's operation of the production button 125 or the like is used as various triggers for holding production, and resetting of the holding icon 471 and the like are performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of performance opportunities (during a relatively boring time other than the timing at which the result of the variable display is determined) to reflect the player's intention in the game, thereby improving the game performance and performance. , suppression of monotony, etc. can be achieved.

Furthermore, regarding the resetting of the state of the pending display, the player can obtain a greater sense of satisfaction because the player performs the operation himself, and the pending effect can be obtained by allowing the player to perform or not to perform the operation based on his or her own ideas. can be selectively engaged by the player. Therefore, the difference between each player, such as feeling that the pending effect is too much or too little, is alleviated, and the reliability of the pending effect is lowered due to the fact that the pending effect is actually derived excessively. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of players who can enjoy the reserved presentation is too rare and the number of players who can enjoy it is reduced. As a result, both a player who wants to be actively involved in a game and a player who prefers a simple effect can be satisfied with the amount of the pending effect, and the control for deriving the pending effect can be performed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the performance effect due to the derivation of the pending performance is reduced in spite of the increase.

Further, in the present embodiment, when three or more pending icons 471 of the same type are lined up, or when four or more pending icons 471 are lined up in a specific combination, a change to the prefetch pending icon 472 occurs. (The reserved look-ahead effect is derived). Furthermore, if it is a period in which the replacement effect can be executed, the effect button 125 can be operated to replace the pending icon 471 any number of times, and if it is a period in which the interlocking effect can be executed, the effect button 125 etc. to change the mode of the pseudo-hold icon 491 any number of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new playability using the hold icon 471, and further achieve the above-described effect of suppressing monotonous feeling. In particular, it is possible to enjoy the appearance of a combination of a plurality of pending icons 471 changing step by step toward a specific mode. The above effects of suppressing the feeling of sensibility and the like are further exhibited. In addition, in the pending effect, the effect derived when the effect button 125 is operated is not predetermined, but when the effect button 125 is operated, according to other variation information (suspended information) is determined by Therefore, the fact that the player operates the production button 125 to reset the state of the pending icon 471 itself can add a game element. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of suppressing the feeling of monotony can be further achieved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(a; game mode, jackpot type) In the first embodiment, there are two game modes in which the winning lottery can be executed: the normal mode and the variable probability mode. A time reduction mode, which is a state, or a probability mode, which is a high probability state and a low ball entry state, may be set. In addition, when the time reduction mode is set, the variable probability mode may be omitted, the probability of the jackpot does not change (constant), and the period (number of fluctuations) of the high ball state given after the jackpot state ends is multiple. It may be configured to be patterned. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the variable probability mode is set, but it may be configured to continue until the next big hit.

In addition, the jackpot probability, the contents of the pattern of the jackpot type (the number of rounds in the jackpot state, the conditions for ending the round), the number of patterns, etc. are also appropriately set for each model. For example, a 2-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2RS") is provided as a jackpot type, and with respect to "2RS", one round consists of the variable winning device 32 being opened for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. It may be configured such that the jackpot state is terminated after the player has received the prize. In this case, "2RS" is a big hit (so-called "no-ball-out jackpot") in which a large increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected. Further, after the end of the "2RS" jackpot state, the "latency mode" (for example, variable display 100 times) may be provided. In addition, in the "latent certainty mode", there is a possibility that the ornamental pattern display device 42 has been set to the latent certainty mode (either the normal mode or the latent certainty mode). may be configured to move to

Further, after the end of the jackpot state, in the case of adopting a configuration in which one of the game mode of the high probability state and the game mode of the low probability state is selected, the first propriety determination as in the first embodiment When using the table and the second success/failure determination table, the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 include values (8 to 16, 308 to 316) that give a big hit only in high probability states, and values that can be used in both high and low probability states. There will be a jackpot value (7, 307).

That is, in the probability variation mode, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 (8 to 16, 308 to 316) that hits the jackpot only in the high probability state is acquired and retained and stored as variation information, and retained and stored prior to the variation information. In the variation display corresponding to the variation information, when the normal jackpot state in which the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state ends, the hit/fail random number counter C1 value (8 to 16, 308 to 316 ) does not occur in the variation display corresponding to the acquired variation information.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, the rate at which the execution flag, the reservation flag, the release flag, the pre-change flag, the destination flag, the first exchange flag, and the second exchange flag are set to be changed depending on the situation. It has become. In particular, it is configured such that the ratio changes depending on whether or not it is a variable display in which a big win state occurs. Then, when setting the flag, as in the first embodiment, the case where the big win is made only in the high probability state and the case where the big win is made in both the high probability state and the low probability state are distinguished, and the respective ratios are determined. and set the flag. As a result, for example, even though the variation display corresponding to the variation information in which the hit/fail random number counter C1 value (8 to 16, 308 to 316) for winning the jackpot only in the high probability state is performed in the low probability state, Avoiding a situation in which the predictive pending icon 472 with a high degree of expectation continues to be derived (although it cannot occur in the first embodiment, the predictive pending icon 472 is derived in a manner that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed). can do.

In this way, by setting the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 from the beginning so that even if the content of the variable display suggested by the prefetch pending icon 472 changes, it can be handled (no trouble occurs), the change occurs. or when there is a timing when there is a possibility of a change, avoiding the situation of confirming the prefetch pending icon 472 again from scratch, and preventing troubles due to contradictions in the form of the prefetch pending icon 472. can do. In addition, regarding the variable display where the contents (value) of the variable display may change before and after the jackpot state, the chances of "prefetching target change effect" are increased compared to the configuration in which "prefetching target change effect" is not executed. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the jackpot state is won, the probability variable mode is always given after the jackpot state ends, and whether or not the suspended variation information is performed in the probability variable mode It is possible to reliably grasp whether or not (it cannot be in a situation where it is suddenly performed in a low-probability state). Therefore, in the first embodiment, the table referred to when setting the pending effect counter (execution flag, reserve flag, release flag, pre-change flag, change destination flag, first exchange flag, second exchange flag setting) As for the jackpot fixed time (big hit even in normal mode) and conditional jackpot time (big hit only in probability variable mode) are prepared, but it may be combined into one for jackpot.

In addition, the time reduction mode is set, and the duration of the probability variable mode and the time reduction mode are different (for example, the time reduction mode is the period until the 100th fluctuation display after the jackpot ends, and the probability variable mode is the next jackpot period until), the type of winning jackpot may be instructed without fail until the corresponding jackpot state ends at the latest, or may be instructed even after the corresponding jackpot state ends. No (Even if it is internally in the variable probability mode, the decorative pattern display device 42 transitions to a pull-back stage, which is a production stage that suggests that it is either the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode, and a special display in the time reduction mode When the variable display of the devices 43a and 43b exceeds the upper limit number of times (100 times) of the time reduction mode, it may be configured to shift to the probability variable stage that continues until the next big win.

(b; small win) Furthermore, in the winning lottery based on the entry of a ball into the first winning opening 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, it may be possible to win a "small win". For example, in the winning lottery based on the entry of the ball into the first winning port 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, when a small hit is made, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round. is repeated twice, the small winning state ends. In other words, the variable winning device 32 is the same as the above-described "2RS" in appearance. However, the game mode does not change between before and after the occurrence of the small winning state. That is, for example, when "2RS" is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the probability mode, but even if a small win is won in the normal mode, the normal mode is continued. As a result, in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 332 of the first start-up winning device 33a, it is not necessary to perform the sorting to win the 2-round jackpot (2-round normal jackpot) to which the high probability state is not given. Also, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the variable prize winning device 32 is opened twice in a short period of time so that it is known that the state has definitely shifted to the high probability state.

In addition, by setting "small hits" and "probability variable jackpots without balls", you can increase the chances of deriving the pending look-ahead effect and change the pattern pattern ), etc., can be diversified. In addition, when setting a 2-round normal jackpot, the 2-round normal jackpot is also a jackpot, so the total jackpot probability is increased accordingly, but the 2-round normal jackpot does not actually come out. Since there is no change in the game mode, the player generally has a total jackpot probability displayed at a visible position of the pachinko machine 10 and a jackpot with balls that the player can feel as a jackpot (and " 2RS”), there is a risk of feeling uncomfortable or distrustful, and there is concern that it will become unpopular. For this reason, by setting "small hit" and "probability variable jackpot without balls" and not setting the normal jackpot without balls, it is difficult to determine whether the mode has shifted to latent mode or normal mode. The above concern can be dispelled while ensuring

In the normal mode, there is a possibility that a "small hit" may occur, but in the variable probability mode, it is configured so that a "small hit" does not occur. Even if there is, it may be configured such that a look-ahead pending icon 472 that can be derived when a "jackpot" occurs is derived. In this case, the value of the look-ahead pending icon 472 derived corresponding to the variable probability mode (credibility of the expected degree of jackpot, etc.) is further enhanced. In addition, for example, a plurality of variable ball entry means are provided that change between an open state in which a game ball can or is easily entered and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter (for example, the right side area of the game area). and the left side area), and an open teaching that teaches which of the plurality of variable ball entry means is to be opened, or at what timing it is to be opened. A means may be provided. Further, the opening teaching means is configured to be able to change its state between a functional state that teaches the opening of the variable ball entry means and a resting state that does not teach. , the opening teaching means may be configured to obtain the right to be in a functional state.

(c; starting winning device)
(c-1; priority digestion) In the first embodiment, the suspended variable displays are digested in the order they were suspended. For example, both the first variable display and the second variable display is pending, the second variable display may be preferentially digested over the first variable display. In this case, the first variable display is not performed (postponed) unless the second variable display is completely completed. When adopting such a configuration, the special variation reservation area of the main controller 261 includes four first reservation areas for storing the variation information corresponding to the first variation display and the variation information corresponding to the second variation display. and one execution area are provided, and when variation information is stored in the second reservation area, the variation information in the second reservation area is shifted to the execution area. is executed, and when the variation information is not stored in the second reservation area and the variation information is stored in the first reservation area, the variation information in the first reservation area is shifted to the execution area and executed can be configured to

(c-2) In the first embodiment, the first starting prize winning device 33a is provided with the first prize winning port 332 and the second prize winning port 333, but the second prize winning port 333 may be omitted. . In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, when a game ball enters the first winning port 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the first starting prize winning device 33a The ratio of the types of hits to be given is different between the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 333, and the second winning opening of the first starting winning device 33a. In the case of winning a big hit in the lottery performed when the game ball enters the 333, and in the case of winning in the lottery performed when the game ball enters the second start prize winning device 33b, Although it is configured so that the ratio of the type of award to be given is the same, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery performed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 332 of the first starting winning device 33a, the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a, and The same jackpot type table is referred to and the allocation ratio of the jackpot type that can be granted is the same as in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery performed based on the ball entering the second start prize device 33b. can be configured to

In the above-described first embodiment, there is a case where a ball enters the first starting prize winning device 33a (the first prize winning port 332 and the second prize winning port 333) and a ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b. Although the number of prize balls given to the player is the same between the two cases, it may be configured to be different. Also, the arrangement of the start-up winning devices 33a and 33b can be appropriately changed for each model.

(c-3; over winning) In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the second variable display is prioritized, in a state where the second variable display for four times, which is the upper limit of retention, is retained and stored, the first start winning device 33a of the second winning opening 333, or when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, (in the third embodiment, the holding icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display in the holding display area 461 becomes a specific mode, and then the character object 474 is derived (changes to the prefetch pending icon 472) for the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display (described above), or the predetermined first The right to derive the character object 474 (change to the prefetching pending icon 472) may be given to the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable display.

That is, conventionally, for example, in a state where it is not possible to hold and store any more variable information in the special variable holding area (there is no empty holding area), the game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b. Also (so-called "over winning"), the variation information for that amount is not stored in the special variation reservation area (the variation display is not suspended), so when such an event occurs, as a player, I felt lost. On the other hand, it is conceivable to increase the number of reservation areas of the special variable reservation area, but in that case, due to individual differences of the pachinko machine 10, etc. Based on the difference, the difference in the ratio of the number of times of the variable display to the number of game balls shot increases, or the game balance (the number of game balls shot and the number of game balls shot) , ratio with the number of game balls paid out, etc.), the probability of winning or losing a lottery is lowered, or the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the starting prize winning devices 33a, 33b is reduced. As a result, there is a concern that the difference will increase and the degree of freedom in design will decrease.

In this regard, by adopting the above configuration, when the game ball wins over the second winning opening 333 of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, the holding icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display is converted into the prefetching suspension icon 472, or the right to be converted into the prefetching suspension icon 472 is granted. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball over-wins the second winning port 333 of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, which is completely useless. It is possible to reduce the bad impression caused by over-winning the second winning opening 333 of the starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b.

Further, for example, when both the first variation information and the second variation information are stored in the special variation reservation area, if the state in which the second variation information is stored in the special variation reservation area is not interrupted, the first It is possible to postpone the digestion of the variable display, and it is possible in a high ball entry state (in this example, a probability variable mode for hitting to the right). In other words, when the jackpot is won in the first variation display, compared to when the jackpot is won in the second variation display, the ratio of being distributed to the probability variation mode is low, so in the probability variation mode, the second variation information , but if the first variation information is stored in the special variation holding area, they do not want the first variation information to be consumed, even if they want to leave their seats. It is feared that a situation such as the game ball being continuously entered into the second starting prize winning device 33b is caused.

In this respect, according to the above aspect example, by over-winning the game ball to the second start winning device 33b, conversion to the prefetching reservation icon 472 is performed with priority over the reservation icon 471 corresponding to the first variation information. It is designed to be Therefore, depending on the aspect of the look-ahead pending icon 472, it may be possible to grasp the contents (property or not) of the first variation information in advance. can be determined in the previous stage. As a result, it is possible to reduce situations in which the user refrains from leaving his or her seat. In particular, when the look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived in a mode that teaches the result of the lottery for the first variation information itself, such a function and effect can be achieved more reliably.

However, in a state such as a jackpot state where the variable display is not performed, even if an over-win is made, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display stored pending is converted into the prefetch pending icon 472, or the prefetch pending icon 471 The configuration is such that the right to convert to the icon 472 is not granted. It should be noted that "in the over-winning of the second variable display, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the predetermined first variable display stored in the special variable pending area is converted into the prefetching pending icon 472, or If it is determined that the right to convert to . Further, for example, with one over-winning, one of the pending icons 471 corresponding to the first variable display may be changed to the prefetch pending icon 472, or the number of targets may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, all of the pending icons 471 corresponding to the first variable display may be changed to the prefetching pending icons 472, and with one over winning, the suggestion of one prefetching pending icon 472 of the first variable display Accuracy may also be configured to increase in stages (in which case the accuracy can be understood by the player).

In addition, since it is practically impossible to interrupt the storage of the second variation information in the low ball entry state (normal mode), "only in the high ball entry state, by over winning to the start winning devices 33a and 33b conversion to the prefetch pending icon 472 is performed". In addition, "In the pachinko machine 10 capable of exchanging game information with the server via the communication portable terminal owned by the player, when the mobile interlocking game is being played with the information from the server being input, Only, the conversion to the look-ahead pending icon 472 may be performed by over-winning to the start-up winning devices 33a and 33b. In this case, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game.

(d; Variable Winning Device) In the first embodiment, one variable winning device 32 that can be opened in the jackpot state is provided, but a plurality of variable prize winning devices may be provided. Also, the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, a first variable winning device into which game balls that have passed through the left side area of the game area can enter, and a second variable winning device into which game balls that have passed through the right side area of the game area can enter are provided, The first variable winning device is opened and closed in the jackpot state based on the winning to the first starting winning device 33a, and the second variable winning device is opened and closed in the big winning state based on winning to the second starting winning device 33b. may be configured.

(e; V-ST) Further, for example, a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device are provided in which a game ball that has passed through the right side region of the game region can enter, and the second variable winning device A V winning switch capable of detecting the entered game ball is provided, and when detection by the V winning switch is performed in a big hit state, a probability variable mode with an upper limit (for example, 100 times of variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b). may be configured to be given.

In addition, as the jackpot type, the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable winning device is opened after the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device is opened. A 15-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RS") in which 8 game balls enter the winning device or the second variable winning device as one round, which is repeated 15 times, and the first variable winning device. The device is opened for 30 seconds, or the second variable winning device is opened for 0.2 seconds, or the first variable winning device is opened after the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device is opened. A 15-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RN") is set in which 8 game balls enter the device or the second variable winning device as one round, and this is repeated 15 times.

For both "15RS" and "15RN", the first variable winning device is opened in the 1st round to the 7th round and the 9th round to the 15th round, and the 2nd variable winning device is opened in the 8th round. However, in the 8th round of "15RN", the second variable winning device is opened only for 0.2 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the second variable winning device. For this reason, an increase in the number of game balls in such rounds cannot be expected (the number of rounds in which an increase in the number of game balls can be expected is substantially 14 rounds as a whole of the jackpot state of "15RN"), and the second variable winning device is used to play the game. A ball cannot be entered, that is, a game ball cannot be detected by the V winning switch, so that the variable probability mode cannot be acquired.

With the above configuration, after the "15RS" jackpot state ends, "variable probability mode" (for example, 100 times of variable display) is given, and after the "15RN" jackpot state ends "Normal mode" is given. It has become.

Furthermore, as for the sorting of the jackpot type, for example, when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 332 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, the rate is 50% "15RS", and 50% becomes "15 RN" at a ratio of On the other hand, 100% of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second winning port 333 of the first starting prize winning device 33a and the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. becomes "15RS". In other words, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 332 of the first start-up prize winning device 33a, the high probability state is provided after the jackpot state ends. When a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second winning port 333 of the first starting prize winning device 33a, and when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b , the high probability state is always given after the end of the jackpot state.

In the pachinko machine (so-called V-ST machine) configured as described above, rather than winning a jackpot in a winning lottery based on the entry of a ball into the first winning hole 332 of the first start winning device 33a, the first It is overwhelmingly more advantageous to win a jackpot in the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize winning port 333 of the starting prize winning device 33a and the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize winning device 33b. In the configuration, by performing a "prefetching target change effect" such as changing the target variable display of the prefetching suspension icon 472 of the first embodiment, it is possible to further improve interest.

It should be noted that a game ball entering the second variable prize winning device may be always detected by the V winning switch, or (a sorting device is provided inside the second variable prize winning device), and at least a "15 RN" jackpot may be hit. In this state, even if a ball enters the second variable winning device 3, a game ball that is not detected by the V winning switch is generated (the second count switch that detects a game ball that has entered the second variable winning device detects and the prize ball is played).

(f; pending icon, pending display area) In the above-described first embodiment, the shape (motif) of the pending icon 471, change in mode (for example, operation mode), etc. are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. be done. For example, in the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to grasp which of the first variable display and the second variable display the hold icon 471 corresponds to, but it is not possible to grasp Alternatively, it may be in a form that is difficult to comprehend. Furthermore, normally, it is impossible to grasp which of the first variable display and the second variable display the hold icon 471 corresponds to, but only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, It may be configured so as to be able to teach which one it corresponds to.

Further, the pending display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42 includes an execution corresponding area 462 capable of displaying a maximum of one pending icon 471 and a pending corresponding area 463 capable of displaying a maximum of eight pending icons 471. Although provided, for example, the execution correspondence area 462 may be omitted. However, when the execution corresponding area 462 is omitted, it is necessary to complete various effects using the pending icon 471 (look-ahead target change effect, pending effect) before the variable display of the target is started.

Further, for example, even if five or more variable displays are suspended in total on the special display devices 43a and 43b, the suspension display area 461 is configured so that only up to four suspension icons 471 are displayed. may Furthermore, for example, depending on the position of the displayed pending corresponding area 463, it may be configured so that the form of the pending icon 471 changes, for example, the four pending icons 471 that are digested first, are digested later. It may be configured to be displayed larger than the pending icon 471 that is displayed, and the mode of the pending icon 471 that will be digested later is simplified so that the number of pending can be grasped. may be configured.

Further, the position of the reserved display area 461 is not particularly limited. For example, in the first embodiment, the reserved display area 461 is set horizontally at the bottom of the decorative design display device 42, but the decorative design It may be set in the upper part of the display device 42, or may be set so as to be vertically long with respect to the left or right portion of the decorative pattern display device 42. FIG. Furthermore, for example, depending on the player's operation (operation by the production button 125, the cross button 126, or a touch sensor or touch panel provided as a modification), the position of the reserved display area 461 in the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 42 may be configured to be configurable. Further, the size of the pending display area 461 may be increased or reduced, or may be divided into a plurality of areas. In addition, the reserved display area 461 and the main display area are exchanged, and the reserved icon 471 is set to a range including the central part of the decorative design display device 42, and the decorative design is displayed variably (simplified version is also possible). may be configured to be performed around it (when a notable event such as reach occurs in the variable display of decorative patterns, it may be automatically replaced).

Furthermore, the reserved display area 461 may be provided in a display section of a display device provided separately from the decorative pattern display device 42 . Further, such a display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may include an EL display device, a dot display device, a three-color LED, or a device in which a plurality of panels whose modes can be changed are arranged in accordance with the status.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the pending display area 461, the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the normal mode and the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the probability variable mode can be distinguished. As described above, the ST borderline 465 is displayed, but it may be configured so that it can be distinguished by another method. For example, the background of the pending display area 461 may be changed, or the mode of the pending icon 471 may be changed. However, the complexity of the pattern of the pending icon 471 (difficult to understand the correspondence relationship), the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the normal mode, and the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variable display of the schedule performed in the probability mode If a jackpot state occurs in a state where both the icon 471 and the icon 471 are displayed, the relationship between the game mode and the pending icon 471 may change after the jackpot ends. It is preferable that the boundary display is performed in the background portion or the like.

(g; Proximity Detecting Means) In the first embodiment, it can detect the approach or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the decorative pattern display device 42, and is connected to the input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262. A proximity detection means (for example, a proximity detection sensor having a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion, a touch panel, or the like) may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the hold icon 471 displayed in the hold display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42, based on the detection of the finger or the like, the object whose proximity is detected is , is a pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information whose pending flag is set to ON, and when the variable information whose release flag is set to ON is pending, the pending icon 471 of the object whose proximity is detected may be configured to change to the prefetch pending icon 472 . In this case, the player's interest in the pending icon 471 can be increased by introducing an action to the look-ahead target change effect.

(h; prefetch pending icon)
(h-1) In the first embodiment, the prefetch pending icon 472 is composed of the base object 473 and the character object 474, and the character object 474 is moved from the predetermined base object 473 to another base object 473. , expresses that the variable display targeted for the prefetch pending icon 472 has been changed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, the pending icon 471 may not be distinguished between the base object 473 and the character object 474, and the entire pending icon 471 may be moved when the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed. Furthermore, for example, before and after the target of the predictive pending icon 472 is changed, the aspect of the predictive pending icon 472 whose target is changed is changed (for example, the degree of expectation for the big win is changed to a higher one). may

Further, in the first embodiment, the base object 473 is a common motif for the default pending icon 471 and the prefetch pending icon 472, but they may be different. In addition, in order for the player to recognize that the look-ahead suspension icon 472 has only moved, the content suggested by the look-ahead suspension icon 472 (the value of the look-ahead suspension effect) is maintained immediately before and after the change, All aspects of the prefetching suspension icon 472 do not change (it is desirable to configure such that at least a part of the aspect of the prefetching suspension icon 472 before change is inherited. In addition, the suspension target change effect and the suspension rank rank It may be configured to be a set with an up effect (either a configuration that always increases or a configuration that does not necessarily increase).For example, after the pending target change effect is performed, the target prefetch pending icon 472 operates while maintaining its form (shape), or when ramping up after a dynamic display effect that overlaps with the prefetching pending icon 472 is derived, etc., the prefetching pending icon 472 may be configured to change the aspect of

(h-2) Furthermore, depending on the mode of the pending icon 471, etc., the mode and behavior of the “connection effect” can also be appropriately set. For example, the character object of the prefetching suspension icon 472 may be an "egg", and when the "prefetching target change effect" is generated, a predetermined character may carry or throw the "egg".

In addition, during the “connection effect”, the aspect of the character object 474 changes (for example, the character object 474 is replaced with another character object 474, and the other character object 474 is displayed on the post-movement prefetch suspension icon 472). (or displayed on the lookahead suspension icon 472 after movement after changing the costume), the aspect of the lookahead suspension icon 472 before the change and the aspect of the lookahead suspension icon 472 after the change. is different, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the variable display targeted by the prefetch pending icon 472 is changed.

Furthermore, in the middle of the connecting effect, it is possible to perform a effect (for example, the character object 474 brings a friend, performing a predetermined gesture, etc.) to increase the expectation of the big win with respect to the character object 474 or the like. Effect suggesting the destination of the object 474 (because the player wants to move to the hold icon 471 of the second variable display or the hold icon 471 of the probability variable mode, the play of whether to reach the hold icon 471) may be configured to perform

(h-3) In the first embodiment, the prefetch pending icon 472 is suddenly derived to the pending display area 461. It may be configured to produce a performance. For example, after displaying a portent object that may be changed to the prefetch pending icon 472 for the default pending icon 471, a character object 474 is displayed instead of the portent object, or the portent object is erased. Alternatively, only the base object 473 may be used. Further, the result may be displayed by operating the effect button 125 while the portent object is displayed. Furthermore, effects (for example, character corps passing, suspension The background color of the display area 461 changes, various monuments appear, etc.). In addition, it may be configured so that the maximum number of pending icons 471 displayed in the pending display area 461 can be set (if the size, shape, etc. of the pending display area 461 changes, (The maximum display number of the pending icons 471 may be automatically changed.)

It should be noted that there may be a pattern of simply erasing the derived character object 474, but since there is a risk of lowering the level of expectation and interest, it is displayed in the reserved display area 461 as in the first embodiment. It is desirable to perform an effect such as moving the reserved icon 471 within the range of the reserved display area 461 so as not to change the jackpot expectation level of the entire reserved icon 471 . In addition, it is not necessary to perform a connection effect, but in that case, the timing of changing the predetermined prefetching pending icon 472 to the default pending icon 471 and the predetermined default pending icon 471 to the prefetching pending icon 472 are changed. It is desirable to match the timing. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the relationship between the previous change and the subsequent change is weakened, and the interlocking effect cannot be recognized.

(h-4) In the first embodiment, regarding the reservation flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag, two or more identical flags cannot be set to ON in the reservation information storage area, but different flags It is configured so that it can be set to ON while coexisting. Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, even in a state where a plurality of the reserve flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag are set to ON, when the "pre-hold movement effect" is not performed, Check if the ``hold exchange effect'' is performed, and if the ``hold exchange effect'' is not performed, check if the ``movement effect after holding'' is performed. The "rear movement effect" and the "holding exchange effect" are executed one by one.

On the other hand, in each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area, a plurality of pending effect counters may be provided, or when the next shift process is performed after the release flag, change destination flag, and second replacement flag are set. Instead of always starting the “pre-hold movement effect”, the “post-hold movement effect”, and the “hold exchange effect”, multiple timings of the start are set (for example, the shift processing of the next time, and the subsequent shift processing The timing of shift processing can also be selected), and a plurality of "movement effect before holding", "moving effect after holding", and "holding exchange effect" are performed at once (stand (continued) may be configured to be performed. In this case, it is possible to diversify the "look-ahead target change effect".

It should be noted that if the "pre-hold movement effect", the "post-hold movement effect", and the "hold exchange effect" are performed all at once, there is concern that the periphery of the hold display area 461 will become complicated and difficult to understand. Therefore, each "prefetching target change effect" may be intentionally staggered (in order), or it may be determined that a plurality of "prefetching target change effects" are executed at the same time. However, the execution of any one of these "look-ahead target change effects" may be suspended.

Also, for example, regarding the reservation flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag, a plurality of the same flags are set to ON in the reservation information storage area (for example, the reservation effect counters in the first reservation area and the third reservation area " 2”, etc.). In this case, for example, when the release flag is set to ON in a state where the reservation flag is set to ON corresponding to the two pieces of variation information, the previously retained (first digested) variation display method It may be configured so that the movement effect before holding is performed, or by looking at the contents of the fluctuation information, the one with a high degree of expectation for the jackpot (the fluctuation display that hits the jackpot is high, and the It may be configured so that the variable display and the pre-retention movement effect are performed, or all the variable displays with the reservation flag set to ON and the pre-retention movement effect at once may be configured to be performed.

Regarding the reserve flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag, if any one of them is set to ON in the reserve information storage area, these flags can no longer be set to ON. may be configured.

Further, in the first embodiment, once the "prefetching target change effect" is performed for a predetermined variable display (holding icon 471), the second "prefetching target change effect" is not performed for the same variable display. However, it may be configured so that it can be performed multiple times. For example, in the "look-ahead target change effect", when the pending effect counter is set to "3", "5", and "7", the character object 474 reaches the final destination (the pending effect counter is "2", "4"). , "6") is determined and set in a remaining movement counter that stores the number of movements until the remaining movement counter reaches "0", or The character object 474 repeats movement until the variation information related to the "look-ahead target change effect" is shifted to the execution area (the pending area where the pending effect counter is set to "3", "5", and "7" is changed), and when the value of the remaining movement count counter becomes "0", or when the variation information related to the "look-ahead target change effect" is shifted to the execution area, if it is a pre-suspension move effect , the value of the pending effect counter is changed from ``2'' to ``1'' and ``3'' to ``0'', and in the case of moving effect after suspension, the value of the pending effect counter is changed from ``4'' to ``0'', And it is changed from '5' to '1', and if it is a pending exchange effect, the value of the pending effect counter is changed from '6' to '1' and from '7' to '1'. You may When adopting such a configuration, it is possible to continuously hold the expectation that the "prefetching target change effect" will be performed.

When repeating the movement of the character object 474, it does not stop at the suspension corresponding area 463 corresponding to the set suspension area in which the suspension effect counter is set to "2", "4", or "6". Alternatively, in the course of repeating the movement of the character object 474, it can be grasped that the character object 474 just happens to stop at the final destination (for example, the movement of the character object 474 is repeated, when the character object 474 moves to the suspension corresponding area 463 corresponding to the suspension area with the value of the suspension effect counter of "2", the value of the suspension effect counter of the suspension area is set to "32". That is, "2" indicating the final destination and "3" indicating the existence of the release flag corresponding to the character object 474 may be identified.

(h-5) In the above-described first embodiment, when the "prefetch target change effect" such as the "pre-hold movement effect" is performed, in the connection effect, the hold icon corresponding to the variation information for which the release flag is set to ON The character object 474 is configured to move straight from 471 toward the pending icon 471 corresponding to the variation information whose pending flag is set to ON (not involved in the other pending icons 471). , the character object 474 may be configured to perform an effect in which another pending icon 471 is involved. In this case, it is possible to perform a richer effect as to where the character object 474 ends up and which variable display is targeted by the prefetching suspension icon 472 . Furthermore, in the connection effect, an effect is performed as to whether or not the aspect of the character object 474 changes, or although the aspect of the character object 474 does not change, another display effect is derived in relation to the character object 474, and the like. Then, it may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by a pattern of connecting performance.

(h-6) In the first embodiment, for example, among the pending icons 471 displayed in the pending display area 461, the pending icon 471 that is desirably derived as the prefetching pending icon 472 for the player is the prefetching pending icon 472. In the case of 472, regarding the prefetch suspension icon 472, a hold effect indicating that no further prefetch target change effect (movement of the character object 474) is performed may be derived. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of production opportunities and to give the privilege of a sense of security by deriving the hold production. It should be noted that the hold state may be set by a predetermined operation of the player.

Also, for example, the target of the prefetch pending icon 472 may change from the first pending display to the second pending display, but there is no case where the second pending display is changed to the first pending display. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is a pattern that is not pleasing to the player in the look-ahead target change effect in which the target of the look-ahead suspension icon 472 is changed. As a result, the look-ahead target change effect can be a favorable phenomenon for the player, and the playability of expecting the look-ahead target change effect to occur can be made more reliable.

(h-7) Although not specifically mentioned in the above-described first embodiment, when the "look-ahead object change effect" is performed, or "1, 3, 4, 6" is set in the hold effect counter, the look-ahead hold icon When 472 is displayed, it may be configured to generate a corresponding sound effect or a predetermined lamp light emission mode. In this case, even if the user does not directly see the pending display area 461, the generation of the prefetch pending icon 472 or the like can be recognized by the sound effect, and the state thereof can be confirmed, so that the game can be progressed more smoothly. .

(h-8) In the "holding exchange effect" of the first embodiment, the aspect of the look-ahead suspension icon 472 (character object 474) corresponding to the first exchange flag and the aspect of the look-ahead suspension icon 472 corresponding to the second exchange flag are not the same (if they are the same, cancel, or raise or lower the rank of one of the character objects 474, or select another character from those having the same significance (a plurality of characters with the same rank). setting a character, preparing a character with a minor change, etc.) may be configured. Regarding the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the first exchange flag and the second exchange flag, the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the big win and the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the loss are different from the prefetching pending icon 472 corresponding to the big win. It is desirable to configure (control) such that the higher rank is higher (the higher rank is likely to be obtained).

(h-9) In the above-described first embodiment, the second variable display is retained and stored (the second right/fail related information is acquired), and the execution flag is tentatively turned on in the retained information storage area of the sub-controller 262. In the case (see step S6103), the corresponding pending icon 471, in the pending display area 461, it is determined whether there is a possibility of being displayed together with the pending icon 471 corresponding to the first variable display, and displayed When it is determined that there is a possibility, the rate at which the reservation flag is set may be increased compared to when it is determined that it is not displayed. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the target of the prefetching suspension icon 472 is switched from the first variable display to the second variable display, which is a pleasing pattern among the prefetching target change effects. In addition, in order to avoid a decrease in reliability, it is also possible to increase the rate at which the reserve flag is set only when winning.

(h-10) In the first embodiment, the mode pattern of the pending icon 471 in the pending display area 461 (holding corresponding area 463) does not change before and after the jackpot state. In addition to increasing the number of patterns of each mode rank of 472, at the end of the jackpot state, the mode pattern of the pending icon 471 is reset based on the values of the pending effect counter, the upper limit rank storage area, and the execution rank storage area. may be configured. In this case, even if various effects (for example, complex effects such as removing the correspondence between the pending icon 471 and the variable display) are performed in the pending display area 461 in the stage prior to the big win state, can be reset after

(h-11) In the above-described first embodiment, in addition to the mode change of the default pending icon 471 to the prefetch pending icon 472, the default pending icon 471 is changed to another default pending icon 471 mode. Alternatively, the prefetching suspension icon 472 may change to another form of the prefetching suspension icon 472 .

(h-12) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the second variation display, which is advantageous for sorting the jackpot types when the jackpot state occurs, , the derivation target may be changed as the pending icon 471 corresponding to the first variable display. In this case, while the look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived corresponding to the second variable display, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the game, such that the user wants the second variable display to be completed. You can check and enjoy the behavior of the display. If the derivation target of the prefetch pending icon 472 does not change during the specified number of times of variable display, it may be configured so that it does not change after that.

(i; Suggestion contents of the prefetching suspension icon 472) In the first embodiment, whether or not a big win state occurs by changing the mode of the suspension icon 471 (configuring the prefetching suspension icon 472 to be derivable). Although it is configured to suggest whether or not (the degree of expectation of a big win), it may be configured so that another suggestion may be made. For example, regardless of the suggestion of the jackpot expectation, if a jackpot state occurs in the variable display, it suggests that the probability variable mode is given (becomes a probability variable jackpot), or if the reach state is temporarily It may be configured to suggest that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed as long as it occurs. In this case, if the suggested prefetch pending icon 472 (which may be derived to each of a plurality of continuous pending icons 471) is derived corresponding to the probability variable mode, the interest in the corresponding variable display is further enhanced. It is possible to provide the inflection of the game.

In the first embodiment, when the occurrence of a special game state such as a jackpot state is instructed by the look-ahead suspension icon 472, the "look-ahead target change effect" is not performed until the special game state occurs (for example, , the value 1 to 7 is not set to the pending effect counter).

Also, for example, setting a time reduction mode that is a low probability state and a high ball entry state, and a latent probability mode that is a high probability state and a low ball entry state, and only by visually recognizing the decorative pattern display device 42 etc. It is not possible to recognize whether you are staying in the definite mode or the normal mode, whether the period of the time reduction mode is still left, or whether you are staying in the definite variable mode or the time reduction mode, or , It is configured to be difficult to recognize (set a common production stage), and depending on the aspect of the look-ahead pending icon 472, it may be configured to suggest that you are staying in the latent probability mode or the probability variable mode. good. Furthermore, for example, when the variable display corresponding to the look-ahead pending icon 472 ends (may be accompanied by a button effect, etc.), the latent probability mode or the probability variable mode is taught. It may be configured so that there is a case where it is taught (in the case of non-participation in the production, it may be configured not to teach). In this case as well, it is possible to increase the number of performance opportunities and add new intonations to the game.

In addition, it is possible to set by the player's operation so that the suspension effect does not occur at the player's will, or the state change of the suspension icon 471 (change to the prefetch suspension icon 472) itself does not occur. can be configured to Further, in the third embodiment, by drawing the pending icon 471 to the pending display area 461 based on various lotteries, by chance, three consecutive pending icons 471 of the same type are arranged side by side, or a specific Although it is configured so that there are cases where four combinations are lined up, it is forced not to line up (when the reserved icons 471 determined to be derived are in the specific line, another ) may be configured. Furthermore, in that case, it may be configured to determine which of the predetermined pending effects to derive, or to increase the probability of deriving the pending effects.

(j; Relationship with mobile-linked games)
(j-1) In the above embodiment, data exchange (so-called mobile-linked game ) can be configured. For example, when ending a mobile-linked game, a two-dimensional code containing the current game information is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the mobile communication terminal and displays the code with the mobile communication terminal. By accessing the server, the game information is transmitted to the server, and when the mobile-linked game is started again (for example, at a later date), by accessing the server with the mobile communication terminal, accumulation corresponding to each player A password issued according to data or the like may be input to the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, for example, by performing a mobile-linked game, various settings made by the player, or effects derived in the decorative pattern display device 42 etc. according to the game information accumulated so far by the player It may be configured such that a change occurs upon selection of the pattern of . For example, the player can change the balance of effects to be selected on the pachinko machine 10 or on the server side, or set characters that are likely to appear on the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like. may be configured. In particular, in the present embodiment, it may be configured such that an effect that is likely to be derived in the pending display area 461 and a pattern of the prefetch pending icon 472 can be set. For example, in the pending display area 461, the pending icon 471 is likened to cooking utensils such as a plate (cooking) and a frying pan, and a character is displayed behind it, and the character cooks (in the “prefetch target change effect”, It is possible to change the character or change the content of the dish (which may be associated with the method of suggestion). It may be configured as

Furthermore, according to the content of the accumulated game information (the rank updated by storing a specified amount of game information and specific game information corresponding to the individual player in the server), the number of contents that can be set increases. Or, it may be configured so that a more unusual presentation can be selected.

(j-2) Display data on the decorative pattern display device 42 derived by the pachinko machine 10 and decoration data (character image, item image, action pattern, character voice , sound effects, etc.) may be configured such that a period during which specific decoration data can be acquired or is easily acquired (collection high certainty state) is set.

For example, when a jackpot state occurs in the variable display from which the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived, or before the variable display corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 is digested When the effect to be used is performed, decoration data related to the character object 474 displayed on the corresponding prefetch pending icon 472 can be acquired with a predetermined probability, and in the collection high probability state, such probability is It may be set to 100%, or it may be configured to make it easier to acquire rare pattern decoration data among the decoration data related to the character object 474 displayed on the prefetch pending icon 472 . When adopting such a configuration, a player who collects decoration data desires that the prefetching suspension icon 472 is derived in the collection high probability state. By deriving the target change effect, a new intonation is imparted.

In addition, as a condition for transition from the collection low probability state to the collection high probability state, for example, if you win the lottery, if the fluctuation display is performed a specified number of times in the collection low probability state, a specified time has passed since the power was turned on. There are cases, etc., and the state of transition from the collection high probability state to the collection low probability state is, for example, when the fluctuation display is performed a specified number of times in the collection high probability state, when the (fall) lottery is won, when the collection Examples include when a specified time has passed in the high probability state, when a specified number of decoration data is acquired in the collection high probability state, and when a big win state occurs.

In the above-described embodiment, decoration data is not stored in the portable communication terminal owned by the player. may be configured to be derived in the mobile communication terminal. In addition, the website of the server may be configured so that images, sounds, etc., based on decoration data of the player stored in the server can be derived. However, in order to increase the willingness to play, the decoration data can only be opened on the pachinko machine 10, or by opening the decoration data on the pachinko machine 10, images and sounds that cannot be derived by other methods are derived. It is desirable to configure

Furthermore, by being able to collect the decoration data, it is possible to make the pending effect using the pending icon 471, the effect button 125, etc. more lively. A mini-game may be configured to award a collection if the player succeeds. In this case, the effect of suppressing monotony and improving motivation for playing the game can be further achieved.

(j-3) It is configured to be able to execute a game in which different results are given according to the player's operation, and a game reflection state is provided in which the result of such game is changed according to a winning lottery or a ready-to-win lottery. You can do it. That is, by allowing the game to be played along with the game of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress fatigue and the like. In particular, by performing a mobile-linked game, the content of the current game can be left as data along with the content of the game, and the accumulation of data can increase the enjoyment.

Also, the game result of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to change between a state in which the result of the game is reflected and a state in which it is not reflected. For example, basically, the game has a structure in which the result is determined according to the player's operation, and when it is decided to perform a variable display such as a big win state or a super reach state, may be configured such that the contents and results of the game are forcibly determined (corresponding scenarios are created, etc.) according to the results of the lottery. However, in order to advance the game, it is essential to advance the game (start winning).

Regarding the operation of the game, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated only with the hand that does not grip the handle 18, or the amount of rotation of the handle 18 (while operating the firing stop button), or the game The result of the game changes according to the movement path of the ball and the destination of the ball (the game ball is detected by the detection means, but there is no prize ball even if the detection is performed, and there is no lottery related to the game). (For that purpose, it is desirable to configure so that the game results do not differ much regardless of where the game ball is hit).

(k; Effect related to occurrence of prefetch pending icon 472 (appearance of character object 474))
(k-1) In the first embodiment, when the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived, the pending icon 471 (the base object 471 ), the character object 474 is derived, but another pattern may exist.

For example, after making the character object 474 of the prefetch pending icon 472 appear in a place other than the pending display area 461 (for example, at the timing when the variable display is suspended), the predetermined pending icon displayed in the pending display area 461 471 (base object 473). For example, a character object 474 or an object related thereto (caricature, bait, trainer, etc.) is displayed in the main display area in which decorative patterns etc. are displayed in the decorative pattern display device 42, and patterns such as behavior of such objects are displayed. Accordingly, an effect may be performed such that it is determined whether or not the character object 474 is combined with a predetermined base object 473 to form the prefetch pending icon 472 . In addition, it may be a movable accessory with the character object 474 as a motif, or a light emission information means that emerges with a built-in lamp.

(k-2) Furthermore, the player touches a character object 474 displayed in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42 (which may be hidden in the background or the like, may run around, or may come and go in and out of the display area). Alternatively, it can be moved by pulling it (it may be made easier to catch when a predetermined condition is established, for example, the net is displayed, it is put to sleep, food is scattered and it is brought to a certain place, or it is displayed in the display area). The character object 474 moves to the holding display area 461 and fits in the base object 473 (if it fails (fake), it escapes on the way, etc.). may be configured to perform

(k-3) Also, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when the prefetch target change effect is derived, the prefetch target change effect is derived before the prefetch target change effect is derived. A look-ahead change-suggestion effect suggesting that the game may be derivable may be configured. As the look-ahead change suggestion effect, for example, a character is displayed in the suspension display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42 or in the vicinity thereof, and the character performs a predetermined action on the look-ahead suspension icon 472 targeted for the look-ahead target change effect. It may be configured so that an animation to cause is derived. Further, for example, a predetermined change occurs in the form of the prefetching suspension icon 472 that is the target of the prefetching target change effect (a display such that the prefetching suspension icon 472 shakes and the front of the prefetching suspension icon 472 is fogged is derived. etc.). In this way, by deriving the look-ahead change suggestion effect, it is possible to more positively appeal that the look-ahead target change effect is derived, and it is possible to make it easier for the user to visually recognize the look-ahead target change effect from the beginning. .

(l; Timing of look-ahead target change effect) In the first embodiment, the "look-ahead target change effect" is started only at the timing when the pending icon 471 is shifted. It may be configured so that it may be For example, the operation of the effect button 125 is selected as a trigger for starting the look-ahead target change effect, the operation is guided, and the operation of the effect button 125 is set as the trigger for the look-ahead target change effect, and such a state is performed. When the effect button 125 is operated in , the look-ahead target change effect may be started.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the release flag, the change destination flag, or the second exchange flag is set to ON, the look-ahead target change effect is always derived in the next shift process. For example, an effect permission lottery is performed to determine whether or not to start the prefetch target change effect in the shift process in which the release flag, the change destination flag, or the second exchange flag is set to ON, and if each wins, the prefetch target It may be configured such that a change effect is derived.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the number of prefetch pending icons 472 can be increased only at the timing when a new pending icon 471 is additionally displayed in the pending display area 461. However, it may be configured so that it may increase. For example, the prefetch pending icon 472 may be derived after a specific effect (such as an animation in which a character causes a predetermined action on the pending icon 471) is derived in the pending display area 461. Under the condition that the user's operation of the production button 125 or a predetermined variable display (for example, a variable display that causes a reach state) is performed, the look-ahead pending icon 472 is derived (or the mode rank is stepped up may be configured to In addition, for example, if the execution flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag are set ON, the prefetching suspension icon 472 is configured not to be derived, and the state of having the right to derive the prefetching suspension icon 472 In addition, the prefetching pending icon 472 may be derived by winning a permission lottery performed during the shifting process of the pending icon 471 .

However, in order to avoid interference with the effects related to the decorative patterns in the main display area of the decorative pattern display device 42, the "look-ahead target change effect" and the effect of increasing the look-ahead pending icon will cause a ready-to-win state from the start of the variable display. It is desirable to be performed between the timings of Further, as a trigger for the start of the effect, the effect button 125 may be operated in a state in which the permission for effect is issued.

(m; prize winning history) Also, for example, the detection history of the left start prize winning switch 224a, the right start prize winning switch 224b, and the second start prize detecting switch 224c (the result of the lottery and the time of each detection are associated with each other) a detection history storage means capable of storing each of the items), and a hold capable of storing the initial set value of the value of the holding effect counter (the value of the holding effect counter set when the variation information is stored in the hold information storage area) Effect number storage means may be provided so that information stored in the detection history storage means and reserved effect number storage means can be output. For example, the detection history storage means and the pending effect number storage means are provided in a control device electrically connected to the main control device 261, and when a predetermined operation is performed by a hall official, the detection history storage means and the pending effect number storage means The information stored in the pending effect number storage means may be read out so that it can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. - 特許庁Furthermore, the same information as the information stored in the detection history storage means and the pending effect number storage means may be output to the hall computer of the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. In this case, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a trouble caused by a misunderstanding regarding the "look-ahead target change effect" is complicated.

(n; Suspension of normal symbols) In the above embodiment, the decoration symbol display device 42 is configured to display a suspension display (normal symbol suspension icon) indicating that the variable display relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended. good too. Furthermore, with respect to such a normal figure pending icon, like the pending icon of the above-described embodiment, it may be configured to perform an effect such as changing the order of digestion.

For example, even in the normal mode entry ball support lottery, if you win, the second start winning device 33b is set for a hit type (long open hit) that is opened for 4 seconds, for example. It may be configured to teach or suggest per such long opening. In addition, during the time reduction mode and probability variation mode, it may be possible to stop teaching or suggesting per long opening, or stop the display of the normal figure reservation icon itself.

(o) In the second embodiment, it was basically determined whether or not to derive the prefetching pending icon 472 (substitute prefetching pending icon 472, etc.) based on the interval from the preceding prefetching pending icon 472. However, for example, based on not only the interval between the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 but also the content of the variation information corresponding to the prefetching pending icon (whether it is a big hit, reach type, etc.), the subsequent prefetching pending icon It may be determined whether or not to derive (for example, the probability of winning in the appearance lottery process may be changed).

Also, the correspondence relationship between the interval and the probability of deriving the prefetch pending icon can be appropriately set for each model. Further, separate tables are provided as in the above-described embodiment, which are referred to in the first appearing lottery process (step S7112) and the second appearing lottery process (step S7119) of the reserved icon setting process (see FIG. 58). They may be used separately, or may be configured to be used in common.

(p) In the second embodiment, the pattern of the prefetch pending icon 472 is determined when the character flag is turned on in the new storage pending area, and the prefetch pending icon 472 is determined when the proxy request flag is turned on. Although a different character determination table is referred to when determining the pattern of 472, the pattern of the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 is referred to so as not to overlap the pattern of the preceding prefetching pending icon 472. Alternatively, the prefetching pending icon 472 of the succeeding (substitute) prefetching pending icon 472 is changed so that a predetermined meaning is generated when a predetermined association is made by combining with the pattern of the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 472 pattern, referring to the preceding prefetching pending icon 472 pattern and corresponding variation information and the following prefetching pending icon 472 pattern and corresponding variation information (based on order etc.) It may also be configured to determine the pattern of the scenario presentation or the like. The timing for starting the scenario effect is not particularly limited. For example, when a predetermined lottery is won during the data shift process with the scenario flag set to ON, the warping flag is started. Alternatively, based on the player's input operation of the effect button 125 or the like, it is possible to start the scenario effect in such a manner that the variable display is interrupted.

(q) In the second embodiment, unless a plurality of prefetching pending icons 472 are displayed in the pending display area 461, the change information targeted by the prefetching pending icon 472 is not changed. However, even in a state where the look-ahead suspension icon 472 is not displayed, the player wins in the look-ahead performance lottery process performed when the change information is newly stored in the suspension information storage area. In this case, the first appearing lottery process may be performed to determine whether or not the prefetch pending icon 472 should be derived immediately.

Furthermore, a plurality of suspension effect counters are provided for each suspension area and execution area of the suspension information storage area, and a plurality of return flags are set to ON in the plurality of suspension areas and execution areas, and a plurality of proxy flags may be configured to be turned on.

When adopting these configurations, the spacing and order of the prefetching suspension icons 472 are changed more complicatedly, and the game performance and performance are improved from the derivation of the prefetching suspension icons 472 to the erasure thereof. etc. can be achieved.

Further, in the second embodiment, based on the operation of the production button 125, the look-ahead pending icon 472 (substitute character object 474) corresponding to the pending area for which the proxy flag is set to ON is displayed as the return flag is set to ON. It may be configured such that an approach lottery process for determining whether or not to approach the holding corresponding area 463 side corresponding to the holding area is performed. In addition, as a result of the approach lottery process, the prefetch pending icon 472 is configured not only to move toward the execution corresponding area 462 but also to move away from the execution corresponding area 462. good too.

(r) In the above-described second embodiment, the mode of the first prefetching pending icon 472 and the mode of the second prefetching pending icon 472 as shown in FIGS. When deriving the prefetching pending icon 472 across the area 463, the mode of the first prefetching pending icon 472 and the mode of the second prefetching pending icon 472, whichever has a higher expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot state, is minimized. However, it is desirable to have it, and it is more desirable to configure so that the degree of expectation may be improved by the amount of integration (union) of the prefetch pending icon 472 or synergistically. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(d), when the targets of the first and second prefetching pending icons 472 are combined into one variable information, the variable display targeted by the prefetching pending icon 472 is reduced by one. However, the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed by deriving a mode indicating that the degree of expectation has been raised accordingly.

(s; operation means) In the third embodiment, an operation time measurement timer as operation time measuring means for measuring the operation time of the effect button 125, and the number of operations for counting the number of times the effect button 125 is operated per specified time. At least one of the operation count counters may be provided as counting means. Furthermore, with the effect button 125, depending on whether the measurement time of the operation time measurement timer exceeds the first threshold, or whether the number of times measured by the operation number measurement counter exceeds the second threshold, various lotteries for holding effects The various tables used may be configured so that different tables are selected. For example, when the effect button 125 is turned on, the roulette wheel continues to rotate and stops when released, or when the hand is held above the effect button 125, the balloon inflates and deflates repeatedly. It is also possible to perform an effect such as popping when operated.

In this case, one performance button 125 can be used to perform various inputs. Therefore, after making it easy to reflect the intention of the player regarding the pending effect such as changing the mode of the pending icon 471, the number of the effect buttons 125 whose predetermined operation triggers resetting of the mode of the pending icon 471 is reduced as much as possible. operability can be improved, and interest in the operation can be strengthened. By minimizing the number of the effect buttons 125, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the effect accompanying the operation of the effect button 125, and to suppress an increase in the space required for installing the effect button 125.例文帳に追加can.

Further, for example, detection of the proximity detection sensor 495 provided in the frame portion of the decorative design display device 42 and detecting that an object approaches the space in front of the decorative design display device 42 triggers resetting of the pending icon 471. Alternatively, a button proximity detection sensor capable of detecting an object in the vicinity of the effect button 125 may be provided, and the speed at which the effect button 125 is operated and the effect button 125 above the effect button 125 may be detected. It may be configured such that different tables are selected in various types of lottery for the holding effect according to the length of time the hand is held without touching. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the suspension effect is reset with the detection of the button proximity detection sensor as a trigger. When adopting these configurations, various inputs can be made when resetting the state of the pending icon 471, and more various effects can be performed.

In addition, buttons and sensors corresponding to each pending corresponding area 463 and execution corresponding area 462 of the pending display area 461 are provided, and the pending display area 461 is configured to be provided on a touch panel separate from the decorative pattern display device 42. You may In this case, since each holding icon 471 is directly touched, the operation is intuitive and easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the viewer more interested in the viewing mode of the pending display area 461 and the behavior of the pending icon 471, and prevent the user from forgetting to reset the pending display mode. Furthermore, by making the operation easy to understand, it is possible to avoid situations such as the time running out due to confusion over the operation, or the game tempo becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such an operation. . In particular, when an operation to select one of a plurality of pending icons 471 is required, selection of the target pending display can be made easier and more reliable.

(t; Covering Means) In the above-described embodiment, a blind plate as a covering means that can be displaced between a covering position located in front of the reserved display area 461 and a retracted position retracted from the front position of the reserved display area 461 is provided. may be provided. For example, in the third embodiment, eight blindfold plates that can appear and disappear upward from the lower frame of the decorative pattern display device 42 are provided corresponding to each suspension corresponding area 463, and are covered at the timing when the suspension effect may occur. It may be configured such that the entire or part of the pending icon 471 located behind it is hidden, and the retracted position is set at the timing when the pending effect ends. In addition, a plurality of blindfold plates are provided corresponding to each reservation corresponding area 463, and each of the plurality of blindfold plates has predetermined information depending on the difference in visual recognition mode (a sticker printed with a pattern etc. is attached) It is composed of a display device such as a dot display device or a 7-segment display device, and suggests the degree of expectation, etc.), and depending on the state, selects and decides the blindfold plate as the covering position or the retracting position. It may be configured to In addition, the blindfold plate can be rotatably provided so as to change the visible area from the front, and can be slid left and right along the shift direction of the hold icon 471 (not shown by following the shift operation of the hold icon 471). operable)).

When adopting these configurations, it is possible to derive a more interesting effect by combining the pending icon 471 and the mode change of the pending effect, and the operation of the blindfold plate. In addition, when the blindfold plate covers the entire suspension icon 471 to the extent that it becomes invisible or difficult to see (it is set to the all-covering position), the moment when the suspension icon 471 and the suspension effect change can be seen. By eliminating it, it is possible to improve the performance of how it has changed or whether it has not changed. In particular, since the blindfold plate can individually cover each of the pending icons 471 displayed in the pending display area 461, it is possible to limit the pending icons 471 to be noticed among the multiple pending icons 471, thereby changing the mode. It is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize whether or not has been performed. Furthermore, when the blindfold plate covers a portion of the suspended icon 471 to the extent that it becomes invisible or difficult to see (set to a partially covered position), the aspect of the suspended icon 471 and the suspension effect and the aspect of the blindfold plate to derive a more interesting aspect (a portion of the pending icon 471 appears and disappears from the side of the blindfold plate, but as to which pending icon 471 it is, there are several patterns. It is possible to put it in, but it is difficult to understand exactly).

Also, the blind board can cover only the reserved display area 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42, and the main display area 468 as the effect display means is not hidden by the blind board. For this reason, for example, compared to a configuration in which the covering means covers the entire display portion of the decorative pattern display device 42, attention can be paid to the mode of the reserved display area 461, and changes in the mode in the reserved display area 461 can be made more noticeable. It can be easily recognized. In addition, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visibility of other parts of the decorative pattern display device 42 by the covering means in the covering position. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the timing of presentation using the covering means.

The covering means is not particularly limited to a movable accessory, and may be configured by an EL display device, a liquid crystal display device, or the like disposed in front of the reserved display area 461 . Also, the blindfold plate may be configured to cover the front of the plurality of hold icons 471 . Furthermore, it may be configured in a prism shape (unevenness shape) with a translucent material, or in a mesh shape, so that the mode of the pending icon 471 can be seen blurred. In addition, it may be configured so that the pending icon 471 always exists behind the blindfold plate set to the covering position, and the portion of the blindfold plate to which the pending icon 471 is not led out is also set to the covering position. Alternatively, when the blindfold plate is placed in the covering position, the blindfold plate may be used to indicate that there is a hold.

(u) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when the mode change (holding effect, etc.) of the holding icon 471 is performed in the holding display area 461, the holding icon It may be possible to display a visual change object whose visual appearance changes before and after the appearance of 471 is changed. In this case, while the player's attention is focused on the reserved display area 461, the visual mode changes quietly (without sound effects) in other parts of the decorative pattern display device 42, so that the player's When the attention shifts to the main display area 468, the user can be surprised and amused by noticing the change in the viewing mode.

(v) In the above embodiment, the main processing (see FIG. 9) is followed by the normal processing (see FIG. 10) in the main controller 261, but the configuration is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value, which is performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal processing in the above embodiment, is performed. The processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In addition, as the processing of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure is performed. A configuration can be mentioned in which a flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the processing of step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

(w) In the above embodiment, the hit/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is overwritten with information as to whether or not a big win will occur. is not limited to For example, in addition to the winning random number storage area, a storage area for storing information as to whether or not a jackpot state will occur may be provided for the execution area and each of the reservation areas of the special variation reservation area, or the special variation reservation may be provided. Separately from the area, a storage area corresponding to the execution area of the special variable reserve area and each reserve area may be provided, and information as to whether or not a big win state occurs may be stored in the storage area. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the type of the jackpot may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is confirmed again whether the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the confirmation process (the state of the success/failure flag, etc.) ), the pattern of the variable display and the like may be determined.

(x) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the said embodiment. For example, movable means ( a variable ball entry means comprising a feather member), a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball that has entered a specific area, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means is detected. specific ball entry detection means (condition fulfillment detection means), special start means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and detection of a game ball that has entered the special start means and a main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means and the non-specific ball entry means. A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are awarded to the player in either case, and the main control means activates the variable ball entry means for the first time based on detection by the special start detection means. or the variable ball entry means is opened for a second time longer than the first time, or the variable winning means is opened for a specified number of A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a big winning state by repeating this process for a specified number of times with one round until a game ball enters the ball, and when a small winning state is won in the winning lottery, a small winning state is generated, It may be applied to a game machine in which a big win state is generated when a big win is won in a winning lottery or when a specific ball-entering detection means detects a big win. In addition, in addition to pachinko machines, there are also arranged ball machines, various types of amusement machines such as majang ball similar to them, slot machines as reel-type amusement machines, and amusement machines that fuse slot machines and pachinko machines. You may

For example, when embodied in a slot machine, identification information (reels with various patterns, etc.) in the variable display means started based on detection of the start detection means that detects the operation of the start operation means (start lever). One game is until the variable display (rotation) is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means (stop button). Among the results based on various lotteries such as a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special state advantageous to the player such as replay time, a variable display is performed based on the detection of the start detection means. There is a procrastination result (which can be set as appropriate for each model from among the results of various lotteries, the results of lotteries to derive specific effects, etc.) that will be taught after a predetermined number of games. The content of the procrastination result may be configured to suggest or teach like the pending icon of the above embodiment, and an effect such as changing the order of the pending icon may be performed.

(y) In the above-described first embodiment, when the pre-reservation movement effect (the pre-reading target change effect of moving the pre-reading reservation icon 472 from the later position to the earlier position in the execution order of the variable display in the reservation display area 461) is performed. , The release flag is not set to ON unless the reservation flag is set to ON in advance, that is, it is configured so that the pre-retention movement effect is not performed, but the change information is newly stored in the reservation information storage area. At the new (newly suspended) stage, after deriving the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the change information, the prefetch pending icon 472 is set so as to correspond to the change information already stored in the pending information storage area. It may be configured to move as For example, when the execution flag is turned on, the type of look-ahead target change effect is determined, and when the move effect before holding is selected, the upper limit rank of the holding area in which the change information of the holding information storage area is stored When the storage area is referenced (from the one to be digested first) and the variation information of a predetermined rank or higher is confirmed, the variation information is set as the destination of the look-ahead suspension icon 472, and the upper limit rank or Based on the execution rank, it may be configured to determine the aspect of the prefetch pending icon 472 corresponding to the new pending (provided provisionally). In this configuration, even if the prefetching suspension icon 472 is not derived, the upper limit rank and the execution rank are determined and stored in correspondence with each variation information.

Also, regarding the pending exchange effect and the after-hold moving effect, instead of setting the first exchange flag and the pre-change flag in advance, a prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the pending display area 461 at the stage when the new pending is performed. If it is determined affirmatively, whether to derive an after-holding movement effect or a pending exchange effect, or simply turn on the execution flag to derive the look-ahead pending icon 472, or , it may be configured to determine whether to simply display the normal pending icon 471 . Also in this case, regarding the variable display stored in the pending information storage area, the upper limit rank and the execution rank are determined corresponding to each variable information in order to make it easier to grasp whether it is suitable as the target of the look-ahead target change effect. It is desirable that the

(z)
(z-1) In the first embodiment, the execution flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag are turned on in the pending information storage area prior to the pending prefetch effect lottery process (see pending icon setting process in FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not the set variation information is stored (whether the prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed in the pending display area 461), and if it is not stored, the pending prefetch effect is performed as in the above embodiment. If lottery processing is performed and stored, the reservation flag, pre-change flag, first exchange flag, and pre-change flag are not set to ON (so that only the execution flag may be set to ON) may be configured. In this case, in a state where three or more prefetching pending icons 472 are displayed in the pending display area 461, a prefetching target change effect unrelated (unrelated) to the prefetching pending icon 472 to be digested first is derived. Such situations can be avoided. Therefore, the prefetching target change effect is performed not on the prefetching suspension icon 472 that is digested first, but on the prefetching suspension icon 472 that is digested later, so that the interest of the player is changed to the prefetching suspension to be executed later. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the user leans toward the icon 472 and loses interest in the prefetch pending icon 472 that is digested first (the prefetch pending icon 472 loses its value and becomes useless). As a result, the variable display corresponding to the prefetch pending icon 472 can be sequentially enjoyed.

In addition, it may be configured so that there is a possibility that a plurality of pieces of variation information in which the reservation flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag are set to ON are held and stored. When the flag and the second exchange flag are set to ON, the change information to be digested first among the change information for which the reservation flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag are set to ON, is changed to the prefetch target It is configured so that the production is derived.

(z-2) In addition, for example, when performing a pre-holding movement effect, a holding exchange effect, and a post-holding movement effect, the pre-change flag, the first exchange flag, and the pre-change flag are set to ON before the change information. Whether the variation information in which the execution flag, the pre-change flag, and the first exchange flag are set to ON is stored for the variation display to be digested (whether the look-ahead suspension icon 472 is displayed in the suspension display area 461) It may be configured such that when it is determined whether or not and stored, the movement effect before holding, the exchange effect before holding, and the movement effect after holding are not performed. Even in this case, in a state where three or more prefetching pending icons 472 are displayed in the pending display area 461, a prefetching target change effect unrelated (unrelated) to the prefetching pending icon 472 to be digested first is derived. It is possible to avoid such a situation.

(z-3) Furthermore, as in the above (z-1) and (z-2), a prefetch pending icon corresponding to the variable information digested earlier than the variable information targeted for the prefetch target change effect 472 is derived, the prefetch target change effect is not performed. The prefetch target change effect may be set so as to be associated with the prefetch reserve icon 472 that is digested first among the prefetch reserve icons 472 displayed in . In that case, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the chances of deriving the look-ahead target change effect.

Specifically, for example, at the stage when a new hold is made, a right grant lottery (similar to the hold prefetch effect lottery process of the hold icon setting process in FIG. If the right grant lottery is won, it is determined whether to simply display the prefetching suspension icon 472 or to perform a prefetching target change effect.

Then, in the case of executing the “pre-suspension moving effect” of the prefetching target change effect, a process of searching for the movement destination of the prefetching suspend icon 472 is performed. In other words, since the look-ahead target change effect is a effect for increasing the expectation of a big win, for example, if there is no change information corresponding to the win or change information with an upper limit rank of 4 or more, the transfer effect before holding is derived. cancel. Also, even if the target variation information exists, it is the variation information of the prefetch pending icon 472 displayed in the pending display area 461, or the variation information digested later than the variation information. Also, the movement effect before holding is canceled. As for the processing related to the "pre-reservation movement effect", by setting the reservation flag in advance as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to avoid a situation where searching for the change information of the movement destination is useless. and efficient.

Further, in the case of performing the "post-suspend move effect" of the prefetch target change effect, a process of searching for the prefetch suspend icon 472 to be moved as the suspend icon 471 corresponding to the new suspend is performed. Here, confirmation of whether or not the prefetch pending icon 472 is displayed is performed in order from the variation information digested first. When the look-ahead suspension icon 472 is not displayed, the post-suspension movement effect is stopped. Further, when the look-ahead pending icon 472 is found, the corresponding variation information is referenced to determine whether or not the look-ahead pending icon 472 may be used in the post-hold move effect. Here, for example, if the game corresponds to winning or if the execution rank is 4 or higher, the movement effect after holding is stopped. In addition, it is confirmed only once whether the prefetching pending icon 472 can be used in the post-holding movement effect, and even if a plurality of the prefetching pending icons 472 are displayed, they are digested after the second one. No confirmation is made with respect to the prefetch pending icon 472 . In addition, regarding the processing related to the "post-suspend movement effect", as in the above-described embodiment, keeping in mind that there is a possibility that the prefetch suspension icon 472 will move later in response to different variation information, By setting the mode rank (execution rank) together with the setting of the reservation flag, for example, since the prediction reservation icon 472 of the movement source is actually high in the expectation of a big win, the movement is performed because the prediction reservation icon 472 is set. It is difficult to do so, or there is no chance to hold and store suitable fluctuation information that will make the expected degree of jackpot equal to or higher than that of the source as the destination before the source is completed. can be avoided, which is efficient.

Further, when executing the "suspended exchange effect" of the look-ahead target change effect, a process of determining two pieces of variation information to be subject to the pending exchange effect is performed. In other words, whether or not there is variation information from which the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived is checked from the side to be digested first. When the variation information from which the prefetching suspension icon 472 is derived is not found, the suspension exchange effect is stopped. On the other hand, when finding the variation information from which the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived, the first exchange flag of the variation information is turned on. Further, it is checked whether the prefetch pending icon 472 is derived for the remaining variable display, and if it is not found, the second exchange flag of the variable information of the new pending is turned on. At this time, the state of the new pending lookahead pending icon 472 is determined (forcibly overwritten) with reference to the upper limit rank of the variation information for which the first replacement flag is turned on. A pending exchange effect is performed in which the predictive pending icon 472 corresponding to the flag and the predictive pending icon 472 corresponding to the second exchange flag are exchanged. Incidentally, when the execution rank of the variation information corresponding to the first exchange flag is the same as the upper limit rank, the pending exchange effect may be canceled.

Further, after turning on the first exchange flag of the predetermined variation display, it is determined whether or not the prefetching suspension icon 472 is derived for all the remaining variation information, and the variation information for which the prefetching suspension icon 472 is derived. , and the change information with the highest execution rank is selected from the new pending change information, and the second exchange flag is turned on. If there are a plurality of pieces of variation information with the highest execution rank, the second exchange flag of the variation information to be digested first is turned on.

Furthermore, when the execution rank of the variation information with the first exchange flag turned on is compared with the execution rank of the variation information with the second exchange flag turned on, if the execution rank of the variation information with the second exchange flag is lower turns off the first exchange flag and the second exchange flag, and cancels the pending exchange effect.

By adopting this configuration, a prefetch target moving effect is performed that is not entangled with the prefetch pending icon 472 that is digested first, so that the player's interest is inclined toward the prefetch pending icon 472 that is executed later. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which interest in the prefetch pending icon 472, which is digested first, is lost. In addition, in the appearance of the reservation display area 461, by performing the look-ahead target change effect, the expectation of the big hit of the look-ahead reservation icon 472, which is digested first, becomes the highest at that time. , the variable display corresponding to the look-ahead pending icon 472 digested first can be surely enhanced.

The right giving lottery may be performed at the stage of performing the shift process, and if a lottery is won, two suitable pieces of variation information to be targeted for the look-ahead target change effect may be selected. In addition, when the prefetching target change effect is performed in a state where three or more prefetching pending icons 472 are displayed in the pending display area 461, at least among the plurality of prefetching pending icons 472, it is digested first. A process for configuring the prefetching suspension icon 472 to be the target of the prefetching target change effect, or the prefetching target change effect is performed , the effect is successful and the prefetch target change effect is performed), the aspect rank (jackpot expectation ) is the highest (it may be configured so that there is a prefetch pending icon 472 for a tie, or it may be configured so that there is no pending icon 472 for a tie). can be set as appropriate.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

A. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the shooting means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special game state, and the variable display means A variable display is provided to teach the result of the winning lottery (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, when a win/fail lottery is performed while a variable display is being performed, there are many configurations in which the variable display corresponding to the win/fail lottery is suspended. Such a gaming machine is generally provided with hold display means capable of deriving hold displays that make it possible to ascertain the number of hold variable displays. Furthermore, in a stage before execution of the suspended variable display, an effect suggesting the content of the predetermined variable display (so-called pending look-ahead effect) is performed for the suspended display corresponding to the predetermined variable display. there is something

In addition, in recent years, a plurality of starting ball entry means have been provided, and the type of special game state granted when winning in a winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means is sorted. Regarding, distribution based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry means makes it easier for the player to select a special game type that is more advantageous than distribution based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry means. There is such a thing as Further, in the pending display means, the suspended variable display is the first variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means and the entering of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means. In some cases, it is possible to identify which of the second variable displays is based on.

By the way, in a state in which a plurality of variable displays are suspended, if a pending look-ahead effect is performed for one of them, the player will not show much interest in the variable display that is excluded. There is concern that it will be lost. In other words, it is feared that while the interest of the variable display in which the pending look-ahead effect is performed increases in the player's mental image, the interest in the other variable displays decreases relatively, and this is not applicable. There is a risk of having a negative image when digesting the variable display (because you won't win anyway, you want it to end quickly).

In particular, for example, in a state in which both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended, a suspension look-ahead effect that raises expectations for the special game state is performed with respect to the suspension of the first variable display. In this case, the expectation of winning the second variable display, which tends to be more advantageous than the first variable display when winning the lottery, is relatively lowered. For this reason, there is a concern that negative images such as ``I wanted the suspension look-ahead effect to be derived for the suspension of the second variable display'' may occur, and as a result, there is a risk of causing a decrease in interest. .

The problem described above is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that can more reliably improve interest by performing a pending look-ahead effect. It is in.

Means A-1. a condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be generated when the condition establishment detecting means is detected, and the special game state is generated based on the result of the lottery. a main control means;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
A gaming machine comprising display control means capable of stop-displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery after variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means,
information acquisition means for acquiring win/fail-related information about the win/fail lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
holding storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the win/fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating that the win-or-fail related information is stored in the storage area of the pending storage means;
a pending look-ahead effect in which the mode of the pending display corresponding to the predetermined right/fail related information stored in the pending storage means is a specific mode suggesting the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display; ,
After the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first pending display corresponding to the predetermined win/fail related information, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed from the first pending display to the second pending display. , and a look-ahead target change effect in which the mode of the second pending display is the specific mode can be derived.

According to the means A-1, even if the pending look-ahead effect is not derived at this stage for the second pending display, the second pending display is executed before the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second pending display. The pending display to which the pending prefetch effect derived corresponding to the first pending display is derived is changed to become the second pending display, and the pending prefetch effect is derived corresponding to the second pending display. It is configured to leave such possibilities. Therefore, due to the existence of the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is derived and the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is not derived, the player's emotional interest in the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is not derived is relatively reduced. (If the specific aspect of the pending look-ahead effect suggests the degree of expectation for occurrence of a special game state, the degree of expectation of the pending display in which the pending look-ahead effect is not derived is relatively lowered), It is possible to avoid a situation in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to such a pending display has a negative image (because it will not hit anyway, so I want it to end as soon as possible). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the negative aspects of performing the pending prefetch effect, and by performing the pending prefetch effect, it is possible to improve interest more reliably.

It should be noted that "after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first pending display corresponding to the predetermined win/fail related information, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is shifted from the first pending display to the first pending display. 2 is changed to the pending display, and the mode of the second pending display is the specific mode" means that "after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first pending display corresponding to the predetermined success-or-failure related information, , a mode in which the pending prefetch effect related to the first pending display is erased and at least a part of the mode of the pending prefetch effect derived for the first pending display is taken over, or the same mode The pending prefetch effect is derived corresponding to the second pending display different from the first pending display among the pending displays displayed on the pending display means.

Further, it may be configured such that the pending prefetch effect can be derived for a plurality of pending displays. That is, for example, in a state in which the first pending prefetch effect with a high expectation of occurrence of the special game state and the second pending prefetch effect with a low degree of expectation for occurrence of the special game state are derived, the pending display targeted for the second pending prefetch effect is also displayed in the game. Although there is concern that the interest of the user tends to fade, by having the possibility of changing the target of the first pending prefetch effect and the second pending prefetch effect, it is possible to have expectations for any pending display. be able to.

Means A-2. The condition satisfaction detection means includes first condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied and second condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied,
Regarding the distribution of the type of the special game state to be awarded when winning in the winning lottery triggered by the detection of the condition establishment detection means, the distribution method corresponding to the detection of the second condition establishment detection means is configured to make it easier for the player to select a type that is more advantageous than the sorting corresponding to the detection of the first condition establishment detecting means,
In the pending display means, the number of storage areas of the pending storage means in which the win/fail related information is stored can be grasped by the mode of the pending display, and stored in each of the storage areas of the pending storage means. identifying whether the information about success/failure is the first success/failure-related information based on the detection of the first condition satisfaction detection means or the second success/failure-related information based on the detection of the second condition satisfaction detection means; configured to allow
the first pending display in a state where both the first pending display corresponding to the first right/fail related information and the second pending display corresponding to the second right/fail related information are displayed in the pending display means; After the pending prefetch effect is derived for, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is derived can be changed from the first pending display to the second pending display The gaming machine according to means A-1.

According to the means A-2, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second win-fail related information is performed rather than winning the special game state with the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first win-fail related information (first variable display). Winning the special game state in (second variation display) makes it easier for the player to select the type of special game state that is more advantageous for the player. I think I want you to win. However, for example, in a state in which both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended, there is a suspension look-ahead effect that increases the degree of expectation for the special game state with respect to the suspended display of the first variation display. If it is derived, there is a concern that the user will be disappointed because it would have been better if the pending look-ahead effect had been derived for the pending display of the second variable display. Furthermore, depending on the player, the degree of expectation for the special game state with respect to the suspended display of the first variable display from which the suspended prefetch effect is derived is increased, and the degree of expectation for the suspended display of the second variable display from which the suspended prefetch effect is not derived is increased. There is a concern that the player may get the impression that the degree of expectation for the special game state is relatively lowered. In this case, the negative image of the pending look-ahead effect becomes stronger, and as a result, there is a possibility that interest may be lost.

In this respect, as described in the above means A-1, even after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined win/fail related information, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived can be changed from the pending display corresponding to the predetermined win-or-fail related information to other pending display, even if the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first pending display of the first variable display , the target of the pending look-ahead effect can be expected to be changed from the first variable display to the second variable display. Therefore, the above concern can be dispelled.

Furthermore, for example, even if the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the second pending display of the second variable display, in the case where the possibility of being changed to the first pending display of the first variable display remains. can give a sense of tension to the playability. That is, when a pending look-ahead effect is derived to a desired pending display, the behavior of the pending display is eagerly confirmed and enjoyed, such as wanting the corresponding variable display to be digested without changing the derivation target. can be done. It should be noted that if the derivation target of the pending look-ahead effect does not change while the variable display is performed the specified number of times, it may be configured so that it does not change after that.

For example, after the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the pending display of the second variable display, the hold effect may be derived to indicate that no further changes are made. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of production opportunities and to give the privilege of a sense of security by deriving the hold production. Further, for example, the target of the pending prefetch effect may be changed from the first pending display to the second pending display, but is configured not to be changed from the second pending display to the first pending display. It can be assumed that there is In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is a pattern that is not pleasing to the player in the look-ahead target change effect in which the target of the pending look-ahead effect is changed. As a result, the look-ahead target change effect can be made a favorable phenomenon for the player, and the game property of expecting the occurrence of the pending look-ahead effect can be made more reliable.

Means A-3. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which the game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
starting ball entry detection means as said condition fulfillment detection means for detecting a game ball entering said starting ball entry means;
A configuration in which the winning lottery is performed when the starting ball detection means is detected,
The starting ball entry means is
A ball entry opening into which a game ball moving in a game area can enter at all times, a pair of left and right first and second entry openings into which a game ball entering the ball entry opening can enter, and a ball entry At least a specific starting ball entry means comprising a sorting device that alternately guides game balls that have entered the opening to the first winning opening and the second winning opening,
As the start ball entry detection means, a first start ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first winning hole is provided, and a second start ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second winning hole is provided. A starting ball detection means is provided,
The holding storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of pieces of first win-or-fail related information acquired based on the detection by the first start-up detection means, and the second start-up detection. configured to be able to store up to a predetermined number of second right/fail related information acquired based on the detection of the means,
Means A-2, characterized in that the first start ball entry detection means constitutes the first condition establishment detection means, and the second start ball entry detection means constitutes the second condition establishment detection means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means A-3, it is possible to alternately enter the game balls into the first winning hole and the second winning hole simply by entering the game balls into the specific start ball entering means, and the first win-or-fail relationship. The information and the second win/fail related information (variable display) can be efficiently retained and stored.

On the other hand, in the pending display means, there are more opportunities to display both the first pending display corresponding to the first right/fail related information and the second pending display corresponding to the second right/fail related information. becomes. Therefore, it is better to win the winning lottery triggered by the detection of the second condition establishment detection means than the case of winning the lottery triggered by the detection of the first condition establishment detection means. A player who recognizes that it is highly likely to be advantageous to the player gets tired of the fact that the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the first pending display, out of the first pending display and the second pending display, and is put on hold. There is a concern that the look-ahead effect will increase the possibility of causing a decrease in interest. In such a configuration, as described in the above means A-2, even after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first pending display, the derivation target of the pending prefetch effect is the first pending display. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the possibility of being changed to the second pending display is left, the above-mentioned problems can be greatly suppressed, and the effect of improving interest is achieved by performing the pending look-ahead effect. It will be played more prominently.

Means A-4 (control example 1, from rear to front). Each of the storage areas of the pending storage means is provided with derived information storage means for storing derived information relating to the status of derivation of the pending look-ahead effect,
When the success/failure related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means, a pending effect setting process for setting the pending prefetch effect corresponding to the win/fail related information is performed, and the pending effect setting process is performed. The result of is stored in the derived information storage means,
In the derived information storage means,
A pending effect execution flag indicating that the right to derive the pending prefetch effect has been obtained and exercised, and
The means A-1 to A-3 according to any one of means A-1 to A-3, characterized in that a holding effect reserved flag indicating that the right to derive the reserved prefetch effect is obtained and not exercised can be set. game machine.

According to the means A-4, even if the pending prefetch effect is not derived for the pending display at the time the pending display is derived, the pending prefetch effect is derived for the pending display at a later timing. be able to. As a result, the player's expectation that the pending look-ahead effect may be derived can be maintained until the variable display corresponding to the pending display is executed, and the performance of the pending look-ahead effect can improve the interest. The action and effect are further exhibited.

In addition, as in the above means A-1, even if it is possible to change the pending display that is the target of deriving the pending prefetch effect, the content of the variable display corresponding to the pending display after the change is changed to the pending prefetch effect. must be consistent with the suggestions of That is, for example, when trying to derive a pending prefetch effect afterward for a pending display corresponding to the winning-related information already stored in a predetermined storage area of the pending storage means, refer to the winning-related information (again). Then, it is determined whether or not the content is worthy of deriving the pending prefetch effect, and if a negative determination is made, the derivation of the pending prefetch effect is canceled or another storage area of the pending storage means. Regarding the success-or-failure-related information stored in the There is a concern that the processing of time) will become enormous.

In this respect, according to the means A-4, if the pending effect reservation flag that can be set when the win/fail related information is acquired is confirmed, whether the win/fail related information that can derive the pending prefetch effect is stored. can be easily comprehended. Therefore, since it is not necessary to perform processing such as continuing to search for right or wrong related information worthy of blindly deriving the pending prefetch effect, in the configuration for determining to perform the pending prefetch effect later, the process when it is determined It is possible to prevent a situation in which the process becomes complicated and in some cases causes a failure of processing or the like.

In addition, corresponding to the means A-2, "when the second right/fail related information is acquired and execution of the pending prefetch effect is determined, the corresponding second pending display is displayed in the pending display means, It is determined whether or not there is a possibility of being displayed together with the first pending display, and if it is determined that there is a possibility of being displayed, compared to the case where it is determined that it is not displayed, the pending effect reserved flag It may be said that the ratio of setting is increased. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of the most pleasing pattern among the prefetching target change effects, such as switching the target of the pending prefetching effect from the first pending display to the second pending display.

Means A-5. The derivation information storage means exercises the right to derive the pending prefetch effect with respect to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information for which the pending effect reserved flag is set is configured to be able to set a hold release flag indicating that
When the holding effect setting process is performed, the setting of the holding effect execution flag, the holding effect reservation flag, and the reservation cancellation flag is performed,
Each storage area of the pending storage means is provided with mode information storage means for storing mode information related to the mode of the pending look-ahead effect,
When the pending effect execution flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending prefetch effect is determined, and the mode information is the pending effect. In the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the mode information storage means in the storage area where the effect execution flag is set and stored in the storage area where the pending effect execution flag is set In contrast, the pending look-ahead effect of the determined mode is derived,
When the pending effect reserved flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending prefetch effect is determined, and the mode information is Stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area in which the effect reservation flag is set,
When the reservation cancellation flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored,
Stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area set with the reserved effect reserved flag for the reserved display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area set with the reserved cancellation flag set. The pending prefetch effect of the mode determined based on the state information is derived (as a temporary pending prefetch effect),
After that, the pending display from which the (temporary) pending prefetch effect is to be derived is set from the pending display corresponding to the win-or-fail related information in the storage area in which the reservation cancellation flag is set. Means A-4, characterized in that the temporary pending look-ahead effect is derived as a true pending look-ahead effect) corresponding to the win-or-fail related information in the stored storage area. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means A-5, the success/failure related information is stored regardless of the content after the success/failure related information with the pending effect reserved flag set, and the success/failure related information with the pending effect reserved flag is always stored. It is possible to avoid deriving the pending lookahead effect for the corresponding pending display. Furthermore, if the success/failure related information with the pending effect execution flag set is not stored after the success/failure related information with the pending effect reserved flag set, the pending display corresponding to the success/failure related information with the pending effect reserved flag set is displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pending prefetch effect is not derived. Thereby, after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined win/fail related information, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is replaced with the pending display corresponding to the predetermined win/fail related information. Therefore, it is possible to avoid too many, too few, or too unambiguous production opportunities such as changing to an earlier pending display. As a result, it is possible to improve performance and game performance.

In addition, when the reservation release flag is set in a state where the reservation effect reservation flag is set in the plurality of success related information stored in the reservation storage means, all the success/failure related information in which the reservation effect reservation flag is set It may be configured to derive a pending prefetch effect for the pending display corresponding to the information, or derive the pending prefetch effect only for one of the success-or-failure related information for which the pending effect reserved flag is set ( For example, it is determined whether or not the holding effect reservation flag is set in order from the newly stored one to the previously stored one, and at the stage when it is determined that the holding effect reservation flag is set, the holding effect It may be configured to end the confirmation processing of the effect reservation flag).

In addition, the upper limit of the number of times the target pending display is changed until the pending prefetch effect makes the final suggestion (it is regarded as a true pending prefetch effect) is not limited to once. , may be changed multiple times. It should be noted that the greater the number of changes in the pending display to be targeted, the higher the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state. is selected), the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state increases dramatically, or the occurrence may be determined.

It should be noted that "when the pending performance execution flag is set with respect to the winning related information newly stored in the storage area of the pending storage means, the winning related information for which the pending performance reserved flag has already been set exists, and if it is determined that it exists, regarding the win-or-fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the holding storage means (instead of the holding effect holding flag) It may be configured such that the reservation release flag can be set.

Means A-6 (control example 2, from front to rear). Each of the storage areas of the pending storage means is provided with derived information storage means for storing derived information relating to the status of derivation of the pending look-ahead effect,
When the success/failure related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means, a pending effect setting process for setting the pending prefetch effect corresponding to the win/fail related information is performed, and the pending effect setting process is performed. The result of is stored in the derived information storage means,
In the derived information storage means,
A pending effect execution flag indicating that the right to derive the pending prefetch effect has been obtained and exercised;
A pre-change flag indicating that the right to derive the pending prefetch effect has been obtained and exercised, but that the right may be transferred (that the target of the pending prefetch effect may be changed);
The right to derive the pending prefetch effect corresponding to the pre-change flag is transferred (for the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the pre-change flag is set It is configured to be able to set a change destination flag indicating that it is the change destination of the pending prefetch effect that has been derived,
A configuration in which the holding effect execution flag, the pre-change flag, and the change destination flag are set when the holding effect setting process is performed,
Each storage area of the pending storage means is provided with mode information storage means for storing mode information related to the mode of the pending look-ahead effect,
When the pending effect execution flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending prefetch effect is determined, and the mode information is the pending effect. In the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the mode information storage means in the storage area where the effect execution flag is set and stored in the storage area where the pending effect execution flag is set In contrast, the pending look-ahead effect of the determined mode is derived,
When the pre-change flag is set in the derived information storage means in the storage area in which the win-or-fail related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending look-ahead effect is determined, and the mode information is the pre-change With respect to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the flag is set and stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag is set, Deriving the pending look-ahead effect of the determined aspect,
When the change destination flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored,
The target of the pending prefetch effect derived for the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the pre-change flag is set is the pre-change flag to which the pre-change flag is set. The pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area is changed to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area in which the change destination flag is set. The game machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-5, characterized by:

According to the means A-6, the target of the pending prefetch effect derived for the pending display corresponding to the previously stored win-fail related information is changed to the pending display corresponding to the subsequently stored win-fail related information. can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which the target of the reserved look-ahead effect may be changed, to add tension to the progress of the game, and to suppress fatigue. In addition, since a plurality of pending displays are interlocked with each other, for example, compared to the case where each of the plurality of pending displays independently derives a pending read-ahead effect, it is possible to improve the performance.

Means A-7. The pending look-ahead effect suggests the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state according to its own aspect, and a plurality of patterns of aspects ranked according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state are prepared,
When determining the mode of the pending look-ahead effect, the upper limit of the rank is determined based on the win-or-fail related information, and the execution rank selected from among the ranks below the upper limit rank is configured to determine,
When determining the mode of the pending prefetch effect related to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the pre-change flag is set, when selecting the execution rank, the execution rank is determined to be equal to or lower than the upper limit rank. In addition to the conditions for
The pending prefetch effect in a mode corresponding to the execution rank is derived for the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the pre-change flag is set. The gaming machine according to means A-6.

A predetermined pending look-ahead effect derived for a pending display corresponding to predetermined success-related information stored in a predetermined storage area in which a pre-change flag is set is stored after another success-related information is stored. When the change destination flag is set in the storage area, the target of the predetermined pending prefetch effect is changed to the pending display corresponding to the other win/fail related information. Therefore, if the rank of the predetermined pending look-ahead effect mode is too high, the change destination flag cannot be set until the win/fail related information corresponding to the rank is stored pending.

On the other hand, as in means A-7, by setting the rank of the pending prefetch effect of the pre-change flag as low as possible, such concerns can be suppressed, and the situation where the opportunity for effect is extremely reduced is avoided. can do. Furthermore, since the derived mode rank is not high (and the conditions for setting the pre-change flag are limited to some extent), the pre-change flag is not set to ON, and the pre-change flag is set to ON. Even if the variable display corresponding to .

Means A-8. When the win/fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the reserve storage means corresponds to the occurrence of the special game state, the pre-change flag is not set for the win/fail related information. The gaming machine according to means A-6 or A-7, characterized by:

For example, although the pending prefetch effect that was derived in response to a predetermined pending display was changed to correspond to a later pending display, the pending prefetch effect that was originally derived was the predetermined A special game state occurred in the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display (no special game state occurs in the variable display corresponding to the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect was derived after the change). credibility may be severely compromised.

In this regard, according to the means A-8, when the pre-change flag is set, the success-or-failure-related information before the target of the pending prefetch effect is changed does not win in the success or failure lottery. The above concern can be dispelled by confirming that there is

In addition, before and after the special game state, in models where the judgment criteria for determining the mode of the pending look-ahead effect may change, "the win-or-fail related information for which the pending effect execution flag is set is the occurrence of the special game state. It is desirable to stop setting the pending performance execution flag with respect to the win/fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the pending storage means when it is determined to correspond to .

Means A-9. When it is determined to change the pending display that is the derivation target of the pending prefetch effect, while maintaining at least a part of the mode of the pending prefetch effect before the target of the pending prefetch effect is changed, The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-8, characterized in that the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed.

According to means A-9, even if the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed, at least part of the mode of the pending prefetch effect is maintained (for example, there is no change in mode, and the same Because of this, the pending look-ahead effect that until now corresponded to the first pending display was changed to correspond to the second pending display rather than to the first pending display. In addition, the content suggested by the pending look-ahead effect is not for the first variable display corresponding to the first pending display, but for the second variable display corresponding to the second pending display. can be made easier to understand.

Also, even if the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed, it is possible for the user to recognize that the mode of the pending prefetch effect and, by extension, the suggestive contents are followed. In other words, for example, when the target of the pending look-ahead effect that increases the expectation for the occurrence of the special game state is changed from the first pending display to the second pending display, the degree of expectation for the first pending display is lowered. become. Therefore, if the suggestive content of the pending prefetch effect derived for the first pending display (for example, the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state) is not secured, there is a concern that the player will have a sense of unease or distrust. be. In this respect, in this means, even if the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is derived is changed, the pending prefetch effect of the same mode is derived, so the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is derived is changed. However, when viewed as a whole pending display that is displayed, the effect (expectation of occurrence of special game state, etc.) due to the derivation of the pending prefetch effect does not change. Therefore, for example, not only the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed, but also the aspect of the pending prefetch effect is changed, so that the suggestive content of the pending prefetch effect becomes vague, or the pending prefetch effect becomes unclear. The value of the suggestive content of the production has changed, and where has the effect of the pending prefetching effect on the pending display (expectation of special game state, etc.) that was targeted before the change gone? Thus, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player has a sense of distrust or the like.

In addition, "when it is determined that the mode of the pending prefetch effect is changeable, the pending display to be derived from the pending prefetch effect is changed, and the mode of the pending prefetch effect is changed. while maintaining the mode of the pending prefetch effect before the target pending display is changed, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is derived is changed, and then the mode of the pending prefetch effect is configured to change." In other words, even in the above case, by temporarily following the mode of the pending prefetch effect before the change, it is possible to help the understanding that the mode of the pending prefetch effect has been changed and to suppress distrust and the like. can be done. In addition, the change in the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect in which the targeted pending display is changed is such that the content suggested by the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect becomes advantageous to the player or maintains the status quo. It may be limited. As described above, by associating the look-ahead target change effect with the state change (step-up) of the pending look-ahead effect, the step-up of the pending look-ahead effect may occur only by the occurrence of the look-ahead target change effect. A sense of expectation can be generated.

In addition, by configuring the mode of the pending prefetch effect to be changeable, for example, when there are a plurality of modes of the pending prefetch effect with different expectations for the occurrence of the special game state, a pending prefetch effect with a low degree of expectation is derived. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player becomes overwhelmed. In addition, "When the prefetch target change effect of changing the target of the pending prefetch effect is performed, the rate at which the pending change effect that changes the mode of the pending prefetch effect is performed is higher than when it is not performed. be enhanced or necessarily done". In this case, the value of the look-ahead target change effect can be further enhanced.

Means A-10. A connection for visualizing a process (midway) in which the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed from the pending display corresponding to the predetermined success-or-failure related information to another pending display in the pending display means. The game machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive an effect.

For example, when the pending prefetch effect that has been derived to a predetermined pending display suddenly disappears and the pending prefetch effect is suddenly derived to another pending display, the previous pending prefetch effect and the later pending prefetch effect are different. , are considered to be independent (not related at all). In particular, even if there is a slight time lag between the erasure of the pending prefetch effect that has been derived to a predetermined pending display and the derivation of the pending prefetch effect to another pending display, or if the predetermined pending display After deriving the derived pending prefetch effect to another pending display, when deleting the pending prefetch effect derived to a predetermined pending display (there is a period of overlapping derivation) , such concerns are made more pronounced.

On the other hand, according to the means A-10, the line of sight of the player can be guided from the pending display of the change source in which the target of the pending prefetch effect is changed to the pending display of the change destination by the connection effect. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the target of the pending read-ahead effect is changed. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not notice that the target of the pending look-ahead effect has been changed.

In addition, as a connecting effect, for example, before the change of the pending prefetch effect is performed, a character or the like is displayed in the pending display of the change source and the pending display of the change destination, and the change of the pending prefetch effect is performed. At the stage where the change is made, a display as if sending out a pending prefetch effect is performed in response to the pending display of the change source, and a display as if the pending prefetch effect was received is performed in response to the pending display of the change destination. may be In addition, as a connection effect, for example, from the pending display of the change source of the pending prefetch effect to the pending display of the change destination, a display that shows the trajectory of the movement of the mode of the pending prefetch effect (for example, the character is in the mode of the pending prefetch effect may be configured so that a display such as carrying the

Means A-11. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The display control means is configured to be able to change the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is derived, based on the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the means A-11, since the "prefetching target change effect" is performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to make the player more interested in the "prefetching target change effect", It is possible to suppress a situation in which the "look-ahead target change effect" is overlooked.

Means A-12. An approach detection means capable of detecting the contact or proximity of an object to the part where each of the suspension displays is displayed in the suspension display means,
The means A-1 to A-11 according to any one of means A-1 to A-11, characterized in that the pending display to be derived from the pending prefetch effect can be changed based on the detection information of the approach detection means. game machine.

According to the means A-12, since the "prefetching target change effect" is performed based on the player's operation to the approach detection means, it is possible to make the player more interested in the "prefetching target change effect". , it is possible to suppress the situation of missing the "look-ahead target change effect". In particular, since the player can directly touch the pending display with his/her hand, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the "look-ahead target change effect". Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations such as time running out due to confusion with such an operation, and game tempo becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such an operation. In particular, when the "look-ahead target change effect" is derived at the same time for multiple pending displays (selecting one of a plurality of them), the selection of the targeted pending display is easier to understand and more reliable. can be made to

Means A-13. The holding display means includes:
a pending display area for deriving the pending display corresponding to the success-or-failure related information for which the variable display of the corresponding identification information has not yet been performed;
means A-1 to A-1, characterized in that an execution correspondence area for deriving the pending display corresponding to the success-or-failure related information for which the variable display of the corresponding identification information is being executed is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of A-12.

According to the means A-13, in the pending display means, for example, immediately before the variable display of the corresponding identification information is executed, when the pending prefetch effect is changed for the corresponding pending display, the confirmation It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to confirm (cannot actually confirm). In addition, when the identification information is variably displayed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pending prefetch effect has been derived for the pending display corresponding to the variable display, and the type (suggestion content) of the pending prefetch effect. Various speculations can be made by combining the content of the look-ahead effect and the effect when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, so that the variable display can be enjoyed even more.

Incidentally, when the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect has been derived moves to the execution corresponding area, an effect in which the mode of the pending display changes may be derived. Further, when the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect has been derived moves to the execution corresponding area, only the aspect of the pending prefetch effect derived with respect to the pending display is displayed in the execution corresponding area. may

Means A-14. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-13, wherein the timing at which the pending look-ahead effect is derived in the pending display means is only the timing at which the pending display increases.

According to the means A-14, the timing at which the pending prefetch effect is newly derived is limited to the timing at which the pending display is newly displayed, thereby making it easier to notice that the pending prefetch effect has been derived. can be done. Therefore, for example, in a state in which only the pending display for which the pending prefetch effect is not derived is displayed, suddenly a predetermined To prevent a situation in which the pending look-ahead effect is confused and difficult to understand (it becomes difficult for the player to get involved) compared to the configuration in which the pending look-ahead effect is derived from the pending display. be able to. In addition, if the number of pending displays does not increase, the number of pending displays that are in the mode of the pending look-ahead performance does not increase, so that the willingness to increase the pending displays (to start entering the ball) can be further improved.

Means A-15. In the mode of the pending look-ahead effect, the win-or-fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means differs depending on the game state, and the win-or-fail related information differs depending on whether or not the win or fail lottery is won, and the game state changes. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-14, wherein the setting is based on the determination result of whether the result of the win-fail lottery is not different from the win-fail related information. .

For example, at a predetermined timing (for example, before and after a special game state, etc.), the probability of winning a lottery or the meaning of a pending prefetch effect may change. In that case, the pending prefetch that was displayed before the predetermined timing If the effect is derived as it is after the predetermined timing, there is a concern that a contradiction or the like will occur. For example, in a configuration in which the probability of winning by lottery before and after the special game state is changed, it was supposed to be won in the special game state before the special game state, but by inserting the special game state, the special game state is changed. If a pending prefetch effect indicating the occurrence of a special game state is continuously derived even after the special game state with respect to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information for which the game state is no longer won, the pending prefetch effect is not seen. If the special game state that should have been granted was not granted, there is a risk that trouble will occur.

In this respect, according to the means A-15, even if the game state (game mode) changes between the point in time when the win/fail related information is retained and the point in time when the variable display corresponding to the win/fail related information is executed, It is possible to preset the mode of the pending look-ahead effect so that it is possible (no trouble occurs). Therefore, when the game state changes, or when the timing when there is a possibility of change comes, it is possible to avoid the situation of reconfirming the mode of the reserved prefetch effect or resetting the setting from scratch. can be done. In addition, for example, when the meaning (interpretation) of the win/fail related information changes due to a change in the game state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the mode of the pending look-ahead effect is forcibly changed.

It should be noted that after the special game state ends, the mode of the pending look-ahead effect may be reset. In this case, in the stage before the special game state, even if various effects (for example, complex effects such as removing the correspondence relationship between the pending prefetch effect and the pending display) are performed using the pending prefetch effect, It can be reset after the special game state.

It should be noted that at the time when the win-or-fail related information is retained and stored, a first win-fail determination process for determining whether or not the win-fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means is for winning in the win-fail lottery; ,
a result storage process for storing the result of the first propriety determination process;
a second success/failure determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special game state based on the result of the first success/failure determination process, prior to execution of the variable display by the variable display means;
a variable display setting process for setting variable display based on the result of the second propriety determination process,
A first game mode in which the winning lottery is performed with a first probability predetermined as a probability of winning the special game state;
A second game mode in which the winning lottery is performed with a second probability that the probability of winning the special game state is higher than the first probability is configured to be settable,
In the first propriety determination process,
A common winning value determination process for determining whether or not the winning related information wins in the winning lottery in both the first game mode and the second game mode;
Limited winning value determination for determining whether or not the win/fail related information is a value for winning in the win/fail lottery in the second game mode and not winning in the win/fail lottery in the first game mode. processing;
a first determination result setting process for setting a first win/fail determination result holding means to an affirmative determination state when affirmative determination is made in the common winning value determination process;
a second determination result setting process for setting the second winning determination result holding means to the positive determination state when the limited winning value determination process yields an affirmative determination, in either the first game mode or the second game mode; even run
(In the second propriety determination process,
Determination of whether or not the first game mode, and mode determination processing of whether or not the second game mode,
When it is determined that it is the first game mode in the mode determination process, a first game mode success/failure determination process for determining whether or not the first success/failure determination result holding means is in a positive determination state;
When it is determined that it is the second game mode in the mode determination process, it is determined whether or not the first right/wrong determination result holding means or the second right/wrong determination result holding means is in the affirmative determination state. 2 a configuration for executing the game mode success/failure determination process,
The aspect of the pending prefetch effect may be set based on the determination state of the first right/wrong determination result holding means or the second right/wrong determination result holding means.

Means A-16. The holding display means
a first pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating the number of the storage areas of the pending storage means in which the win/fail related information is stored;
A second pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating that the win-or-fail related information is stored in the storage area of the pending storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-15, characterized in that the reserved prefetch effect can be derived from the second reserved display of the second reserved display means.

According to the means A-16, even if various effects are performed in the second pending display means and a scene occurs in which the correspondence relationship between the pending display and the pending variable display is somewhat difficult to understand, the first Whether or not the variable display is suspended by the suspension display means can be grasped with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom, performance, etc. of the hold prefetch effect in the second hold display means.

Means A-17. When the look-ahead target change effect is derived, a look-ahead change suggestion effect suggesting that the look-ahead target change effect is derived can be derived before the look-ahead target change effect is derived. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-16, characterized in that

According to the means A-17, it is possible to more actively appeal that the look-ahead target change effect is derived, and it is possible to make it easier for the user to visually recognize the look-ahead target change effect from the beginning.

Means A-18. The prefetch target change effect is targeted to the pending prefetch effect derived at least for the first pending display among the pending displays from which the pending prefetch effect is derived in the pending display means. The game machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-17, characterized in that it is performed as

According to the means A-18, the prefetch target change effect is performed for the pending display with the pending prefetch effect that is digested later than the pending display with the pending prefetch effect that is digested first. , the player's interest in the pending display with the pending prefetch effect that will be performed later, and the interest in the pending display with the pending prefetch effect that will be digested first (the value of the pending prefetch effect is It is possible to avoid situations such as being lost or wasted. As a result, the variable display corresponding to the hold display with the hold look-ahead effect can be enjoyed in order.

Means A-19. The pending look-ahead effect suggests the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state according to its own aspect, and a plurality of patterns of aspects ranked according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state are prepared,
When the prefetching target change effect is performed, the pending prefetching derived for the pending display to be digested first among the pending displays from which the pending prefetching effect is derived in the pending display means The gaming machine according to means A-18, wherein the aspect of the effect is configured to have the highest rank among the pending look-ahead effects derived by the pending display means.

According to the means A-19, the variable display corresponding to the hold display with the hold look-ahead effect that is digested first can be surely enhanced.

B. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the shooting means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special game state, and the variable display means A variable display is provided to teach the result of the winning lottery (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, when a win/fail lottery is held while variable display is being performed, many devices are configured to suspend the variable display corresponding to the lottery. Pending indication means are provided from which a pending indication can be derived. Furthermore, in some cases, an effect suggesting the content of a predetermined variable display (so-called “holding look-ahead effect”) is performed before the variable display is executed.

In addition, a low-probability mode that wins with a first probability in the lottery and a high-probability mode that wins with a second probability higher than the first probability in the lottery are set. On the other hand, it is known that a high ball entry mode in which a game ball is easily entered and a low ball entry mode in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball are set. Furthermore, it is known that the period of a specific game mode, such as a high probability mode or a high ball entry mode, which has a high added value for the player, is set until a specified number of variable displays are performed.

By the way, when the predetermined pending look-ahead effect is performed in the above-mentioned "specific game mode" and when performed in the other "normal game mode", the value (for example, Winning expectations, etc.) and meanings are different. For example, during the specific game mode, a special game state occurs just by deriving the pending look-ahead effect A, or occurs with a fairly high probability (for example, winning expectation is 70% to 95%). , In the normal mode, the possibility that the special game state does not occur is higher (for example, the winning expectation of the special game state is 25% to 45%). When the occurrence of the special game state is taught by the variable display, the specific game mode is given after the special game state ends, whereas in the normal game mode, the specific game mode is not always given. etc.

For this reason, immediately after switching from the specific game mode to the normal game mode, in general, the withholding display corresponding to the variable display executed in the specific game mode, and the normal game mode are executed in the holding display means In the state where the pending display corresponding to the variable display is displayed together, when the pending prefetch effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the normal game mode, to the pending display corresponding to the specific game mode There is a risk that the variable display corresponding to the pending display will have to be digested with a feeling of excitement that it would have been better if the pending look-ahead effect had been derived.

On the other hand, for example, from the specific game mode, the hold display corresponding to the variable display immediately after switching to the normal game mode (the hold display corresponding to the normal game mode displayed at the same time as the hold display corresponding to the specific game mode ), it is conceivable to perform control such as not to derive the pending prefetch effect. However, in this case, it is feared that a vicious cycle is caused in which the performance opportunity is lost and the amount of processing is increased.

The problem described above is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a game machine that can more reliably improve interest by performing a pending look-ahead effect. It is in.

Means B-1. a condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be generated when the condition establishment detecting means is detected, and the special game state is generated based on the result of the lottery. a main control means;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
A gaming machine comprising display control means capable of stop-displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery after variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means,
information acquisition means for acquiring win/fail-related information about the win/fail lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
a holding storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the win-or-fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating that the win-or-fail related information is stored in the storage area of the pending storage means;
A first game mode and a second game mode are set as the game state in which the winning lottery is performed,
In the pending display means, the number of storage areas of the pending storage means in which the win/fail related information is stored can be grasped by the mode of the pending display, and stored in each of the storage areas of the pending storage means. The said success-or-failure-related information is the (planned) first correspondence success-or-failure-related information in which the variable display of the corresponding identification information is performed in the first game mode, and the corresponding identification in the second game mode. It is configured to be able to identify which of the (planned) second correspondence right/wrong related information for which the information will be displayed in a variable manner,
a pending look-ahead effect in which the mode of the pending display corresponding to the predetermined right/fail related information stored in the pending storage means is a specific mode suggesting the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display configured to be derivable,
The predetermined pending prefetch effect is derived for the second corresponding pending display corresponding to the second correctness related information rather than being derived for the first corresponding pending display corresponding to the first corresponding correctness related information. The derived one is configured so that the value of the predetermined pending look-ahead effect is higher,
In a state where both the first corresponding holding display and the second corresponding holding display are displayed on the holding display means, after the holding prefetching effect is derived for the first corresponding holding display, the holding prefetching The gaming machine is characterized in that a pending display from which an effect is to be derived can be changed from the first corresponding pending display to the second corresponding pending display.

According to the means B-1, for example, in a state where both the first corresponding pending display and the second corresponding pending display are displayed in the pending display means, the pending prefetching derived for the first corresponding pending display It is configured to be able to stop deriving the effect A for the first corresponding reserved display and derive it for the second corresponding reserved display (look-ahead target change effect). In other words, it is preferable for the player to derive the pending look-ahead effect to the second pending display rather than to the first pending display. In the state where both are displayed, the pending prefetch effect is derived to the first corresponding pending display, so that the player says, "It would have been better if the target (timing) of the pending prefetch effect was a little off." I'm worried about getting emotional.

In this regard, even after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first corresponding pending display, the possibility remains that the target of the pending prefetch effect is changed to the second corresponding pending display. It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems such as being overwhelmed by being derived to the corresponding pending display, and it is possible to proceed with the game while expecting the pending prefetch effect to be derived to the second corresponding pending display. can. In particular, in a state in which the second corresponding reserved display is executed prior to the first corresponding reserved display, in order to derive the pending look-ahead effect to the second corresponding reserved display, first, a new Since it is premised that the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the first corresponding pending display to be displayed, the significance is simply that 'derivation of the pending look-ahead effect' is 'preferable for the player'. It can be performed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the negative aspects of performing the pending prefetch effect, and by performing the pending prefetch effect, it is possible to improve interest more reliably.

Further, in a state in which both the first-corresponding pending display and the second-corresponding pending display are displayed, the second-corresponding pending display does not derive the pending prefetching effect, and the first corresponding pending display derives the pending prefetching effect. In order to avoid the occurrence of such a situation, in a state in which both the first correspondence suspension display and the second correspondence suspension display are displayed, the suspension look-ahead effect is not derived for the first correspondence suspension display. There is no need to perform control (prohibition processing) such as Therefore, a vicious circle that does not contribute to the improvement of game performance and performance is avoided, such as intentionally crushing the performance opportunity of deriving the pending look-ahead performance to the first correspondence pending display and increasing the processing amount for that purpose. be able to.

Furthermore, when both the first corresponding pending display and the second corresponding pending display are displayed, there is a possibility that the target of the pending prefetch effect displayed in the first corresponding pending display changes to the second corresponding pending display. By being recognized by the person, the second game mode ends, and when the first game mode starts, "I want to display the first corresponding pending display that can be displayed together with the second corresponding pending display as much as possible". It is possible to increase the desire to play.

It should be noted that ``the value of the predetermined reserved prefetch effect is increased'' includes the meaning that the predetermined reserved prefetch effect has a more favorable meaning for the player even if the mode of the predetermined reserved prefetch effect is the same. For example, in the first game mode, it suggests that the winning expectation to the special game state is about 35%, and in the second game mode, it suggests that the winning expectation to the special game state is about 80%. In the first game mode, the winning expectation to the special game state is only improved compared to the case where it is not derived, but in the second game mode, when the special game state occurs, For example, there is a configuration that suggests that a special game state of a type that is more advantageous to the player is provided.

Further, "in a state in which both the first corresponding pending display and the second corresponding pending display are displayed on the holding display means, after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the first corresponding pending display, The pending display to be derived from the pending prefetch effect is configured to be changeable from the first corresponding pending display to the second corresponding pending display. After the pending prefetch effect is derived, the pending prefetch effect related to the first corresponding pending display is erased, while at least a part of the mode of the pending prefetch effect derived for the first corresponding pending display. or the same mode of the pending prefetch effect (the pending prefetch effect that has the same meaning as the pending prefetch effect that was derived for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined right/fail related information (the same) The effect or the above-mentioned reserved prefetch effect with higher value can be derived corresponding to the second corresponding pending display displayed on the holding display means.

In addition, the mode of the "suspended look-ahead effect" is not limited to a pattern in which predetermined information about variable display is suggested from the beginning of derivation. is derived in a manner suggesting that the It may be configured so that there is a case where the pending prefetch effect is simply deleted instead of being deleted by being changed.

It should be noted that "the second game mode is a state in which the probability of winning in the success or failure lottery is higher than the first game mode", or "a shooting means for shooting game balls and a game board A game area provided on the front side and guided by the game ball fired by the shooting means, a starting ball entering means for allowing the game ball moving in the game area to enter, and a ball entering the starting ball entering means. starting ball entry detection means as the condition establishment detection means for detecting the game ball that has been played, and the winning lottery is performed when the start ball entry detection means is detected, wherein the second The game mode may be a state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting ball entering means is higher than that in the first game mode", and "in the second game mode, the first game It may be a state where it is easy to derive an effect that is not derived in the mode or has a low probability of being derived. In this case, if a privilege advantageous to the player is given or is highly likely to be given, and the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the first game mode , the privilege is not granted, or the possibility of the privilege being granted is lower than in the first game mode."

Means B-2. The condition satisfaction detection means includes first condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied and second condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied,
Regarding the distribution of the type of the special game state to be awarded when winning in the winning lottery triggered by the detection of the condition establishment detection means, the distribution method corresponding to the detection of the second condition establishment detection means is configured to make it easier for the player to select a type that is more advantageous than the sorting corresponding to the detection of the first condition establishment detecting means,
The game machine according to means B-1, characterized in that the second condition is more likely to be satisfied in the second game mode than in the first game mode.

According to the means B-2, in the second game mode, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the first game mode, and a special game state of an advantageous type is more likely to be imparted. Therefore, in a state in which both the first corresponding holding display and the second corresponding holding display are displayed, the playability of expecting that the holding look-ahead effect will be derived to the second corresponding holding display becomes more reliable. Therefore, the action and effect of the means B-1 are further exhibited.

Means B-3. The holding display means sets a boundary between a range from which the holding display scheduled to be executed in the first game mode is derived and a range from which the holding display scheduled to be executed in the second game mode is derived. The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-2, wherein the boundary instruction to be taught is derived without changing the mode of the reserved display.

According to the means B-3, by visually recognizing the suspension display means, it is possible to more reliably grasp in which of the first game mode and the second game mode the variable display corresponding to the suspension display is performed.

Also, for example, by making the state of the pending display different, when teaching which of the first game mode and the second game mode the corresponding variable display is performed, the state pattern of the pending display becomes complicated ( There is a risk that it will be difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between various pending displays including aspects of look-ahead effects and various effects. Furthermore, the special game state is set in a state in which both the pending display corresponding to the variable display scheduled to be performed in the first game mode and the pending display corresponding to the variable display scheduled to be performed in the second game mode are displayed. If it occurs and the game mode changes as a result, the correspondence relationship between the game mode and the hold display will change after the special game state ends, so the hold display before the special game state will result in a contradiction. It ends up being what I was doing.

In this regard, by performing the boundary display regardless of the mode of the hold display, as in this means B-3, the above problems can be eliminated, and the game can be smoothly progressed in an easy-to-understand manner. . In addition, as the boundary display, in the pending display area, the range from which the pending display scheduled to be executed in the first game mode is derived, and the range from which the scheduled pending display to be executed in the second game mode is derived. For example, the background color may be changed by , or a line or the like may be displayed at the boundary of the range.

Means B-4. Means B-1 to B-1, characterized in that even if the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the second corresponding pending display, it is configured so that there is a possibility that it is changed to the first corresponding pending display. The gaming machine according to any one of B-3.

According to the means B-4, even if the pending prefetch effect is derived to the second pending display, there is a possibility that the derivation target of the pending prefetch effect is changed from the second pending display to the first pending display. By having, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the game. For example, when a pending look-ahead effect is derived to a desired pending display, the behavior of the pending display is eagerly confirmed and enjoyed, such as wanting the corresponding variable display to be digested without changing the derivation target. can be done. In addition, if a predetermined condition is cleared, it is possible to add a game feature such as exemption from such unfavorable changes for the player, thereby increasing the points for adding excitement to the game. In addition, if the derivation target of the pending prefetch effect does not change during the specified number of times of the variable display, it is configured so that it does not change thereafter, or a predetermined effect is derived as a result of a predetermined lottery. In such a case, it may be configured such that the change of the derivation target of the predetermined reserved prefetch effect is prohibited.

Means B-5. When it is decided to change the pending display that is the derivation target of the pending prefetch effect, while maintaining at least part of the mode of the pending prefetch effect before the target of the pending prefetch effect is changed, The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4, characterized in that the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed.

According to means B-5, even if the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed, at least a part of the mode of the pending prefetch effect is maintained (for example, there is no change in mode and the same Because of that), the hold look-ahead effect that until now corresponded to the first correspondence hold display was changed to correspond to the second correspondence hold display instead of corresponding to the first correspondence hold display. In addition, the content suggested by the pending look-ahead effect is not for the first variable display corresponding to the first corresponding pending display, but for the second variable display corresponding to the second corresponding pending display. can be made easier to understand.

Also, even if the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed, it is possible for the user to recognize that the mode of the pending prefetch effect and, by extension, the suggestive content are followed. In other words, for example, when the target of the pending look-ahead effect that increases the expectation for the occurrence of the special game state is changed from the first corresponding pending display to the second corresponding pending display, the expectation for the first corresponding pending display is lowered. become. Therefore, if the suggestive content of the pending look-ahead effect derived for the first corresponding pending display (for example, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state) is not secured, there is a concern that the player will have a sense of unease or distrust. be. In this regard, in this means, even if the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is derived is changed, the pending prefetch effect of the same mode is derived, so the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is derived is changed. However, when viewed as a whole of the pending display being displayed, the effect (expectation of occurrence of special game state, etc.) due to the derivation of the pending prefetch effect does not change. Therefore, for example, not only the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed, but also the aspect of the pending prefetch effect is changed, so that the suggestive content of the pending prefetch effect becomes vague, or the pending prefetch effect becomes unclear. The value of the suggestive content of the production has changed, and where has the effect of the pending read-ahead effect on the pending display (expectation of special game state, etc.) that was targeted before the change gone? Thus, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player has a sense of distrust or the like.

In addition, "when it is determined that the mode of the pending prefetch effect is changeable, the pending display to be derived from the pending prefetch effect is changed, and the mode of the pending prefetch effect is changed. while maintaining the mode of the pending prefetch effect before the target pending display is changed, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is derived is changed, and then the mode of the pending prefetch effect is configured to change". In other words, even in the above case, by temporarily following the mode of the pending prefetch effect before the change, it is possible to help the understanding that the mode of the pending prefetch effect has been changed and to suppress distrust and the like. can be done. In addition, the change in the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect in which the targeted pending display is changed is such that the content suggested by the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect becomes advantageous to the player or maintains the status quo. It may be limited. As described above, by associating the look-ahead target change effect with the state change (step-up) of the pending look-ahead effect, just by generating the look-ahead target change effect, the step-up of the pending look-ahead effect may occur. A sense of expectation can be generated.

In addition, by configuring the mode of the pending prefetch effect to be changeable, for example, when there are a plurality of modes of the pending prefetch effect with different expectations for the occurrence of the special game state, a pending prefetch effect with a low degree of expectation is derived. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player becomes overwhelmed. In addition, "When the prefetch target change effect of changing the target of the pending prefetch effect is performed, the rate at which the pending change effect that changes the mode of the pending prefetch effect is performed is higher than when it is not performed. be enhanced or necessarily done". In this case, the value of the look-ahead target change effect can be further enhanced.

Means B-6 (control example 1). Each of the storage areas of the pending storage means is provided with derived information storage means for storing derived information relating to the status of derivation of the pending look-ahead effect,
When the success/failure related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means, a pending effect setting process for setting the pending prefetch effect corresponding to the win/fail related information is performed, and the pending effect setting process is performed. The result of is stored in the derived information storage means,
In the derived information storage means,
A pending effect execution flag indicating that the right to derive the pending prefetch effect has been obtained and exercised, and
A holding effect reserved flag indicating that the right to derive the reserved prefetch effect is obtained and not exercised can be set. The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-5.

According to the means B-6, even if the pending prefetch effect is not derived for the pending display at the time the pending display is derived, the pending prefetch effect is derived for the pending display at a later timing. be able to. As a result, the player's expectation that the pending look-ahead effect may be derived can be maintained until the variable display corresponding to the pending display is executed, and the performance of the pending look-ahead effect can improve the interest. The action and effect are further exhibited.

In addition, as in the above means B-1, even if it is possible to change the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived, the content of the variable display corresponding to the pending display to be changed is changed to the pending prefetch effect must be consistent with the suggestions of That is, for example, when trying to derive a pending prefetch effect afterward for a pending display corresponding to the winning-related information already stored in a predetermined storage area of the pending storage means, refer to the winning-related information (again). Then, it is determined whether or not the content is worthy of deriving the pending prefetch effect, and if a negative determination is made, the derivation of the pending prefetch effect is canceled or another storage area of the pending storage means. Regarding the success-or-failure-related information stored in , the process of confirming the contents is continued until something worthy of deriving the pending look-ahead effect is found. There is concern that it will become

In this respect, according to the means B-6, if the pending effect reservation flag that can be set when the win/fail related information is acquired is checked, whether the win/fail related information capable of deriving the pending prefetch effect is stored. can be easily comprehended. Therefore, since it is not necessary to perform processing such as continuing to search for right or wrong related information worthy of blindly deriving the pending prefetch effect, in the configuration for determining to perform the pending prefetch effect later, the process when it is determined It is possible to prevent a situation in which the process becomes complicated and in some cases causes a failure of processing or the like.

In addition, if there is a pending prefetch effect (suspended prefetch fixed effect) that teaches that a predetermined state (special game state, etc.) is given, in a state where the pending prefetch fixed effect has already been derived, more It may be configured such that another pending look-ahead effect is not derived.

Means B-7. The derivation information storage means exercises the right to derive the pending prefetch effect with respect to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information for which the pending effect reserved flag is set is configured to be able to set a hold release flag indicating that
When the holding effect setting process is performed, the setting of the holding effect execution flag, the holding effect reservation flag, and the reservation cancellation flag is performed,
Each storage area of the pending storage means is provided with mode information storage means for storing mode information related to the mode of the pending look-ahead effect,
When the pending effect execution flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending prefetch effect is determined, and the mode information is the pending effect. In the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the mode information storage means in the storage area where the effect execution flag is set and stored in the storage area where the pending effect execution flag is set In contrast, the pending look-ahead effect of the determined mode is derived,
When the pending effect reserved flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending prefetch effect is determined, and the mode information is Stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area in which the effect reservation flag is set,
When the reservation cancellation flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored,
Stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area set with the reserved effect reserved flag for the reserved display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area set with the reserved cancellation flag set. The pending prefetch effect of the mode determined based on the state information is derived (as a temporary pending prefetch effect),
After that, the pending display from which the (temporary) pending prefetch effect is to be derived is set from the pending display corresponding to the win-or-fail related information in the storage area in which the reservation cancellation flag is set. Means B-6, characterized in that the temporary pending look-ahead effect is derived as a true pending look-ahead effect) corresponding to the win-or-fail related information in the stored storage area. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means B-7, just because the success-or-failure related information is memorized after the success-or-failure-related information with the pending effect reserved flag set, regardless of the contents thereof, the success-or-failure-related information with the pending effect reserved flag is always stored. It is possible to avoid deriving the pending lookahead effect for the corresponding pending display. Furthermore, if the success/failure related information with the pending effect execution flag set is not stored after the success/failure related information with the pending effect reserved flag set, the pending display corresponding to the success/failure related information with the pending effect reserved flag set is displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pending prefetch effect is not derived. Thereby, after the pending prefetch effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined win/fail related information, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is replaced with the pending display corresponding to the predetermined win/fail related information. Therefore, it is possible to avoid too many, too few, or too unambiguous production opportunities such as changing to an earlier pending display. As a result, it is possible to improve performance and game performance.

In addition, when the reservation cancellation flag is set in a state in which the reservation effect reservation flag is set in the plurality of success-related information stored in the reservation storage means, all the success-or-failure related information to which the reservation effect reservation flag is set It may be configured to derive the pending prefetch effect for the pending display corresponding to the information, or derive the pending prefetch effect only for one of the success-or-failure related information for which the pending effect reserved flag is set ( For example, it is determined whether or not the holding effect reservation flag is set in order from the newly stored one to the previously stored one, and at the stage when it is determined that the holding effect reservation flag is set, It may be configured to end the confirmation processing of the effect reservation flag).

In addition, the upper limit of the number of times the target pending display is changed until the pending prefetch effect makes the final suggestion (it is regarded as a true pending prefetch effect) is not limited to once. , may be changed multiple times. It should be noted that the greater the number of changes in the pending display to be targeted, the higher the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state. is selected), the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state increases dramatically, or the occurrence may be determined.

It should be noted that "when the pending performance execution flag is set for the winning related information newly stored in the storage area of the pending storage means, the winning related information for which the pending performance reserved flag has already been set exists, and if it is determined that it exists, regarding the win-or-fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the reservation storage means (instead of the reservation effect reservation flag) It may be configured such that the reservation release flag can be set.

Means B-8. determining whether or not there is a possibility that the corresponding second corresponding pending display is displayed together with the first corresponding pending display in the pending display means at the stage when the second correctness-related information is acquired; Means B-6 or B-, characterized in that, when it is determined that there is a possibility of being displayed, the rate at which the said pending effect reserved flag is set is increased compared to when it is determined that it is not displayed. 7. The gaming machine according to 7.

According to the means B-8, it is possible to increase the chances of generating the most pleasing pattern in the look-ahead target change performance such that the target of the pending look-ahead effect is switched from the first corresponding pending display to the second corresponding pending display.

In addition, "in the configuration in which the transition to the first game mode is performed by performing the variable display of the identification information in the second game mode for the first specified number of times,
Remaining measuring means capable of measuring the remaining number of times of the variable display of the identification information that can be executed in the second game mode;
a termination detecting means for detecting that the remaining number of times of the variation display of the identification information measured by the remaining measuring means is equal to or less than a second prescribed number of times;
When the second right-or-fail related information is acquired in a situation where the remaining number of times of variation display of the identification information measured by the remaining measuring means is determined to be equal to or less than the second prescribed number of times and equal to or greater than one. 3, the rate at which the reserved effect reserved flag is set may be increased as compared with the case where the second right/fail related information is acquired in a situation in which it is not determined.

In addition, "in the configuration that shifts to the first game mode by performing the variable display of the identification information in the second game mode the first specified number of times,
Remaining measuring means capable of measuring the remaining number of times of the variable display of the identification information that can be executed in the second game mode;
a termination detecting means for detecting that the remaining number of times of the variation display of the identification information measured by the remaining measuring means is equal to or less than a second prescribed number of times;
In a state in which the holding effect holding flag is set in the holding storage means,
In a situation where the remaining number of times of variation display of the identification information measured by the remaining measuring means is determined to be equal to or less than the second prescribed number of times and equal to or greater than 1, the lottery determines that the lottery results in winning or not winning. When the second success-or-failure related information is acquired, the rate at which the reservation release flag is set compared to the case where the second success-or-failure related information that results in a failure in the lottery is acquired in a situation where no determination is made. can be enhanced.

Means B-9 (control example 2). Each of the storage areas of the pending storage means is provided with derived information storage means for storing derived information relating to the status of derivation of the pending look-ahead effect,
When the success/failure related information is stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means, a pending effect setting process for setting the pending prefetch effect corresponding to the win/fail related information is performed, and the pending effect setting process is performed. The result of is stored in the derived information storage means,
In the derived information storage means,
A pending effect execution flag indicating that the right to derive the pending prefetch effect has been obtained and exercised;
A pre-change flag indicating that the right to derive the pending prefetch effect has been obtained and exercised, but that the right may be transferred (that the target of the pending prefetch effect may be changed);
The right to derive the pending prefetch effect corresponding to the pre-change flag is transferred (for the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the pre-change flag is set A change destination flag indicating that the derived pending prefetch effect is a change destination) can be set,
A configuration in which the holding effect execution flag, the pre-change flag, and the change destination flag are set when the holding effect setting process is performed,
Each storage area of the pending storage means is provided with mode information storage means for storing mode information related to the mode of the pending look-ahead effect,
When the pending effect execution flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending prefetch effect is determined, and the mode information is the pending effect. In the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the mode information storage means in the storage area where the effect execution flag is set and stored in the storage area where the pending effect execution flag is set In contrast, the pending look-ahead effect of the determined mode is derived,
When the pre-change flag is set in the derived information storage means in the storage area in which the win-or-fail related information is newly stored, the mode of the pending look-ahead effect is determined, and the mode information is the pre-change With respect to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the mode information storage means of the storage area where the flag is set and stored in the storage area where the pre-change flag is set, Deriving the pending look-ahead effect of the determined aspect,
When the change destination flag is set in the derived information storage means of the storage area in which the win/fail related information is newly stored,
The target of the pending prefetch effect derived for the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the pre-change flag is set is the pre-change flag to which the pre-change flag is set. The pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area is changed to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area in which the change destination flag is set. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-8, characterized by:

According to the means B-9, the object of the pending prefetch effect that has been derived for the pending display corresponding to the previously stored win/fail related information is changed to the pending display corresponding to the subsequently stored win/fail related information. can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which the target of the reserved look-ahead effect may be changed, to add tension to the progress of the game, and to suppress fatigue. Further, for example, in a state in which a pending look-ahead effect has already been derived for a predetermined pending display, information that is more advantageous to the player for the subsequent pending display (for example, when the provision of a special game state or the like is confirmed) If it is decided to derive the pending prefetch effect that is suggested or taught, the pending prefetch effect that is already derived is changed, and then the pending prefetch It is possible to derive a series of aspects, such as the production being promoted to a more advantageous aspect for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect, etc., as compared with the case of independently deriving the pending look-ahead effect in each of the plurality of pending displays.

It should be noted that if "it is determined whether or not the win-or-fail related information already set with the pending effect execution flag exists, and it is determined that it exists", "a new The pre-change flag may be always set with respect to the win-or-fail related information stored in ", or "(based on a predetermined lottery) instead of the pending effect execution flag, the pre-change flag There may be a case of setting and a case of continuing to set the pending effect execution flag as it is."

In addition, when "the pre-change flag is set with respect to the success/failure related information newly stored in the storage area of the suspension storage means", "the suspension effect execution flag has already been set In determining whether or not the win/fail related information exists, regarding the win/fail related information determined to exist, a scheduled erasure flag is set in place of the pending effect execution flag, and then the pending prefetch effect is set. is changed from pending display corresponding to the success-or-failure-related information for which the flag to be deleted is set to pending display for the success-or-failure-related information for which the pre-change flag is set. It may be "to be done".

In addition, ``when the pending effect execution flag is set with respect to the win-or-fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the pending storage means'' is not limited to ``when it is set''. , "If it is determined as 'not existing' in determining whether or not the win-or-fail related information for which the pending effect execution flag is already set exists, the pending effect execution flag is set. The purpose is to include "when it is certain that

Means B-10. The pending look-ahead effect suggests the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state according to its own aspect, and a plurality of patterns of aspects ranked according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state are prepared,
When determining the mode of the pending look-ahead effect, the upper limit of the rank is determined based on the win-or-fail related information, and the execution rank selected from among the ranks below the upper limit rank is configured to determine,
When determining the mode of the pending prefetch effect related to the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the pre-change flag is set, when selecting the execution rank, the execution rank is determined to be equal to or lower than the upper limit rank. In addition to the conditions for
The pending prefetch effect in a mode corresponding to the execution rank is derived for the pending display corresponding to the win/fail related information stored in the storage area to which the pre-change flag is set. The gaming machine according to means B-9.

A predetermined pending look-ahead effect derived for a pending display corresponding to predetermined success-related information stored in a predetermined storage area in which a pre-change flag is set is stored after another success-related information is stored. When the change destination flag is set in the storage area, the target of the predetermined pending prefetch effect is changed to the pending display corresponding to the other win/fail related information. Therefore, if the rank of the predetermined reserved look-ahead effect mode is too high, the change destination flag cannot be set until the winning/failure-related information corresponding to the rank is reserved and stored.

On the other hand, by setting the rank of the pending look-ahead effect of the pre-change flag as low as possible as in the means B-10, such concerns can be suppressed, and the situation where the chance of the effect is extremely reduced can be avoided. can do.

Means B-11. When the win/fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the reserve storage means corresponds to the occurrence of the special game state, the pre-change flag is not set for the win/fail related information. The gaming machine according to means B-9 or B-10, characterized by:

Before and after the change of the pending display that is the target of deriving the pending prefetch effect, for example, if the winning lottery based on the winning related information is changed from "missing" to "missing" or "missing" There is no problem if it is changed from "" to "hit". That is, for example, although the pending prefetch effect that was derived corresponding to the predetermined pending display was changed to correspond to the later pending display, the pending prefetch effect was originally derived. A special game state occurs in the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined pending display (a special game state does not occur in the variable display corresponding to the pending display from which the pending look-ahead effect is derived after the change). There is a possibility that the credibility of the look-ahead effect will be remarkably lowered.

In this regard, according to the means B-11, the win-or-fail related information before the target of the pending prefetch effect is changed does not win the lottery The above concern can be dispelled because it is confirmed that it is information related to whether the information is correct or not.

In addition, before and after the special game state, in models where the judgment criteria for determining the mode of the pending look-ahead effect may change, "the win-or-fail related information for which the pending effect execution flag is set indicates that the special game state has occurred. It is desirable to stop setting the pending performance execution flag with respect to the win/fail related information newly stored in the storage area of the pending storage means, when it is determined that it corresponds to

In addition, "at the stage when the first right/fail related information is acquired, whether or not there is a possibility that the corresponding first correspondence pending display is displayed together with the second correspondence pending display in the holding display means If it is determined that there is a possibility of being displayed, the ratio of setting the pre-change flag is increased compared to the case that it is determined that it is not displayed. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of the most pleasing pattern among prefetch target change effects such as switching the target of the pending prefetch effect from the first corresponding pending display to the second corresponding pending display.

Means B-12. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which the game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
starting ball entry detection means as said condition fulfillment detection means for detecting a game ball entering said starting ball entry means;
The main control means is configured to perform the winning lottery when the starting ball detection means detects,
The start-up ball entry means comprises a first start-up ball entry means and a second start-up ball entry means,
Regarding the sorting of the type of the special game state given when winning in the winning lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means, the entry to the second start ball entry means Sorting based on the ball is configured to make it easier for the player to select a more advantageous type than sorting based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering means,
In the pending display means, the number of storage areas of the pending storage means in which the win/fail related information is stored can be grasped by the mode of the pending display, and stored in each of the storage areas of the pending storage means. The said success-or-failure-related information that has been set is the first success-or-failure-related information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means, and the second entry based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means. It is configured to be able to identify which of the 2 right or wrong related information,
the first pending display in a state where both the first pending display corresponding to the first right/fail related information and the second pending display corresponding to the second right/fail related information are displayed in the pending display means; After the pending prefetch effect is derived for, the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is derived can be changed from the first pending display to the second pending display The gaming machine according to means A-1.

The game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-11, characterized in that

According to the means B-12, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second win/fail related information is performed rather than winning the special game state with the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first win/fail related information (first variable display). Winning the special game state in (second variation display) makes it easier for the player to select the type of special game state that is more advantageous for the player. think you want However, for example, in a state in which both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended, there is a suspension look-ahead effect that increases the degree of expectation for the special game state with respect to the suspended display of the first variation display. If it is derived, there is a concern that the user will be disappointed because it would have been better if the pending look-ahead effect had been derived for the pending display of the second variable display. Furthermore, depending on the player, the degree of expectation for the special game state with respect to the suspended display of the first variable display from which the suspended prefetch effect is derived is increased, and the degree of expectation for the suspended display of the second variable display from which the suspended prefetch effect is not derived is increased. There is a concern that the player may get the impression that the degree of expectation for the special game state is relatively lowered. In this case, the negative image of the pending look-ahead effect becomes stronger, and as a result, there is a possibility that interest may be lost.

In this regard, according to this means B-12, even if the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the pending display of the first variable display, the target of the pending look-ahead effect is changed from the first variable display to the second variable display. You can have expectations of what you can do. Therefore, the above concern can be dispelled.

It should be noted that, for example, after the pending look-ahead effect is derived for the pending display of the second variable display, a hold effect indicating that no further change is performed may be derived. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of production opportunities and to give the privilege of a sense of security by deriving the hold production. Also, for example, the target of the pending look-ahead effect may be changed from the first-response pending display to the second-response pending display. It may be configured as In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is a pattern that is not pleasing to the player in the look-ahead target change effect in which the target of the pending look-ahead effect is changed. As a result, the look-ahead target change effect can be made a favorable phenomenon for the player, and the game property of expecting the occurrence of the pending look-ahead effect can be made more reliable.

It should be noted that, in the second game mode, it may be possible to improve the easiness of entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering means as compared with the first game mode.

Means B-13. A connection for visualizing a process (midway) in which the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed from the pending display corresponding to the predetermined success-or-failure related information to another pending display in the pending display means. The game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-12, characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive an effect.

For example, when the pending prefetch effect that has been derived to a predetermined pending display suddenly disappears and the pending prefetch effect is suddenly derived to another pending display, the previous pending prefetch effect and the later pending prefetch effect are different. , are considered to be independent (not related at all). In particular, if there is even a slight time lag between when the pending prefetch effect that has been derived to a predetermined pending display is erased and until the pending prefetch effect is derived to another pending display, or if the predetermined pending display In the case where the pending prefetch effect that has been derived to a predetermined pending display is erased after deriving the derived pending prefetch effect to another pending display (there is a period of duplicate derivation) , such concerns are made more pronounced.

On the other hand, according to the means B-13, the line of sight of the player can be guided from the pending display of the change source in which the target of the pending prefetch effect is changed to the pending display of the change destination by the connection effect. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the target of the pending read-ahead effect is changed.

In addition, as a connection effect, for example, before the change of the pending prefetch effect is performed, a character or the like is displayed in the pending display of the change source and the pending display of the change destination, and the change of the pending prefetch effect is performed. In the stage where the change is made, display as if sending out the pending prefetch effect in response to the pending display of the change source, and display as if the pending prefetch effect was received in response to the pending display of the change destination. may be In addition, as a connection effect, for example, from the pending display of the change source of the pending prefetch effect to the pending display of the change destination, a display that shows the trajectory of the movement of the mode of the pending prefetch effect (for example, the character is in the mode of the pending prefetch effect may be configured so that a display such as carrying the

Means B-14. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The display control means is configured to be able to change the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is derived, based on the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the means B-14, since the "prefetching target change effect" is performed based on the player's operation on the operating means, it is possible to make the player more interested in the "prefetching target change effect", It is possible to suppress a situation in which the "look-ahead target change effect" is overlooked.

Means B-15. An approach detection means capable of detecting the contact or proximity of an object to the part where each of the suspension displays is displayed in the suspension display means,
According to any one of the means B-1 to B-14, the pending display to be derived from the pending prefetch effect can be changed based on the detection information of the approach detection means. game machine.

According to the means B-15, since the ``prefetching target change effect'' is performed based on the player's operation to the approach detection means, it is possible to make the player more interested in the ``prefetching target change effect''. , it is possible to suppress a situation in which the user misses the "look-ahead target change effect". In particular, since the player can directly touch the pending display with his/her hand, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the "look-ahead target change effect". Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations such as time running out due to confusion with such an operation, and game tempo becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such an operation. In particular, when the "look-ahead target change effect" is derived at the same time for multiple pending displays (selecting one of a plurality of them), the selection of the targeted pending display is easier to understand and more reliable. can be made to

Means B-16. The holding display means includes:
a pending display area for deriving the pending display corresponding to the success-or-failure related information for which the variable display of the corresponding identification information has not yet been performed;
means B-1 to B-1, characterized in that an execution correspondence area for deriving the pending display corresponding to the success-or-failure related information for which the variable display of the corresponding identification information is being executed is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of B-15.

According to the means B-16, in the pending display means, for example, immediately before the variable display of the corresponding identification information is executed, if the pending prefetch effect is changed for the corresponding pending display, the confirmation It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to confirm (cannot actually confirm). In addition, when the identification information is variably displayed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pending prefetch effect has been derived for the pending display corresponding to the variable display, and the type (suggestion content) of the pending prefetch effect. Various speculations can be made by combining the content of the look-ahead effect and the effect when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, so that the variable display can be enjoyed even more.

Incidentally, when the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect has been derived moves to the execution corresponding area, an effect in which the mode of the pending display changes may be derived. Further, when the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect has been derived moves to the execution corresponding area, only the aspect of the pending prefetch effect derived with respect to the pending display is displayed in the execution corresponding area. may

Means B-17. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-16, wherein the timing at which the pending look-ahead effect is derived in the pending display means is only the timing at which the pending display increases.

According to the means B-17, the timing at which the pending look-ahead effect is newly derived is limited to the timing at which the pending display is newly displayed, thereby making it easier to notice that the pending look-ahead effect has been derived. can be done. Therefore, for example, in a state in which only the pending display for which the pending prefetch effect is not derived is displayed, suddenly a predetermined To prevent a situation in which the pending look-ahead effect is confused and difficult to understand (it becomes difficult for the player to get involved) compared to the configuration in which the pending look-ahead effect is derived from the pending display. be able to.

Means B-18. In the mode of the pending look-ahead effect, the success-or-failure-related information acquired by the information acquisition means differs depending on whether or not the success-or-fail lottery is won in accordance with the game state, and the game state changes. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-17, wherein the setting is based on the determination result of whether the result of the winning lottery is the same as the winning related information. .

For example, at a predetermined timing (for example, before and after a special game state, etc.), the probability of winning a lottery or the meaning of a pending prefetch effect may change. In that case, the pending prefetch that was displayed before the predetermined timing If the effect is derived as it is after the predetermined timing, there is a concern that a contradiction or the like will occur. For example, in a configuration in which the probability of winning by lottery before and after the special game state is changed, it was supposed to be won in the special game state before the special game state, but by inserting the special game state, the special game state is changed. If a pending prefetch effect indicating the occurrence of a special game state is continuously derived even after the special game state with respect to the pending display corresponding to the win-or-fail related information that no longer wins the game state, the pending prefetch effect is not seen. If the special game state that should have been granted was not granted, there is a risk that trouble will occur.

In this regard, according to the means B-18, even if the game state (game mode) changes between the point in time when the win/fail related information is retained and the point in time when the variable display corresponding to the win/fail related information is executed, it can be dealt with. It is possible to preset the mode of the pending look-ahead effect so that it is possible (no trouble occurs). For this reason, when the game state changes or when the timing when there is a possibility of change comes, it is possible to avoid the situation of reconfirming the mode of the pending prefetch effect or resetting the setting from scratch. can be done. In addition, for example, when the meaning (interpretation) of the win-or-fail related information changes due to a change in the game state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the mode of the pending look-ahead effect is forcibly changed.

It should be noted that after the special game state ends, the state of the pending look-ahead effect may be reset. In this case, in the stage before the special game state, even if various effects (for example, complex effects such as removing the correspondence relationship between the pending prefetch effect and the pending display) are performed using the pending prefetch effect, It can be reset after the special game state.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special game state is to be generated, and a variable display means is displayed. A variable display is provided to teach the result of the lottery (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, when a win/fail lottery is performed while a variable display is being performed, there are many configurations in which the variable display corresponding to the win/fail lottery is suspended. Such a gaming machine is generally provided with hold display means capable of deriving hold displays that make it possible to ascertain the number of hold variable displays. Furthermore, in the stage before execution of the suspended variable display, an effect suggesting the content of the predetermined variable display (so-called pending look-ahead effect) is performed for the suspended display corresponding to the predetermined variable display. there is something

By the way, when the holding display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of holding displays from which the holding prefetch effects are derived, the combination of the holding prefetch effects displayed on the holding display means or the like may change the player's mental image of the holding prefetch effects. It can be very different. For example, a case where only a reserved prefetch effect A in which the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state is slightly increased is displayed in the reserve display means, and a case where the reserved prefetch effect in which the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state is higher than that of the reserved prefetch effect A is displayed. It is conceivable that the expectation for the pending prefetch effect A is greatly different from the case where the pending prefetch effect A is displayed together with B. That is, it is conceivable that the former reserved look-ahead effect A can be expected, but the latter reserved look-ahead effect A cannot be expected. In particular, the closer the interval between the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect A is derived and the pending display from which the pending prefetch effect B is derived, the stronger the impression that the two are related to each other, and the above tendency is stronger. may become Therefore, even if the reserved look-ahead effect is derived with great effort, there is a concern that the effect may be reduced depending on the situation, or that the reserved look-ahead effect may have a negative image.

The problem described above is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a game machine that can more reliably improve interest by performing a pending look-ahead effect. It is in.

Means C-1. a condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be generated when the condition establishment detecting means is detected, and the special game state is generated based on the result of the lottery. a main control means;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
A gaming machine comprising display control means capable of stop-displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery after variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means,
information acquisition means for acquiring win/fail-related information about the win/fail lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
holding storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the win/fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating that the win-or-fail related information is stored in the storage area of the pending storage means;
a pending look-ahead effect in which the mode of the pending display corresponding to the predetermined right/fail related information stored in the pending storage means is a specific mode suggesting the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display configured to be derivable,
In the state where the pending display means derives a first pending look-ahead effect suggesting at least the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first pending display (relative to the first pending display), 2. When the right to derive the second reserved prefetch effect suggesting the contents of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second reserved display is granted, the second reserved prefetch effect is given to the second reserved display. A first emergence lottery process is performed to determine whether to exercise the right to derive,
When the decision to exercise the right is made in the first appearing lottery process, the second pending look-ahead effect is derived for the second pending display,
When a decision is made not to exercise the right in the first appearing lottery process, a standby state is stored that the right to derive the second reserved look-ahead effect is obtained but not exercised. A configuration for storing in the means,
In the first appearing lottery process, the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first reserved display is executed, and the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second reserved display is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the winning probability in the first appearing lottery process is lower when the difference between the numbers is less than a specified number compared to when the difference is equal to or greater than the specified number.

For example, when a pending prefetch effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for the special game state and a pending prefetch effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for the special game state are derived in succession, Not only does the user not have any expectations for the variable display corresponding to the look-ahead effect, but there is also a concern that the user may have a bad impression, such as not wanting to spend time on the variable display.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such a situation, when the pending prefetch effect is not derived from a plurality of pending displays, the chances of the pending prefetch effect are reduced, and the effect of deriving the pending prefetch effect is very high. Even in such a case (for example, the corresponding variable display corresponds to a special game state, etc.), it is a state in which the pending look-ahead effect has already been derived, so that it cannot be derived, resulting in a significant loss in the effect of the effect. There is a risk.

Furthermore, for example, when deriving a new pending prefetch effect in a state where the pending prefetch effect has already been derived, the pattern of the new pending prefetch effect is determined by looking at the contents of the variable display corresponding to the previous pending prefetch effect. It is conceivable to change it to something that does not interfere. In this case, there is a concern that a combination of a plurality of pending look-ahead effects may cause the player to see through the contents of the corresponding variable display. For example, when a plurality of pending look-ahead effects are derived in succession, it is conceivable that at least the variable display corresponding to the previous pending look-ahead effect is not won in the special game state.

In this regard, according to the means C-1, when the right to derive a new pending prefetch effect is obtained in a state where the pending prefetch effect has already been derived, the interval from the previous pending prefetch effect (as a variable display It is configured to determine whether to derive a new pending look-ahead effect or postpone the derivation (standby with the right to derive) according to the difference in execution order). . That is, when a plurality of pending read-ahead effects are derived to the pending display means, the intervals between the reserved read-ahead effects can be adjusted so that the respective reserved read-ahead effects can be arranged relative to each other as much as possible.

Therefore, by making it possible to derive a pending prefetch effect for a plurality of pending displays in the pending display means, it is possible to improve the performance, and for example, a plurality of pending results from which the pending prefetch effect is derived in the pending display means To reduce a situation in which the contents and results of corresponding variable displays are transparent and uninteresting due to the display intervals becoming too close, and the performance effect and the significance of existence of each pending read-ahead performance are lowered. can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the negative aspects of performing the pending read-ahead effect, and it is possible to more reliably combine the pending read-ahead effect and the improvement of interest.

In addition, when a decision is made not to exercise the right to derive the second reserved look-ahead effect in the first appearing lottery process, the right is carried over rather than discarded. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of deriving the pending look-ahead effect.

In addition, "in the first appearing lottery process, the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first reserved display is executed and the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second reserved display are executed. When the difference between the order and the order of winning is less than the specified number, the probability of winning in the first appearance lottery process is lower than when the difference is equal to or greater than the specified number. , "the difference between the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first reserved display is executed and the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second reserved display is executed is a specified number; In the case of less than, it is configured not to win in the appearance lottery process".

Means C-2. When it is stored in the standby state storage means that it is in the standby state, whether or not to exercise the right to derive the already obtained second pending look-ahead effect for the third pending display configured to be able to execute a second appearance lottery process to determine,
When the decision to exercise the right is made in the second appearing lottery process, the second pending look-ahead effect is derived for the third pending display,
When a decision is made not to exercise the right in the second appearing lottery process, the storage state of the standby state storage means is maintained,
In the second appearing lottery process, the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first reserved display is executed, and the order in which the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the third reserved display is executed. Means C- characterized in that when the difference between the 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to means C-2, the number of times the right to derive the second reserved look-ahead effect is carried over can be set to a plurality of times instead of once. Therefore, it is possible to adequately cope with a situation in which carrying over the right once is not enough.

In addition, the "specified number" in means C-2 may be the same number as the "specified number" in means C-1 (the specified number), or a different number (the specified number of means C-1 is the first specified number, and the specified number of the means C-2 is the second specified number).

Means C-3. When the second pending look-ahead effect is derived to the third pending display, until the second pending display is erased from the pending display means (for example, corresponding to the second pending display until the variable display of the identification information is started or stopped),
The gaming machine according to means C-2, wherein the display mode of the holding display means can be changed until the second holding look-ahead effect is derived for the second holding display.

As in the above means C-2, when the second pending look-ahead effect is derived to the third pending display instead of being derived to the second pending display, the mode of the third pending display and the third pending display Correspondence with the contents of the corresponding win/fail related information (variable display of identification information corresponding to) is deviated. In this case, the suggestion by the second pending look-ahead effect is irrelevant, and there is a risk that the pending look-ahead effect will be meaningless.

In this regard, according to this means C-3, it is assumed that the relationship between the form of the pending display and the content of the success/failure-related information corresponding to the pending display (variable display of identification information corresponding to) is deviated. are also configured to eventually repair such deviations to match. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the content suggested by the form of the reserved prefetch effect and the variable display of the win/fail related information corresponding to the reserved display from which the reserved prefetch effect is derived do not match each other.

Means C-4. In a state in which the first success/failure related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension prefetch effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first success/failure related information, By storing the second success-related information, although the right to derive the second pending prefetch effect is granted with respect to the second success-related information, the second pending display corresponding to the second success-related information In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
The right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised for the third pending display corresponding to the third right/fail related information stored in the pending storage means after the second right/fail related information. in the case of
When the first reserved display is deleted from the reserved display means, the target of the second reserved prefetch effect derived for the third reserved display is changed to the second reserved display, or Means C-3, characterized in that the probability of winning is increased by an approach lottery process for moving the target of the second pending look-ahead effect derived for the third pending display to the side of the second pending display. The game machine described.

According to the means C-4, while preventing a situation in which the first suspended prefetch effect and the second suspended prefetch effect are too close to each other, after the preceding first suspended prefetch effect is consumed, the second suspended prefetch effect is performed. and the second pending display (second right/fail related information) can be reliably matched.

Means C-5. The hold storage means comprises an execution area for storing the win/fail related information corresponding to the variable display being executed, and a plurality of hold areas for storing the win/fail related information corresponding to the variable display in the pending state,
The pending display means comprises an execution corresponding area corresponding to the execution area and a pending corresponding area corresponding to each of the pending areas,
In a state in which the first success/failure related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension prefetch effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first success/failure related information, By storing the second success-related information, although the right to derive the second pending prefetch effect is granted with respect to the second success-related information, the second pending display corresponding to the second success-related information In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
The right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised for the third pending display corresponding to the third right/fail related information stored in the pending storage means after the second right/fail related information. in the case of
When the second pending display moves to the execution corresponding area, the target of the second pending prefetch effect derived for the third pending display is changed to the second pending display. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-4.

According to the means C-5, it is possible to reliably match the second pending look-ahead effect with the second pending display (second success/failure related information).

Means C-6. In a state in which the first success/failure related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension prefetch effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first success/failure related information, By newly storing the second success-related information, although the right to derive the second pending prefetch effect is granted for the second success-related information, the second pending display corresponding to the second success-related information is provided. When the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived for and the standby state is set,
If the first pending display is erased from the pending display means before the right to derive the second pending prefetch effect is exercised, then the third right/fail relation stored pending in the pending storage means With respect to the information, the winning probability of the second appearing lottery process is increased, or the second pending look-ahead effect is always derived for the third pending display corresponding to the third right/fail related information. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to means C-5.

According to the means C-6, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first reserved look-ahead effect and the second reserved look-ahead effect are too close to each other, and to avoid wasting the right to derive the second reserved look-ahead effect as much as possible. can.

Means C-7. The hold storage means comprises an execution area for storing the win/fail related information corresponding to the variable display being executed, and a plurality of hold areas for storing the win/fail related information corresponding to the variable display in the pending state,
In a state in which the first success/failure related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension prefetch effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first success/failure related information, By storing the second success-related information, although the right to derive the second pending prefetch effect is granted with respect to the second success-related information, the second pending display corresponding to the second success-related information In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
In the case where the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third success-related information retained and stored in the retention storage means after the second success-related information, the second appearance lottery process corresponding to the third success-rejection-related information is selected. 3 A configuration in which the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised for the pending display,
storing a difference between the order in which the variable display of the first success-related information is executed and the order in which the variable display of the success-related information corresponding to the pending display targeted for the second pending prefetch effect is executed; A gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-6, characterized by comprising one-interval storage means.

According to means C-7, in the first and second appearance lottery processes for determining whether or not to exercise the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect, the interval between the first pending display is quickly grasped. becomes possible. Incidentally, in a state where the second pending look-ahead effect is derived for the third pending display, the interval between the first pending display and the third pending display is stored in the first interval storage means. .

Means C-8. The hold storage means comprises an execution area for storing the win/fail related information corresponding to the variable display being executed, and a plurality of hold areas for storing the win/fail related information corresponding to the variable display in the pending state,
In a state in which the first success/failure related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension prefetch effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first success/failure related information, By storing the second success-related information, although the right to derive the second pending prefetch effect is granted with respect to the second success-related information, the second pending display corresponding to the second success-related information In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
In the case where the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third success-related information retained and stored in the retention storage means after the second success-related information, the second appearance lottery process corresponding to the third success-rejection-related information is selected. 3 In the configuration where the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised for the pending display,
The apparatus further comprises second interval storage means for storing a difference between the order in which the variable display of the second right/failure related information is executed and the order in which the variable display of the third right/failure related information is executed. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-7.

According to the means C-8, it is possible to more quickly grasp the judgment as to whether or not the second pending look-ahead effect derived for the third pending display matches the second pending display.

Means C-9. In a state in which the first success/failure related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension prefetch effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first success/failure related information, By storing the second success-related information, although the right to derive the second pending prefetch effect is granted with respect to the second success-related information, the second pending display corresponding to the second success-related information In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
In the case where the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third success-related information retained and stored in the retention storage means after the second success-related information, the second appearance lottery process corresponding to the third success-rejection-related information is selected. 3 In the configuration where the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised for the pending display,
A case where the target of the second pending look-ahead effect derived with respect to the third pending display is elected in the approach lottery process of moving to the side of the second pending display, wherein the second pending display and the second When there is another pending display between the 3 pending displays, the target of the second pending prefetch effect is changed from the third pending display to the separate pending display, and further to the approach lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-8, wherein the second holding display is changed from the another holding display by winning the game.

According to the means C-9, when there is a distance of two or more between the second pending display and the third pending display, the second pending prefetch effect does not jump at once, but the intermediate (adjacent) pending display After moving once to , it will be derived to the second pending display of the final target in the form of further movement. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily change the target of the pending look-ahead effect. Furthermore, in a situation in which the player cannot gain an advantage by moving only one position, it is possible to provide an enthusiastic presentation such as "move more". Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the pending look-ahead effect more magnificently and in a more comprehensible manner.

Means C-10. The hold storage means comprises an execution area for storing the win/fail related information corresponding to the variable display being executed, and a plurality of hold areas for storing the win/fail related information corresponding to the variable display in the pending state,
In a state in which the first success/failure related information is stored in the suspension storage means and the first suspension prefetch effect is derived for the first suspension display corresponding to the first success/failure related information, By storing the second success-related information, although the right to derive the second pending prefetch effect is granted with respect to the second success-related information, the second pending display corresponding to the second success-related information In the case where the second pending look-ahead effect is not derived and the standby state is set,
In the case where the second appearance lottery process is won with respect to the third success-related information retained and stored in the retention storage means after the second success-related information, the second appearance lottery process corresponding to the third success-rejection-related information is selected. 3 In the configuration where the right to derive the second pending look-ahead effect is exercised for the pending display,
A specific effect that determines whether or not to derive a specific effect using the first reserved look-ahead effect mode and the second reserved look-ahead effect mode (when the second appearing lottery process is won) A configuration in which a lottery process is performed,
If you win in the specific effect lottery process,
From a state in which the first pending prefetch effect is derived for the first pending display and the second pending prefetch effect is derived for the third pending display in the pending display means,
A mode in which the mode of the first pending prefetch effect and the mode of the second pending prefetch effect are combined, or a mode that replaces the mode of the first pending prefetch effect and the mode of the second pending prefetch effect, The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-9, wherein the game machine is configured to be able to derive an integrated pending look-ahead effect derived in a display range including the second pending display.

Normally, the first reserved look-ahead effect and the second reserved look-ahead effect only suggest the content of one corresponding variable display (expectation of winning, etc.) depending on the aspect of each of the reserved look-ahead effects, but means C By performing an integrated pending lookahead effect of -10, it is possible to suggest one variable display in the form of multiple pending lookahead effects (before the result is obtained in the corresponding variable display), or to perform one pending lookahead effect It is possible to suggest a plurality of variable displays in a manner. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the reserved look-ahead effect and improve the effect.

In addition, by combining (integrating) the first reserved prefetch effect and the second reserved prefetch effect, the order and intervals of the first reserved prefetch effect and the second reserved prefetch effect are no longer restricted, and the integrated pending prefetch effect is It is possible to make the player feel that the state (special game state) expected by the player should be generated in response to (any of) the pending display targeted for the effect. Therefore, by deriving the pending look-ahead effect, it is possible to ensure the association that the player's sense of expectation is improved.

In addition, the integrated pending prefetch effect (mode) is the first pending prefetch effect (mode) and the second pending prefetch effect (mode), whichever has a higher expectation for the occurrence of the special game state. It is desirable to have at least, and it is more desirable to configure so that the degree of expectation may be improved by the amount of integration (union) of the pending look-ahead effect, or synergistically. That is, for example, when the targets of the first and second pending look-ahead effects are combined into one pending display, the number of pending displays targeted for the pending look-ahead effect is reduced by one, but the degree of expectation is reduced accordingly. Dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed by deriving a mode indicating that the is increased. Also, the mode of the integrated pending look-ahead effect may be derived across three or more pending displays. In this case, it is possible to derive a series of effects on a larger scale.

Means C-11. An effect display means configured to be able to teach the result of the lottery, and capable of deriving a variable display for effect performed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means,
When the integrated pending look-ahead effect is not derived in the holding display means, the variable display for effect in the effect display means is started together with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, and the identification information in the variable display means. is displayed at the same time as the stop display of the fluctuation display of ,
When the integrated pending prefetch effect is derived in the pending display means, the effect display means variably displays identification information on the variable display means corresponding to all the pending displays targeted for the integrated pending prefetch effect. From the start to the stop display, the variable display for effect is continuously derived (over (straddling) multiple times of variable display of the identification information on the variable display device, without being stopped in the middle). The game machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-10, characterized by:

According to the means C-11, during the period corresponding to the integrated suspension look-ahead effect, it is possible to determine which one of the plurality of suspension displays targeted for the integrated suspension look-ahead effect corresponds to or not by merely visually recognizing the effect display means. It becomes difficult to grasp whether the relevant information has been selected. Therefore, the action and effect that the game can be progressed without being constrained by the order, interval, etc. of the pending look-ahead effect can be achieved more reliably.

Also, in recent years, there are cases where the variable display time (variable time) of identification information is set relatively long, but it is inefficient in terms of progressing the game. In a configuration in which the player is disadvantaged when detection by the detection means is performed, there is concern that such a situation may easily occur if the fluctuation time is lengthened. In this regard, in this means, rather than using one variable display, the variation time of a plurality of variable displays is used to perform a relatively long effect, so the above problem can be suppressed.

Means C-12. The holding display means
a first pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating the number of the storage areas of the pending storage means in which the win/fail related information is stored;
A second pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating that the win-or-fail related information is stored in the storage area of the pending storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-11, wherein the reserved prefetch effect can be derived from the second reserved display of the second reserved display means.

According to the means C-12, even if various effects are performed in the second suspension display means, and a scene occurs in which the correspondence relationship between the suspension display and the suspension variable display is somewhat difficult to understand, the first Whether or not the variable display is suspended by the suspension display means can be grasped with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom, performance, etc. of the hold prefetch effect in the second hold display means. In particular, when the means C-10 and C-11 are employed, such effects become even more remarkable.

Means C-13. A connection for visualizing a process (midway) in which the pending display to which the pending prefetch effect is to be derived is changed from the pending display corresponding to the predetermined success-or-failure related information to another pending display in the pending display means. The game machine according to any one of means C-2 to C-12, characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive an effect.

For example, when the pending prefetch effect that has been derived to a predetermined pending display suddenly disappears and the pending prefetch effect is suddenly derived to another pending display, the previous pending prefetch effect and the later pending prefetch effect are different. , are considered to be independent (not related at all). In particular, if there is even a slight time lag between when the pending prefetch effect that has been derived to a predetermined pending display is erased and until the pending prefetch effect is derived to another pending display, or if the predetermined pending display In the case where the pending prefetch effect that has been derived to a predetermined pending display is erased after deriving the derived pending prefetch effect to another pending display (there is a period of duplicate derivation) , such concerns are made more pronounced.

On the other hand, according to the means C-13, the line of sight of the player can be guided from the pending display of the change source in which the target of the pending prefetch effect is changed to the pending display of the change destination by the connection effect. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the target of the pending read-ahead effect is changed.

In addition, as a connection effect, for example, before the change of the pending prefetch effect is performed, a character or the like is displayed in the pending display of the change source and the pending display of the change destination, and the change of the pending prefetch effect is performed. In the stage where the change is made, display as if sending out the pending prefetch effect in response to the pending display of the change source, and display as if the pending prefetch effect was received in response to the pending display of the change destination. may be In addition, as a connection effect, for example, from the pending display of the change source of the pending prefetch effect to the pending display of the change destination, a display that shows the trajectory of the movement of the mode of the pending prefetch effect (for example, the character is in the mode of the pending prefetch effect may be configured so that a display such as carrying the

D. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special game state is to be generated, and a variable display means is displayed. A variable display is provided to teach the result of the lottery (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, when a win/fail lottery is held while variable display is being performed, many devices are configured to suspend the variable display corresponding to the lottery. A pending display means is provided from which pending indications can be derived to allow the number of indications to be ascertained. Furthermore, in some cases, an effect suggesting the content of the corresponding variable display (so-called pending look-ahead effect) is performed before the variable display is executed.

By the way, it is demanded to further improve interest by using the pending look-ahead effect.

The problem described above is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of further improving interest by means of a hold look-ahead effect.

Means D-1. a condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be generated when the condition establishment detecting means is detected, and the special game state is generated based on the result of the lottery. a main control means;
variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
A gaming machine comprising display control means capable of stop-displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery after variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means,
information acquisition means for acquiring win/fail-related information about the win/fail lottery when the condition fulfillment detection means detects;
holding storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the win/fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating that the win-or-fail related information is stored in the storage area of the pending storage means;
At a stage prior to execution of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined win-or-fail related information stored in the pending storage means, the mode of the pending display corresponding to the predetermined win-fail related information is: configured to be able to derive a pending look-ahead effect that is a specific mode that suggests the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the pending display,
A matching state in which each mode of the pending display displayed on the pending display means corresponds (one-to-one) with the win/fail related information stored in each storage area of the pending storage means , and a non-matching state that does not correspond.

According to the means D-1, it is possible to perform more diverse, freer, and more dynamic presentations using the pending display than in the case of performing only the presentation related to the holding so as not to disturb the matching state. Furthermore, in the case of trying to perform an effect within a range that does not break the matching state, on the contrary, the effect may feel forced, the conditions for executing the effect are strict, and the opportunities for the effect are reduced. There is a concern that the sense of being there is lost (no randomness), or that not only the variable display from which the pending look-ahead effect is derived, but also the contents of the variable display before and after it are transparent. On the other hand, like this means, by interposing a non-matching state as necessary, each production up to the final mode can be easily understood (reduced jumps in production) and can be shown concisely. It is also possible to reduce the amount of control performed at one time (divide the control up to the final mode). Furthermore, even if the content of the variable display is suggested by the pending look-ahead effect, it may still be in a non-matching state. can also be lost. Therefore, it is possible to improve game performance and performance, suppress monotony, and simplify control.

Means D-2. The holding display means
a first pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating the number of the storage areas of the pending storage means in which the win/fail related information is stored;
A second pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating that (even one) the success/failure related information is stored in the storage area of the pending storage means,
The pending prefetch effect is configured to be derivable with respect to the second pending display of the second pending display means,
In the matching state, the number of each pending display displayed on the second pending display means and the number of the win/fail related information stored in each storage area of the pending storage means match, and The gaming machine according to means D-1, characterized in that they do not match in the non-matching state.

According to the means D-2, for example, a number of pending displays larger than the actual variable pending number in the second pending display means is derived with the pending look-ahead effect, and the subsequent effect renders the unnecessary pending The number of pending displays is not limited to the number of win-or-fail related information that is stored pending, such as effects where the display is erased and only the necessary items remain, or multiple pending displays are combined into one. To dramatically improve the performance effect of the suspension performance by making it possible to derive the suspension performance that freely changes the display, and to perform effective performance such as dramatically increasing the expectation of the corresponding variable display. can be done.

Also, even if the number of pending displays on the second pending display means does not match the variable pending number, the number of pending variable displays can be grasped with certainty by checking the first display means. .

Means D-3. An effect display means configured to be able to teach the result of the lottery, and capable of deriving a variable display for effect performed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means,
It is configured to be able to derive an integrated pending look-ahead effect in which a plurality of the second pending displays are combined into one,
When the integrated pending look-ahead effect is not derived in the second pending display means, the variable display for effect in the effect display means is started together with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means. It is stopped and displayed together with the stop display of the variable display of the identification information,
When the integrated pending prefetch effect is derived in the second pending display means, in the effect display means, identification information in the variable display means corresponding to all the pending displays targeted for the integrated pending prefetch effect The means D-2 according to means D-2, characterized in that, from the start of the variable display to the stop display, the variable display for effect is continuously derived over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information on the variable display device. game machine.

According to the means D-3, the mode in which the plurality of second pending displays are put together in the second pending display means can be reliably matched with the variable display in the effect display means, and the integrated pending look-ahead effect is supported. It is possible to improve the degree of expectation, etc. of the variable display.

Also, in recent years, there are cases where the variable display time (variable time) of identification information is set relatively long, but it is inefficient in terms of progressing the game. In a configuration in which the player is disadvantaged when detection by the detection means is performed, there is concern that such a situation may easily occur if the fluctuation time is lengthened. In this regard, in this means, rather than using one variable display, the variation time of a plurality of variable displays is used to perform a relatively long effect, so the above problem can be suppressed.

Means D-4. In the matching state, the state of the pending prefetch effect derived corresponding to each of the pending displays displayed on the pending display means and the success/failure relation stored in each storage area of the pending storage means The game machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-3, wherein the contents of the information correspond to each other and are not corresponded in the non-matching state.

According to the means D-4, it is possible to appropriately change the variable display from which the pending look-ahead effect is derived, if necessary, to make the effect easier to understand, improve the game performance and performance, and reduce the monotonous feeling. It is possible to more reliably achieve the above effects such as suppression and simplification of control.

Means D-5. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
Any of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that the mode of the pending display in the pending display means can be reset according to a predetermined input based on the operation of the operating means. The game machine described.

The pending look-ahead effect is set based on the contents of the corresponding variable display and, by extension, the result of the lottery, so the variable display that corresponds to the "loss" in the lottery and does not perform any particular effect is continuous. In that case, even if the pending look-ahead effect is derived to the corresponding pending display, there is a concern that the monotonous feeling cannot be removed, or the period in which the pending look-ahead effect itself is not derived continues.

On the other hand, when the reserved prefetch effect is derived excessively, the reliability of the reserved prefetch effect is lowered, and there is concern that the effect of deriving the reserved prefetch effect is reduced.

In this regard, according to the means D-5, the player's operation to the operation means is used as various triggers for the pending look-ahead effect, and the pending display is reset. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of performance opportunities (during a relatively boring time other than the timing at which the result of the variable display is determined) to reflect the player's intention in the game, thereby improving the game performance and performance. , suppression of monotony, etc. can be achieved.

Furthermore, regarding the resetting of the state of the pending display, the player can obtain a greater sense of satisfaction because he/she performs the operation himself, and the pending prefetching can be performed in such a manner that the player can perform or not perform the operation based on his/her own idea. A player can selectively participate in the presentation. Therefore, the difference between each player, such as feeling that the pending prefetch effect is too much or too little, is alleviated, and in fact, due to the fact that the pending prefetch effect is derived excessively, the reliability of the pending prefetch effect, etc. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of players who can enjoy the reserved look-ahead effect is too rare and the number of players who can enjoy it decreases. As a result, both a player who wants to be actively involved in the game and a player who prefers a simple effect can be satisfied with the amount of the pending prefetch effect, and at the same time, the amount of the pending prefetch effect can be derived. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the performance effect due to the derivation of the pending look-ahead effect is reduced in spite of the increase in control.

It should be noted that even if there is no predetermined input based on the operation of the operation means, (or if the mode of the pending display in the pending display means becomes a specific mode, or even if it does not become), there is a case where the pending look-ahead effect is derived. It may be configured to be Also, for a player who prefers a simple presentation, it may be configured so that the status of the pending display does not change according to the player's will.

Means D-6. A plurality of patterns are prepared for the mode of the pending display on the pending display means which is reset according to a predetermined input based on the operation of the operating means, and the mode of the pending display on the pending display means is a specific mode. The gaming machine according to means D-5, wherein the reserved look-ahead effect is derived or a right to derive the reserved look-ahead effect is granted when the game becomes.

According to the means D-6, it is possible to provide a new playability using the hold display, and further achieve the above-mentioned effects such as suppressing the monotonous feeling.

It should be noted that it is also possible that "the suspension look-ahead effect is derived when the combination of the plurality of suspension displays on the suspension display means becomes a specific mode". In this case, it is possible to thoroughly enjoy the appearance of a combination of a plurality of pending displays gradually changing toward a specific mode, which makes it possible to draw more interest in such effects, and furthermore, monotonous display. The above effects of suppressing the feeling of sensibility and the like are further exhibited.

Means D-7. A predetermined input based on the operation of the operation means is configured to be switchable between a reset enabled state and a reset disabled state effective as a trigger for resetting the mode of the pending display on the pending display means,
Means D characterized in that, when a predetermined input based on the operation of the operation means is detected in the reset valid state, a reset mode lottery process for determining the mode of the pending display in the pending display means is performed. -5 or the gaming machine according to D-6.

According to the means D-7, since it is not predetermined what kind of mode will be derived when the player performs a predetermined input based on the operation means, the mode of the pending display is re-determined. Amusement can be added to the setting itself. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of suppressing the feeling of monotony can be further achieved.

It should be noted that "in the resetting valid state, after the predetermined input based on the operation of the operating means is performed, until the resetting of the suspension display mode in the suspension display means is completed, the resetting invalid state It may be said that In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which resetting of the pending display mode is never completed. Therefore, it is possible to establish an effect such as resetting the state of the pending display, and to simplify the control. Further, it may be "equipped with effective teaching means for indicating that the resetting effective state is set". In addition, ``the visual mode of the operating means changes between the resetting enabled state and the resetting disabled state'', and ``the effective teaching means derives a display prompting the operation of the operating means. You can also say "things".

Means D-8. an operation time measurement means for measuring an operation time of the operation means; and
At least one of the operation number counting means for counting the number of operations per specified time of the operation means,
Means D-5 to D- characterized in that an algorithm for the reset mode lottery process differs depending on whether the first input is performed or the second input is performed by the operation means. 8. The gaming machine according to any one of 7.

According to the means D-8, various inputs can be made with one operation means. Therefore, after making it easy to reflect the intention of the player regarding the effect of changing the state of the pending display, the number of operation means that triggers resetting of the state of the pending display is reduced as much as possible. It is possible to improve the sexuality and strengthen the interest in the operation. By reducing the number of operation means as much as possible, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the effect involving the operation of the operation means, and to suppress an increase in the space required for installing the operation means.

Means D-9. Equipped with an approach detection means for detecting contact or proximity to a predetermined portion provided on the front side of the game machine,
The game according to any one of means D-5 to D-8, characterized in that the state of the hold display in the hold display means can be reset based on the detection information of the approach detection means. machine.

According to the means D-9, it is possible to enable various inputs when resetting the state of the pending display. For example, when the approach detection means is configured to detect an object approaching the operation means, the result may vary depending on the time the hand is held in front of the operation means before operating the operation means. Before operating , it is possible to reset with the detection of the approach detection means as a trigger. Also, for example, when the approach detection means is configured to be able to detect contact or proximity to the holding display means (the part where each holding display is displayed), each holding display is directly touched Since it looks like this, the operation is intuitive and easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the user more interested in the on-hold display, and to prevent the user from overlooking the "resetting of the on-hold display mode". Furthermore, by making the operation easy to understand, it is possible to avoid situations such as the time running out due to confusion over the operation, or the game tempo becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such an operation. . In particular, when an operation to select one of a plurality of pending displays is required, the target pending display can be selected more easily and reliably. .

Means D-10. Covering means capable of changing the state between a covered state covering the front of the holding display means and an exposed state exposing the holding display means forward,
A game according to any one of means D-1 to D-9, characterized in that at least a part of the front of the suspension display displayed on the suspension display means is covered by the covering means in the covering state. machine.

According to the means D-10, it is possible to derive a more interesting effect by combining the change in the mode of the pending display and the pending look-ahead effect and the behavior of the covering means. In addition, when the covering means is configured to be able to cover until the whole of the pending display is rendered invisible or difficult to see, it is possible to hide the moment when the mode of the pending display or the pending read-ahead effect changes. It is possible to improve the performance whether or not the change has occurred. In particular, when the covering means is configured to be able to individually cover each of the reserved displays displayed on the reserved display means, it is possible to limit the reserved display to which attention is desired among the plurality of reserved displays. It is possible to make it easier to recognize whether or not a change has been made. Furthermore, when the covering means is configured to be able to cover a part of the reserved display until it becomes invisible or difficult to see, the form of the reserved display or the reserved look-ahead effect and the form of the covering means are combined. , a more interesting aspect can be derived.

It should be noted that the covering means has a fully covered state in which the entire predetermined reserved display can be covered (in effect, the reserved display cannot be recognized), and a partially covered state in which a part of the predetermined reserved display can be covered (the reserved display is It can be narrowed down to a plurality of patterns, but the exact pattern is difficult to understand) and the retracted state.

Means D-11. An effect display means configured to be able to teach the result of the lottery, and capable of deriving a variable display for effect performed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means,
In a configuration in which the variable display for effect in the effect display means is started together with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, and is stop-displayed together with the stop display of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means,
The holding display means is configured by a part of the effect display means,
The gaming machine according to means D-10, wherein the covering means is capable of covering only a portion of the effect display means that corresponds to the holding display means.

According to the means D-11, for example, compared to a configuration in which the covering means covers the entire effect display means, it is possible to attract attention to the mode of the pending display means, and to recognize more changes in the mode of the pending display means. can make it easier to get In addition, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visual recognition of other parts of the effect display means by the covering means in the covering position. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the timing of presentation using the covering means.

Means D-12. An effect display means configured to be able to teach the result of the lottery, and capable of deriving a variable display for effect performed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means,
In a configuration in which the variable display for effect in the effect display means is started together with the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, and is stop-displayed together with the stop display of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means,
The holding display means is configured by a part of the effect display means,
When the mode of the pending display is changed (reset) in the pending display means, visual recognition in which the visible mode changes before and after the mode change of the pending display in a region of the effect display means other than the pending display means. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-11, characterized by being configured to display a changing object.

According to the means D-12, while the player's attention is focused on the holding display means, the visual mode is quietly changed (without sound effects, etc.) in other parts of the effect display means. When the user's attention shifts to the variable display for effect of the effect display means, he/she can feel surprise and amusement by noticing the change in the visual recognition mode of the effect display means.

Means D-13. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a shooting operation means provided at a position operable by the player and serving as the operation means for shooting a game ball by the shooting means based on the player's operation;
a game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which the game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
a starting ball entry detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entering means;
The main control means is configured to perform the winning lottery when the starting ball detection means detects,
When the starting ball detection means is detected during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means, the winning/failure-related information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the empty memory of the reserved storage means. stored in the area,
The holding storage means is configured to be capable of storing a specified number of the win/fail related information acquired based on the detection by the starting entry detection means,
In a state in which the specified number of win-or-fail related information acquired based on the detection of the starting ball detection means is stored in the holding storage means, when the detection of the starting ball detection means is performed , (the mode of the pending display in the pending display means becomes a specific mode), the pending prefetch effect is derived, or a right to derive the pending prefetch effect is granted. The gaming machine according to any one of D-12.

Conventionally, even if a game ball enters the starting ball entering means in a state where it is not possible to store any more win-or-fail related information in the holding storage means (there is no free storage area) (so-called "over winning") ), the winning/failing related information is not stored in the holding storage means (the variable display is not held). rice field. On the other hand, it is conceivable to increase the number of storage areas in the holding storage means. As a result, the difference in the ratio of the number of times the identification information is changed to the number of game balls shot increases, or the game balance (the number of game balls shot and the number of game balls shot, In order to adjust the ratio of the number of game balls paid out, etc.), by lowering the probability of a win-or-fail lottery or reducing the number of game balls paid out based on the number of game balls entering the starting ball entry means, There is a concern that the difference will become greater or that the degree of freedom in design will decrease.

In this regard, according to the means D-13, when the game ball wins over in the starting ball entry means, the reserved look-ahead effect is derived or the right to derive the reserved look-ahead effect is granted. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation that the game balls over-entering the starting ball-entering means is completely useless, and the bad impression caused by the over-entering of the game balls into the starting ball-entering means is reduced. can be achieved. Incidentally, according to this means, the detection of the game ball entering the starting ball entering means by the starting ball entering means corresponds to the predetermined input based on the operation of the operating means. Further, in a special state such as a special game state in which variable display is not performed, even if an over-win is made, the reserved prefetch effect may not be derived or the right to derive the reserved prefetch effect may not be granted. .

Means D-14. The start-up ball entry means comprises a first start-up ball entry means and a second start-up ball entry means,
A first ball entry mode in which entry of a game ball to the second start ball entry means is difficult or impossible, and a game ball enters the second start ball entry means compared to the first ball entry mode. There is a second ball entry mode that makes it easier to hit the ball,
Regarding the sorting of the type of the special game state given when winning in the winning lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means, the entry to the second start ball entry means In the sorting based on the ball, the type to which the second ball entering mode is given is more likely to be selected than in the sorting based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering means,
First win-or-fail related information acquired based on entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry means, and second win/failure related information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means When the related information is stored in the reserved storage means, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second right/wrong related information is faster than the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first right/wrong related information. A preferentially digested configuration,
The holding storage means is configured to be able to store a first specified number of the first success/failure related information and is configured to be able to store a second specified number of the second success/failure related information,
When the second start-up ball detecting means detects the second winning/failing related information in the second predetermined number of pieces of information stored in the holding storage means,
Means D-13, characterized in that the pending prefetch effect is derived preferentially with respect to the pending display corresponding to the first right/fail related information stored in the storage area of the pending storage means. game machine.

In particular, "in the state where the second success-or-failure related information is stored in the second prescribed number in the holding storage means, the holding look-ahead effect is derived by detecting the second start-up ball detecting means. or when it is determined that the right to derive the pending look-ahead effect is granted, the result of the lottery itself of the predetermined first win-or-fail related information stored in the reserve storage means is taught. in a manner that the pending prefetch effect is derived for the pending display corresponding to the predetermined first right/fail related information."

When both the first right/failure related information and the second right/failure related information are stored in the reserved storage means, if the second right/failure related information is not interrupted in the reserved storage means, the first right/failure related information can be postponed, and it is possible in the second entry mode. In other words, in the second ball entry mode, although it is expected that the second winning/failing related information will win the lottery, if the first winning/failing related information is stored in the holding storage means, the first winning/failure related information is stored. It is feared that a situation may arise in which the player cannot leave the seat even if he/she wants to, because he/she does not want to digest the win-or-fail related information (continues to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means).

In this regard, according to the means D-14, by over-winning the game ball to the starting ball entry means, the pending look-ahead effect is derived with priority over the pending display corresponding to the first win/fail related information. ing. Therefore, with such pending prefetch effect, it may be possible to grasp the contents (correctness) of the first success-related information in advance. can be determined in the previous stage. As a result, it is possible to reduce situations in which the user refrains from leaving their seat. In particular, when the pending look-ahead effect is derived in a manner in which the result of the lottery of the first win/fail related information itself is taught, such an effect can be achieved more reliably.

In addition, since it is practically impossible to keep the storage of the second win-or-fail related information in the first ball-entering mode, "only in the second ball-entering mode, according to the detection by the starting ball-entering detection means, the It may be said that the pending prefetch effect is derived. In addition, "Only during mobile-linked games that are performed with information from the server input in the game machine that can exchange game information with the server via the communication mobile terminal owned by the player , the pending look-ahead effect is derived according to the detection by the start-up ball detection means." In this case, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile-linked game.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

a. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A pinball game machine provided with a game area in which a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine having a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) that guides the game balls and extends along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation port, etc.), and configured to enable visual recognition of the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

c. The game machine or each pinball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

d. The game machine in each of the above means is a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or belt with a design) consisting of a plurality of identification information (designs) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel (e.g., rotation), a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string, The identification information (design) starts to change, the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop A reel-type gaming machine constructed so that game values are given on the condition that the information is specific identification information".

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine (particularly, a gaming machine of slot machine specifications using game balls as game media). As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or belt with a design) consisting of a plurality of identification information (designs) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel (e.g., rotation), a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string, The identification information (design) starts to change, the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop A game value is given on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball receiving tray (upper tray or the like) is provided to take in a game ball from the ball receiving tray; A game machine comprising a payout means for paying out game balls, and constructed so that a game start condition is satisfied when the game balls are taken in by the take-in means.

10... Pachinko machine 32... Variable winning device 33a... First starting winning device 33b... Second starting winning device 34... Through gate 42... Decorative pattern display device 43a... First special display device 43b... Second 2 special display devices, 46a, 46b, reserved display device, 261 main control device, 262 sub-control device.

Claims (1)

a condition satisfaction detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied;
control means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the condition establishment detection means detects, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery; A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images